JP6422550B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, an outer frame, a main body frame that can be opened and closed on the front side of the outer frame, and a door frame that can be opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame. It has. For example, a decorative lamp is attached to the front of the door frame, or an opening covered with a transparent plate such as a glass plate is formed, and the game board held on the main body frame is visually recognized through the transparent plate. You can do that.

  In this type of gaming machine, an overhanging portion that bulges forward is provided, for example, at the top or side of the front surface of the door frame so that the originality is pursued for each gaming machine and is easily noticed by the player. A decorative panel with a decorative design (including model name, logo associated with the model name, original design related to the model, etc.) corresponding to the machine type is provided on the front of the overhanging part. Is known (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-102908 A

However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is a possibility that if a game medium is spilled, a game ball may be sandwiched between the outer frame and the main body frame.

This invention is made | formed in view of such a situation, The objective is to reduce that a game ball is pinched | interposed between an outer frame and a main body frame.

[Solution 1]
A gaming machine comprising an outer frame and a body frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, wherein a game is played using a game ball,
The outer frame is
A lower member including a curtain plate, which is provided at a lower portion and on which the main body frame is placed in a state where the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame;
A hinge member that is provided on the left side of the outer frame and supports the main body frame so that it can be opened and closed;
Having at least
A game ball discharge area for discharging the game ball to the rear side of the curtain plate, formed at a position retracted rearward on the side where the hinge member is provided,
A standing wall portion that is formed in a horizontally long shape including the rear of the game ball discharge area;
With
The game ball discharge area is formed at least on the right side of the rotation shaft when the main body frame opens and closes, but is not formed in a portion in contact with the standing wall portion directly behind the rotation shaft,
The upper end of the upright wall portion at a position retracted rearward on the side where the hinge member is provided is a portion of the portion of the curtain plate where the main body frame is placed where the upright wall portion does not exist at the position retracted rearward To be higher than the top of
Provide a return portion extending forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion,
When the main body frame is closed, the entire game ball discharge area is not blocked by the lower surface of the main body frame .

According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the game ball from being sandwiched between the outer frame and the main body frame .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from the lower side, abbreviate | omitting the left frame member, (b) is an exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). . (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. (A) is AA sectional drawing in FIG. 1, (b) is sectional drawing which shows the state which opened the main body frame with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing shown in the state which provided the guidance blade | wing in the site | part of the outer frame side lower hinge member, and opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame, (b) is an outer frame in embodiment of (a). It is explanatory drawing shown in the state which closed the main body frame with respect, (c) is equipped with the guidance blade | wing of embodiment different from (a) and (b), and shows the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame. It is explanatory drawing, (d) is explanatory drawing shown in the state which closed the main body frame with respect to the outer frame in embodiment of (c). It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of the plate unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the top. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from below after disassembling each main member. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit of production | presentation operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of an effect operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of an effect operation unit in CC cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right production unit of a plate unit, (b) is a right view of a door lower right production unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the back. It is DD sectional drawing in the door lower right direction production unit of FIG.43 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right effect unit faces forward, and (b) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body faces rearward. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front in the state which attached the top dish ball removal unit to the dish unit base in (a), (b) from the back in the state which attached the top dish ball removal unit to the dish unit base FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the top dish ball removal unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper tray ball removal unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the front after removing the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back after removing the cover member. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of a payout unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction channel | path with the ball extraction movable piece in the dispensing device, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the ball extraction channel | path with the ball extraction movable piece. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the delivery blade | wing in a delivery device. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit from the back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path | route unit and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is closed in a lower full sphere path | route unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the taxiway opening / closing door of a form different from FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view seen from the front which shows only the front structural member and game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view seen from the back which shows only the front structural member and game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit of the game board from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the start port unit of the front unit from the front upper, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the start port unit from back lower. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the side unit of the front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the side unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit of the front unit from the front top, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back, and (c) is the perspective which looked at the attacker unit from back and bottom. FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the center combination of a front unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center role of a front unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back top movable production | presentation unit in the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back top movement production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top movable production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top movable production | presentation unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper decoration body unit of the back upper movable production | generation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper decoration body unit of the back upper movable production | generation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the back top sub-decoration body in a back top movable decoration body unit. It is a front view which shows the state of an internal mechanism when the back surface decoration body unit of a back surface movable production | presentation unit is a retracted position. It is a front view which shows the state of an internal mechanism when the back top decoration body unit of a back top movable production | presentation unit is a 1st appearance position. It is a front view which shows the state of an internal mechanism when the back top decoration body unit of a back top movable production | presentation unit is a 2nd appearance position. (A) is a front view which shows a part of internal mechanism of a back movable production | generation effect unit, (b) is the perspective view which looked at a part different from (a) in an internal mechanism from the front, (c) [FIG. 2] is the perspective view which looked at (b) from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows a one part movement of the internal mechanism of a back top movable production | presentation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the main member which comprises the internal mechanism in a retracted position, (b) is a 1st transmission member rotating from the state of (a) to a 1st to-be-transmitted member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state by which transmission of rotation of this was started. (C) shows a state where the first transmitted member and the first transmitted member are further rotated from the state of FIG. 113 (b), and the back decorative unit is lowered from the retracted position toward the first appearance position. It is explanatory drawing, (d) is a state where the 1st to-be-transmitted member further rotates with the 1st transmitting member from the state of (c), the transmission of the rotation to the 1st to-be-transmitted member is completed, and the back decorative unit is It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which reached | attained one appearance position. FIG. 114E shows a state in which the second transmission member of the transmission mechanism that has been rotated together with the first transmission member from the state of FIG. 114D further rotates and transmission of rotation to the second transmitted member is started. (F) is explanatory drawing which shows, and a 2nd to-be-transmitted body unit rotates from the state of (e) with a 2nd transmission member, and a back upper decoration body unit descend | falls from a 1st appearance position to a 2nd appearance position. FIG. FIG. 115 (g) shows a state in which the second receiving member rotates together with the second transmitting member from the state of FIG. 115 (f), and the back decorative unit rotates while further descending toward the second appearance position. (H) is an explanatory view, and (h) is a state where the second transmission member is further rotated together with the second transmission member from the state of (g), the transmission of the rotation to the second transmission member is finished, and the back decorative unit is It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which reached | attained the 2nd appearance position by half-rotating, falling from the state of the 1st appearance position. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front movable production | presentation unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front movable production | presentation unit of a back unit from the back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the back bottom front 1st decoration body and back bottom front 2nd decoration body from the front in the state of a normal retracted position, and (b) is back bottom front It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front in the state of an appearance position the back lower front 1st decoration body and the back lower front 2nd decoration body of a movable production | presentation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back right movable production unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back right movable production unit of the back unit from the back. (A) is a front view of the back-right movable effect unit showing the first decorative surface of the back-right rotated decorative body facing the front, and (b) is the shutter of the back-right rotated decorative body opened in (a). (C) is a front view of the back-right movable effect unit shown in a state where the second decorative surface of the back-right rotation decorative body is directed to the front, (d) ) Is a front view of the back-right movable effect unit showing the third decorative surface of the back-right rotating decorative body facing the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back left movable production unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back left movable production unit of the back unit from the back. (A) is a front view of the back left movable production | presentation unit shown in the state which orient | assigned the 1st decoration surface of the back left rotation decoration body to the front, (b) is the 2nd decoration surface of a back left rotation decoration body in the front. (C) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit shown with the third decorative surface of the back left rotating decorative body facing the front, d) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit showing a state where the back left protruding decorative body of the back left rotating decorative body is set as the appearance position in the state of (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line | wire in Fig.122 (a). (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom movable movable production unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom movable movable production unit of the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering unit of the back direction movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering unit of the movable production | reproduction unit behind back, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the raising / lowering unit when a back lower back rotation decoration unit is a falling end position from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the raising / lowering unit when a back bottom rotation decoration unit is a raise end position from the front. (A) is a front view of the rear back movable movable effect unit, (b) is a perspective view of the back bottom rear rotating decorative body unit of the back lower rear movable effect unit, and (c) is the back bottom. It is the perspective view which looked at the back lower back rotation decoration body unit of the back movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower back rotation decoration body unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower back rotation decoration body unit, and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line | wire in Fig.129 (a). (A) is a front view which shows the state which the back bottom back rotation decoration body of the back bottom back rotation decoration body has stopped rotating, (b) is a front view counterclockwise direction of a back bottom rotation decoration body. It is a front view which shows the state which is rotating, (c) is a front view which shows a state just before a rotation decoration body is opened and rotated in the front view clockwise direction, and (d) is a back bottom It is a front view which shows the state which the back rotation decoration body is rotating in the clockwise direction of a front view. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the drive mechanism which concerns on a back bottom back rotation decoration body unit in a back bottom back rotation decoration body unit, (b) is the differential mechanism which concerns on a rotation damper in a back bottom back rotation decoration body unit. (C) is a configuration of a connecting mechanism that connects a drive mechanism related to a back-under-rear and rear rotation drive motor and a differential mechanism related to a rotary damper in the back-and-back rear rotation decorative body unit. It is explanatory drawing shown. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when a back lower back rotation ornamental body is closed and has stopped rotation, (b) is a back bottom back rotation ornamental body rotated in the counterclockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the connection mechanism at the time of being. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when a back rotation decoration body is closed and the rotation stop is carried out, (b) is the back when the connection ring of a drive mechanism rotates in the clockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when a lower back rotation decoration body is opening, (c) is the connection ring of a drive mechanism rotating further in the clockwise direction, and a back lower back rotation decoration body is completely It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the connection mechanism when it opens, (d) of a connection mechanism when the back bottom back rotation decoration body of the open state is rotating clockwise with the connection mechanism of a drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows a state. It is the perspective view which looked at the back four corner movable production unit of a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back four corner movable production unit of a back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back four corner 1st unit in a back four corner movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back four corner 1st unit in a back four corner movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back four corner 2nd unit in a back four corner movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back four corner 2nd unit in a back four corner movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable production unit in the normal retracted position state, and (b) is the back four corner first in the state where the back four corner first decorative body is in the appearance position. It is a front view of a unit, and (c) is a front view of a back four corner first unit in the state where a back four corner second decoration object appears. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a drive mechanism when a back four corner 1st decoration body is a retracted position in a back four corner 1 unit from the left side, (b) is a back four corner first in a back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism in the middle of a decoration body from an evacuation position to an appearance position from a left side, (c) is a drive mechanism when a back four corner first decoration body is an appearance position in a back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state from the left side. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a drive mechanism when a back four corner 2nd decoration body is a retracted position in a back four corner 1 unit from a left side, (b) is a back four corner second in a back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism in the middle of the decoration body from the retracted position to the appearance position from the left side, and (c) is the drive mechanism when the back four corner second decoration body is the appearance position in the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state from the left side. It is a front view of the game board which shows a motion of the surface movable decoration body of the surface movable production | presentation unit in a center actor. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of the back appearance decoration body of the back top movable production | presentation unit in a back unit in the 1st appearance position. The back upper decorative body of the back movable movable unit in the back unit is in the second appearance position, and the back lower front first decorative body and the back lower front second decorative body of the back lower front movable directive unit are in the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows. A pair of shutters are open with the first decorative surface of the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable effect unit in the back unit facing forward, and the first decoration of the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable effect unit. It is a front view of the game board showing the state of the appearance position of the back left protruding decorative body with the surface facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back right rotation decoration body of the back right movable production unit in the back unit, and the back left rotation decoration body of the back left movable production unit with the respective second decoration surfaces facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows a back right rotation decoration object of a back right movable production unit in a back unit, and a back left rotation decoration object of a back left movement production unit in the state where each 3rd decoration surface turned to the front. It is a front view of the game board showing a state where the back-under-bottom after-rotation decorative body of the back-under-back movable effect unit in the back unit is rotated counterclockwise at the rising end position. In the back unit, the back and back rotating decorative body of the back and bottom movable effect unit is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front at the rising end position, and the back four corner second decorative body of the back and four corner movable effect unit is at the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows a state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back four corner 1st decoration body of the back four corner movable production | presentation unit in a back unit in the state of an appearance position. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is the interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) A jackpot determination table used for the lottery process for the big hit, and (B) a symbol determination table used for the lottery process for the big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16mS steady process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a timing chart of battle production. It is a timing chart of battle production. It is explanatory drawing shown about an example of a battle effect. It is explanatory drawing shown about an example of a battle effect. It is explanatory drawing shown about an example of a battle effect. It is the front view of the game board which cut | disconnected the front structural member and the front unit in the approximate center of the front-back direction in the game area | region. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the right part in the game area in FIG. 174, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing only the main part by cutting along the line HH in (a). It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the top large winning opening vicinity in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the reservation number display in the display panel of a center liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold | maintenance change effect using the hold number display in the display panel of a center liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example as a continuation of the pending | holding change effect of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example as a continuation of the pending | holding change effect of FIG. It is a time chart which represents typically the change change display of this example, the change of the display color of the hold image used as object, and the display color of the hold image used as the object which changes a display position with digestion of hold memory. 168 is a flowchart showing each process executed by the peripheral control MPU in connection with the hold storage as each process in the effect control process in step S602 of FIG. 168. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the pending | holding number designation | designated command processing which peripheral control MPU performs. FIG. 183 is a continuation of the flowchart in FIG. 183. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the pending | holding advance notice determination process which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the pending | holding notice effect process which the periphery control MPU performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the pending | holding image shift process which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a figure which shows each table, memory | storage area, and processing operation required in order that peripheral control MPU may perform each process in connection with pending | holding memory | storage. It is an example of the figure which shows the flow of a reservation notice effect. It is a scenario pattern table which shows the pattern in which the display color of a notice pending | holding image changes. It is a figure which shows a time chart when an immediate movable pattern is selected in participation type movable character effect. It is a figure which shows a time chart when the movable pattern after 1 second is selected in the participation type movable character effect. It is a figure which shows a time chart when a movable pattern is selected after 2 seconds in the participation type movable combination effect. It is a figure which shows the pattern of the timing which a back top movable production | presentation unit moves. It is the figure which showed the flow of the production in which a movable pattern advance notice is performed when a movable hand effect is selected after 1 second in the participation type movable hand effect. It is a figure which shows the time chart when a production game is successful. It is a figure which shows the time chart at the time of failing in a production | presentation game. It is a figure which shows the pattern of the timing which the back top movable production | presentation unit moves for every number of rounds when a big hit is drawn. It is a figure which shows a time chart when the immediate change pattern is selected in the reservation notice effect. It is a figure which shows a time chart when the change pattern after 1 second is selected in the reservation notice effect. It is a figure which shows a time chart when a change pattern after 2 seconds is selected in the reservation notice effect. It is a change timing table which shows the change timing pattern of a notice hold image in a hold notice effect. It is a figure which shows a series of flows of the reservation notice effect which compared the case where a change effect after 1 second is selected, and the case where an immediate change effect is selected. It is a change timing table which shows the change timing pattern of the notice pending | holding image for every number of rounds when a big hit is drawn. It is a figure which shows an example of a series of flows in a notice variation production. It is a figure which shows the sketch of the field which the main character 1500a walks in a loop image | video. 6 is a diagram showing a loop image displayed on a central liquid crystal display device 1500. FIG. FIG. 207 is a diagram showing a continuation of the loop video in FIG. 207. It is a figure which shows the production table which stores the production pattern used for a real-time production. It is a figure which shows the period which can perform an object action with a graph for every scene. It is a flowchart which selects stepwise according to change time which effect pattern is selected when it is determined by the peripheral control MPU that a real-time effect is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the real-time effect performed when the main character 1500a exists in the area of the scene 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a loop image process and the selected production pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a loop effect. It is a figure showing the state where a side overhang is located in a fixed position. It is a figure which shows the state which the side protrusion moved upwards from the fixed position. It is a figure which shows the accommodating part and sheet | seat insertion opening corresponding to a side protrusion, (A) is a figure which shows that a cover part is an open state. (B) is a figure which shows that a cover part is a closed state. It is a figure which shows the state in which the sheet | seat arrange | positioned at the accommodating part corresponding to a side overhang | alignment is located side by side in the some game machine side by side. It is a schematic diagram of the belt-type movable part which slide-moves a right extension panel and a right extension panel. FIG. 219 is a view of the AA cross section of FIG. 219 viewed from below. It is a figure which shows the state which the right movable sheet | seat and the left movable sheet | seat protrude in the player side. (A) is a figure which shows the movable sheet rotating mechanism which rotates and moves a right movable sheet and a right movable sheet. (B) is a schematic diagram showing a rotation mode of the right movable sheet. It is a figure which shows the state which the side overhang | opening is open. It is a figure which shows the state which the side protrusion has closed. It is a figure which shows the side overhang | rotation and the side overhang | rotation rotation mechanism by the rack and pinion which rotationally moves a side overhang. It is a figure which shows the state in which the left extension panel is standing upright. It is a figure which shows the state in which the left extension panel has fallen. It is a figure which shows the left extension panel rotation mechanism which rotates the left extension panel 490 and the left extension panel 490. It is a figure which shows the state in which an upper extension panel is located in a fixed position. It is a figure which shows the state which the upper overhang | projection panel is located after a movement. It is a top view which shows an upper extension panel and the upper extension rotation mechanism by the gear which rotates and moves an upper extension panel. It is a figure which shows the state which the upper extension panel is slidingly moved upwards. It is a figure which shows the state which the upper extension panel is slidingly moved below. (A) is a figure which shows the upper extension slide mechanism which slides and moves an upper extension panel. (B) is a schematic side view showing a state where the upper overhanging panel is slid upward by the upper overhanging slide mechanism. (C) is a schematic side view showing a state where the upper overhanging panel is slid downward by the upper overhanging slide mechanism. It is a figure which shows the state by which an upper overhanging upper surface part is accommodated in the upper part of an upper overhanging panel. It is a figure which shows the state which the upper overhang | projection upper surface part has stood | started up. (A) is a side view showing a state where the upper overhanging upper surface portion is located at a fixed position. (B) is a side view showing a state where the upper overhanging upper surface portion rises upward by the upper surface portion rotation mechanism. It is a figure which shows the state which arranged the upper part extension panel on right and left. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a state in which the side overhang is slid downward and the upper display device provided in the upper overhanging panel faces upward. It is a figure which shows the state which the side overhang | sliding moved upwards and the upper display device with which the upper overhang | projection panel was equipped faced the player direction. It is a figure which shows the state which the upper display apparatus with which the upper extension panel was equipped faces upwards. It is a figure which shows the state with which both the overhang | projections united with the right side surface of an upper overhang | panel panel facing the upper surface of a right overhang | projection panel. It is a figure which shows the state which is displaying the message on an upper display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the state which has arrange | positioned the decoration similar to the sheet | seat with which the pattern inserted in the side protrusion was drawn in the upper surface part of the upper extension panel. It is a rear view which shows the both overhang uniting mechanism which rotates and moves the upper overhang | projection panel 351. FIG.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 9, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the left end of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 that has a quadrangular outer shape in front view and penetrates back and forth, and a lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A tray unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball attached to the upper right portion 201 of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201 A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the player into the game area of the game board 5, and the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 A foul cover unit 520 that receives a game ball that has been attached to the game unit and missed into the game area and discharges it to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a game ball on the upper plate 201 that is attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base unit 100. A ball feed unit 540 for sending to the ball launcher 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and closing the through-hole 111, and a security cover 580 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560. ing.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are attached to the right side of the main body frame base as viewed from the front. And door 3 and a locking unit 700 that locks between the main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped payout that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. The unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be opened and closed. And a back cover 980.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board accommodated in the payout control board box 950, the payout apparatus 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout apparatus 830 are guided downward. And an upper full ball path unit 850 that releases the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 201 in the tray unit 200, and the payout unit base 801 A game ball which is attached to the lower end and is released from the normal discharge port of the upper full ball path unit 850 is guided forward and released from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 and discharged from the full tank discharge port. Lower full tank path unit having a full tank guide path that guides the played game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the full ball receiving port 530 of the door frame 3. Is provided with a door 860, a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910. Speaker unit 920, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear right side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and has interface control inside. Interface control board box 940 in which a board is accommodated, and a payout control board box that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and contains a payout control board that controls the dispensing of game balls. 950.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is to be shot, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed above the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that are guided to the front, a flat game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100 A box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control board for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1 attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 A main control unit 1300 that is attached to the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and a table having a plurality of winning holes for receiving game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a. A knit (not shown) and a back unit (not shown) having a liquid crystal display device attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 on the upper side of the substrate holder 1200 and visible from the player side through the game panel 1100. I have.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when a game ball that has been thrown into the game area 5a is received in a prize opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received prize opening. . Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a right side view of the outer frame. 12 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. 15A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 15B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 is connected to both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. It has been.

  The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 is provided. With the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the left side of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 from the left and right center, and a curtain A plate-like right sliding member 82 attached at a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40 and includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 described later is locked. Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch portion 11 penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In the engagement notch portion 11, an upper left fixing member 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are attached. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is provided with the mounting step part 12 which became depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a left end part by front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes an engagement notch portion 21 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch portion 21, a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  In addition, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notch portions 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same size as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end cutout portions 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inwardly from the rearward position to the vicinity of the rear end with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portions 31 and 41 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the concave portions 31 and 41 and are formed in a hollow shape are provided. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. In addition, in the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface. The plurality of grooves make it easy to hold the pachinko machine 1 as an operator's finger when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side opened. The curtain plate member 50 is formed in a U-shape with a rear extension 51 extending rearward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface and a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates up and down in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and a front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go backward as it goes to.

  The curtain plate member 50 is configured so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state assembled to the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 (see FIG. 18 and the like).

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. Part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a lattice by a plurality of ribs, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. The front extension 62, the bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as it goes forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and the top fixing part 61 in plan view. A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end side of the front extending portion 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. A flat hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 15B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). Yes. Further, the front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws while being inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 inserts the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, thereby cooperating with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 15, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band plate-like lock main body 66 a that extends in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operation unit that projects rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66 a 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and extending obliquely left frontward, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock main body 66a 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The lock member 66 is attached at a position where the rear end of the lock main body 66a is behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end has the outer frame side upper hinge member. 60 extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 in the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17).

  The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17). In this state, a space that can accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 (to be described later) of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. Can pass through. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, or the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate portion 71 and a rear side of the left side of the horizontal portion 71 from the center in the front-rear direction. A rising plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a size through which only one game ball can pass through the horizontal portion 71 vertically. And a discharge hole 74. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side position in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has the horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that have dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and the discharge hole 74 can be discharged. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay on the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are formed from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower lateral fixing portions 88 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 11 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 protruding portions 32 and 42. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32 and 42 by screws screwed from the outer side surface. It is fixed to the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40.

  In the lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and the lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engagement notch portion 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface in the left-right direction of the lower frame member 20. .

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 16 and 17 show a locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. FIG. The description will be given with reference. 16A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the upper hinge member. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66 c is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a square shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66 is in close contact with the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65 so that it is in contact with the right hanging surface 65). In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in an oblique direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal shaft support state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock member 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. Yes. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a square shape, the acting force is applied to the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a. F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. The component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side. The moment of rotating the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is connected to the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal shaft support state or a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation caused by creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end portion of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock main body 66a contacts the drooping portion 65 and beyond. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extension 62.

  Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, a load is not applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. The hinge pin 622 is inserted. When the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66 a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted, the bearing groove 63 is opened, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is accommodated in a space in front of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked) in the state.

  When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed from the bearing groove 63, the lock member 66 is rotated so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left by operating the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ball engagement prevention for preventing the game ball from being sandwiched between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2. The mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 18A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view illustrating a state where the main body frame is opened together with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in FIG. FIG. 19 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame provided with guide vanes at the outer frame side lower hinge member, and FIG. 19 (b) is an outer view in the embodiment of FIG. It is explanatory drawing shown in the state which closed the main body frame with respect to the frame, (c) is the state which provided the guide blade of embodiment different from (a) and (b), and opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame (D) is explanatory drawing shown in the state which closed the main body frame with respect to the outer frame in embodiment of (c).

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. It is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  Moreover, since the return part 55 extended ahead is provided in the upper end of the standing wall part 54, when the unauthorized tool contact | abutted to the standing wall part 54 bends upwards, the front-end | tip of an unauthorized tool by the return part 55 Can be folded further forward, so that unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be surely prevented.

  By the way, when the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. When the game ball falls on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. Therefore, there is a risk of being sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the right discharge hole 53 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50. And the left discharge hole 52, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the game ball being caught between the two.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and illegal acts using the gap.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described configuration, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball dropped on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is discharged from the discharge hole 74 or the like. In order to make it easy to perform, as shown in FIG. 19, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 may be provided with guide vanes 95 and 96 for guiding the game ball to the discharge hole 74 or the like.

  More specifically, the guide blade 95 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B has a distal end protruding outward from the main body frame 4 and a base end side below the rear end of the left side surface of the main body frame 4. It is pivotally mounted around an axis extending vertically on the side, and is formed in a rod shape. The guide blade 95 is urged by a spring (not shown) so as to rotate counterclockwise in plan view. Then, as shown in FIG. 19A, the guide blade 95 is inclined slightly rearward from the right side with respect to the left side surface of the main body frame 4 with the main body frame 4 being opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The rotation end in the counterclockwise direction is restricted so as to protrude into the direction. Therefore, from this state, the guide blade 95 can be rotated so that the tip side moves backward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

  When the main body frame 4 is rotated from the state in which the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the leading end of the guide blade 95 contacts the right side surface of the rising portion 72 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. The guide blades 95 are in contact with each other and rotate in a direction (a clockwise direction in plan view) in which the distal end moves rearward around the proximal end side against the biasing force of a spring (not shown). Then, when the main body frame 4 is further rotated in the closing direction, the guide blade 95 is further rotated to a state in which it protrudes rearward from the main body frame 4, and the guide blade 95 is not disturbed with respect to the outer frame 2. Thus, the body frame 4 can be closed (see FIG. 19B).

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, if a game ball falls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the guide vanes 95 project obliquely left rearward from the rear end of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be moved to the right side by the left side surface of the main body frame 4 and the guide vanes 95, and the game ball is moved to the rear side of the main body frame 4. While being able to suppress rolling, it is possible to guide the game ball to the discharge hole 74 by bringing the game ball to the right side, and to discharge the game ball from the discharge hole 74. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  When the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the guide blade 95 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view to the position shown in FIG. 19A by a biasing force of a spring (not shown). . Therefore, the guide blades 95 of this embodiment rotate (move) with the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 4.

  On the other hand, the guide vane 96 shown in FIGS. 19C and 19D is attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at both ends as shown in the figure, and the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the fan-shaped bellows is folded when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide blades 96 move in accordance with the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 4 in the same manner as the guide blades 95 described above.

  The guide blade 96 is deployed between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the game ball falls onto the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The fallen game balls can be guided by rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by the guide vanes 96, and from the discharge holes 74 and the right discharge holes 53 that are opened on the rear side of the main body frame 4. The game ball can be discharged downward. Therefore, the guide blade 96 can also prevent the game ball from being sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  According to the present embodiment, the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 can be guided to the discharge hole 74 by the guide vanes 95 and 96, so that the game ball is discharged from the discharge hole 74 without increasing the discharge hole 74. It is possible to prevent the strength of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 from being reduced by increasing the size of the hole (discharge hole 74) penetrating the horizontal portion 71. Therefore, even if a tool for performing an illegal act is inserted between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has sufficient strength. 70 is difficult to be distorted, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and to prevent an illegal act from being performed.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 21 is a rear view of the door frame. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 as viewed from the front, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 350, a left side unit 400 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a right side unit 450 attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower right front portion of the door frame base unit 100. And a handle unit 500 attached through the dish unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 is attached to a rear cover lower part of the door frame base unit 100, a ball cover unit 540 attached to the lower rear part of the door frame base unit 100, and a rear face of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the through-hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers a lower rear portion of the glass unit 560.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, etc., is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear in a vertically long rectangle. A cylindrical handle mounting member 120 for mounting the handle unit 500, which is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the front right view, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. And the door frame side which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 as viewed from the front and protrudes forward and is rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. The upper hinge member 140, the door frame side lower hinge member 150, and the glass frame 560 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  As will be described in detail later, the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is arranged in an up-and-down direction and bulges forward, and can store a game ball, and an upper dish 201 and a lower dish 202. And a plate-shaped dish unit base 210 that is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 that is attached to the dish unit base 210 on the front side of the upper dish 201 and can display an image. An operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 that can be operated by the player and an upper plate effect button 257, a plate unit cover 260 that covers the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and a right side of the upper plate 201 when viewed from the front. The door lower right effect unit 270 having the door lower right rotating body 270A that is arranged and rotates according to the gaming state, and the door lower right effect unit 270 are covered from the front side. A transparent production unit cover 300, an upper tray ball removal unit 310 for removing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and a lower portion of the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 A lower dish ball removing unit 320, a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities of the game hall, An upper dish top decoration member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the dish unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 that is partially translucent and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side. 360, a translucent top decorative member 370 attached to the left and right center on the front surface of 360, and a top speaker that is attached within the top decorative member 370 and outputs a high-frequency sound. And a door frame decorative board 380 attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface.

  The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 attached along the left outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent left side decorative member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decorative member 420 3 and a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown) and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface. And a left decorative substrate 440.

  The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 attached along the right outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front side of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front of the right side decorative member 470 3 is mounted between the right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) and a unit base 410 and a right side decorative member 470, and is mounted on the front surface. And a door frame right decorative board (not shown).

  The handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is attached to the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 and the handle body 502 so as to be rotatable as shown in FIGS. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by a player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and supports the handle lever 504 in cooperation with the handle body 502. And. Although not shown, the handle unit 500 is attached to the handle main body 502 and is attached to the handle main body 502 to detect the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 and can be operated by the player. A stop button and a contact detection sensor attached to the handle body 502 and detecting contact between the player and the handle lever 504 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 25, 26, 55 to 57, etc., the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is a shallow box-shaped unit main body that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and has the front side open. 522 and a flat lid member 524 attached to the front surface of the unit main body 522. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and passes through the normal ball guide path of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. 526, a full sphere receiving port 528 that opens rearward on the right side of the front sphere passage 526 when viewed from the front, and that can communicate with the full tank guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A foul that opens upward on the right side of the front of the ball receiving port 528 and receives a game ball (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 but did not reach the game area 5a. The ball receiving port 530 opens to the front in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and releases the game balls received in the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 and the dish unit 200. Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 542 and the box-shaped unit main body 542 that extends to the left and right and is open on the rear side. A unit cover 544 detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the foul cover unit 520 in a box shape with the front side opened, and an upper plate of the dish unit 200 opened forward. 201, a ball entrance 546 into which a game ball stored in 201 enters, a ball release port 548 that is capable of releasing the game ball that has entered the ball entrance 546, and opens backward, and a ball entrance And a ball discharge port 550 that is capable of discharging the game ball that has entered 546 and that opens forward under the ball entrance 546. Although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 includes a ball feed solenoid for discharging the game balls that have entered from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge port 548, and a game ball that has entered from the ball entrance 546. And a switching mechanism that switches between the ball discharge port 548 side and the ball discharge port 550 side.

  The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to a frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562, as shown in FIGS. And a pair of glass plates 564 that close the inside of the cage unit frame 562.

(First embodiment of door frame)
[Left / Right panel]
As shown in FIG. 215, the door frame 3 in the present embodiment has a pair of side overhangs (left overhang panel) projecting to the player side on the left and right sides of the door frame 3 so as to sandwich the game area 5a. 490, a right overhanging panel 491) is provided.
The side overhang in this example has a hollow structure, and a sheet (not shown) on which a decorative design corresponding to the model of the gaming machine is drawn can be inserted. Further, the left extending panel 490 includes a left outer surface window 490a and a left inner surface window 490b.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 217, a sheet having a predetermined shape is inserted into the left outer surface accommodating portion 492 corresponding to the left outer surface window 490a from the left outer surface sheet insertion port 493 formed on the upper portion of the left extension panel 490. By inserting the sheet, the sheet can be visually recognized from the outside of the left overhanging panel 490. Further, by inserting a sheet having a predetermined shape into a left inner surface accommodating portion 497 corresponding to the left inner surface window 490b from a left inner surface sheet insertion port 498 formed at the upper portion of the left extending panel 490, a left extending panel is obtained. The sheet is visible from the inside of 490. In addition, a lid portion 499 for opening and closing the left outer surface sheet insertion port 493 and the left inner surface sheet insertion port 498 is provided on the upper portion of the left extension panel 490. FIG. 217 (A) shows a state where the lid portion 499 is in an open state, and FIG. 217 (B) shows a state where the lid portion 499 is in a closed state. By being in the open state, the sheet can be inserted into and removed from the left outer surface sheet insertion port 493 and the left inner surface sheet insertion port 498. The lid is opened and closed in a vertical slide manner, and may be manually opened / closed (slided) from the outside, or may be opened / closed by drive control by a peripheral control board, which will be described later, in order to prohibit opening by the player. In this case, the operation unit (described later) disposed on the back surface of the door frame 3 may be opened or closed by detecting an operation on the open / close switch related to the lid unit 499. It becomes the composition which becomes. Although not shown, the LED board A in which a plurality of LEDs for illuminating the sheet inserted in the left outer surface accommodating portion 492 is disposed inside the left overhanging panel 490 and the left inner surface accommodating portion 497. There is provided an LED substrate B on which a plurality of LEDs that illuminate the sheet are arranged. Similarly to the left overhanging panel 490, the right overhanging panel 491 has a right outer surface window 491a, a right inner surface window 491b, a housing portion corresponding to each window portion, a sheet insertion port, and various LED substrates. doing.

  With the above configuration, even if the game board is to be replaced, for example, due to replacement of a new stand, it is possible to make the overhang unique to the gaming machine simply by replacing the seat with one corresponding to the newly installed game board. Therefore, it is not necessary to replace all the side protrusions every time the game board is replaced, and the decoration of the side protrusions can be renewed at a low cost. Furthermore, the side overhang has a structure in which the sheet can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if the player in the game hall does not move to the front of the gaming machine, for example, when viewing from the entrance of the island where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, it can be seen at a glance where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. In addition to this, compared to a gaming machine that does not have a side overhang, the side overhang protrudes forward, and the advertising effect is high, and the possibility of selecting the pachinko machine 1 is improved. .

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 218, it is possible to put sheets having different decorations on the outer side and the inner side of the side overhang, so that when the island facility is viewed along the passage, depending on the angle, the right outer surface Since the sheets arranged in the window portion 491a for the left side and the window portion 490b for the left inner surface are arranged side by side, a pattern imitating the “star” drawn on the window portion 491a for the right outer surface and the window portion 490b for the left inner surface is drawn. Since the sheets are combined and seen as a single pattern, the power of the design applied to the sheet is increased compared to viewing one sheet, and the advertising effect can be further enhanced.

  Furthermore, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are juxtaposed on the island facilities of the game hall, a large number of side overhangs appear side by side like a climb, giving a spectacular view. When the island facility was viewed along the aisle by inserting a sheet with a pattern imitating a “star” into the accommodating part corresponding to each window part of the side extension, it was inserted into a plurality of side extensions. The sheets are lined up side-by-side, and it looks like a single large starry sky. Thus, the entire island facility in which a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are juxtaposed is more likely to be noticed by hall customers, and has a decorative property that improves the possibility of selecting the pachinko machine 1 over other gaming machines. Can do.

  The side overhang of this example is provided with movable means (described later) that can move (operate) with respect to the door frame 3, and the functions and effects of the side overhang are different before and after the movement. . Examples of movable types include slide movement and rotational movement. In this example, the side overhang is configured to slide up and down, and the side overhang slides downward as shown in FIG. The state in which the side overhang is slid upward as shown in FIG. 216 is the state before the movement (fixed position).

  Further, the side overhangs of this example each have a side speaker unit (not shown), and when the side overhang slides due to a game state or an effect executed by a peripheral control board, which will be described later, the side speakers are accompanied accordingly. Since the position of the unit also changes, the way the player feels the sound depends on the position of the side overhang.

  More specifically, when the side overhang is in the moved position, the sound emission position of the side speaker unit is higher than in the case where the side overhang is in the fixed position. Sounds like a small volume. On the other hand, when the side overhang is in a fixed position, it sounds as if sound is coming from (closely loud). As a result, since the way the sound output from the side speaker unit is heard depends on the position of the side overhang, the difference may suggest that the player has a high probability of developing into a big hit state. It can be recalled, and in addition to the fact that the side overhang slides, it can be expected that a special gaming state will arrive, so it is possible to improve the interest in gaming .

  In addition, the side speaker unit may change the volume (volume) of the audio output depending on the height at which the side overhang is located. For example, the side overhang slides upward (after movement) ) And the state in which the player slides downward (fixed position), the volume felt by the player may be relatively the same. By doing so, the sound production is not monotonous because the direction in which the sound is heard varies depending on the position of the side overhang, even though the volume perceived by the player has not changed, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the side speaker unit controls the sound output according to the progress of the game (game state), and may output different sounds from each side speaker unit. When two images of character image A and character image B are displayed on the display device 1500 and an effect is given such that the two characters are talking, the sound produced by the character image A located on the right side is displayed on the right side panel. On the other hand, the side speaker unit of the left extension panel 491 outputs the sound emitted from the character image B located on the left side. Further, when the character image A is positioned on the front right side and the character image B is positioned on the far left side, the sound volume emitted from the side speaker unit of the right extension panel 491 is emitted from the side speaker unit of the left extension panel 490. Output relatively smaller than the volume. As a result, the positional relationship between the two character images can be expressed by voice output.

Moreover, when the pachinko machine 1 is not being played by a player using a structure in which the side overhang is slid in the vertical direction, the side overhang is temporarily slid to the other gaming machine by sliding the side overhang upward. Even if it is provided, since the side overhang is positioned above the side overhang, the side overhang of the pachinko machine 1 becomes relatively conspicuous, and the advertising effect can be enhanced as compared with the case where the side overhang is in a fixed position. As a result, the possibility that the pachinko machine 1 is selected by the player can be improved.
Further, in this example, the above-mentioned “when not playing” can be exemplified as “demo state”. The demonstration state in the present embodiment is a so-called customer waiting state, which is started when “a state in which a special symbol change display to be described later is not performed has elapsed for a predetermined period of time”. It is a power saving mode that suppresses light emission of LEDs or the like that illuminate the game area 5a and reduces power consumption.
The demo state is configured to end when a special symbol change display described later is performed.

  It should be noted that the condition in which the side overhang in this example slides upward corresponds to the start of the above-described demonstration state, and the condition in which the side overhang in this example slides downward (in a fixed position) is the above-described demo state. Is equivalent to ending.

Note that “when no game is being played” is not limited to the above-described demonstration state, and it is detected that there is no game ball in the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202 of the pachinko machine 1, and “the player and the handle lever” For example, a state after a predetermined time has elapsed when no contact with 504 is detected can be exemplified. In this case, it is necessary to provide a detection sensor capable of detecting the presence of the game ball at a predetermined position on the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202.
According to such a configuration, not only the advertising effect is improved, but also whether the pachinko machine is currently playing or not can be recognized at a glance. For example, when a player leaves the table temporarily for a meal break or a restroom break, the state where the touch to the handle lever 504 is not detected continues, but the game ball is borrowed from the ball lending machine (the upper plate 201 or the like). Since it is detected that there is a game ball on the lower plate 202, the side overhang does not slide downward, and other players can be prevented from accidentally starting a game. .

  Furthermore, even when the handle lever 504 is touched even when the game is not being played, a state where there is a lending ball and a holding ball (the presence of a game ball on the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 is detected. Otherwise, even if contact with the handle lever 504 is detected, the side overhang does not slide downward, preventing power consumption when not playing and wear of the mechanism for sliding. be able to.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is played by the player (when the above-described demonstration state is finished), the side overhang slides downward (fixed position). Moreover, it is also possible to use for the production by utilizing a structure in which the side overhang can swing in the vertical direction. For example, by swinging the side overhang up and down in a specific game state such as during a big hit state, it can function as a movable accessory for producing a game. In addition, as described above, since a plurality of LEDs are attached to the side projection (not shown), it is possible to perform not only swinging in the vertical direction but also using the light emission of the LED. Side projections that did not produce a specific effect other than for advertising purposes can also be used with a function for production.

  With the above configuration, in a state where the side overhang is sliding upward, it can be used as an advertising member that is more conspicuous than other gaming machines, and conversely, in a state where the side overhang is sliding downward, Since it can be used as an effect for the effect of moving up and down according to the gaming state or performing a light emitting effect using an LED, the function differs depending on the position of the side projection.

  The brightness of the LED provided on the side overhang when the side overhang is sliding upward and when the side overhang is sliding downward (in the fixed position) (in the fixed position). May be changed. For example, information based on drive control indicates whether the side overhang is sliding upward or the side overhang is sliding downward (fixed position) (fixed position). The determination can be made according to the detection state by a detection switch (not shown), and the brightness of the LED can be set based on the determination result. More specifically, when the side overhang is used as a member for advertising, in a state where the side overhang slides upward, the brightness of the LED is set to a high luminance, and the side overhang is in the downward direction (fixed position). In a state where the LED is slid to a predetermined position (a state at a fixed position), the brightness of the LED is set to be lower than that in a state where the side protrusion is sliding upward. As a result, it is possible to appropriately suppress the burden on the player's eyes in each of cases where the side overhang functions for advertisements viewed from a distance and functions for effects viewed from a distance. It becomes possible. Note that the LEDs provided on the side protrusions are electrically connected to a peripheral control board described later, and the brightness setting according to the movable position is controlled by the peripheral control board. For this reason, the peripheral control board acts as a luminance setting means.

  In addition, when the side overhang is sliding upward, it is configured to repeatedly switch between high brightness and low brightness at regular intervals, and the side overhang is sliding downward (fixed position) (fixed position). In such a state, the luminance may be always low. As a result, when the side overhang is viewed from a distance, the side overhang appears to blink, so that attention to the pachinko machine 1 can be further increased, and the possibility of selecting the pachinko machine 1 is improved. It becomes possible to make it.

  In addition, when the side overhang is sliding upward, the side overhang is moved so that it swings at a constant interval, and the side overhang is sliding downward (in place) (in place) In this state, the swinging operation may be canceled. By using the tendency to follow moving objects with eyes, when looking at the island facilities along the passage, the line of sight is naturally directed to the swinging side overhang, so the attention to the pachinko machine 1 is raised more than any game machine It is possible to improve the possibility that the pachinko machine 1 is selected.

  Next, the structure of the side projection will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 219 is a schematic view of the right extension panel 491 and the belt-type movable unit 503 that slides the right extension panel 491. FIG. 220 is a view of the AA cross section of FIG. Further, since the structure related to the movement of the left overhanging panel 490 and the right overhanging panel 491 is common, the movable structure of the right overhanging panel 491 will be described here, and the description of the left overhanging panel 490 will be omitted. The right overhang panel 491, the belt-type movable unit 503, and the right overhang mechanism 501 are referred to.

The right extension mechanism 501 includes a right extension panel 491 and a belt-type movable unit 503.
The belt-type movable unit 503 includes a frame member 511 and a belt mechanism 510.
The belt mechanism 510 includes a toothed belt 512, an upper belt gear 513, a lower belt gear 514, a connection fitting 515, a belt drive motor 516, and a screw 517.
The frame member 511 is a member having a U-shaped cross section, and has a structure in which the left wall 511a, the right wall 511b, and the rear wall 511d are coupled to each other, and is screwed to the door frame base unit 100 with screws 517. A belt mechanism 510 is incorporated between the left wall 511a and the right wall 511b of the frame member 511. The upper belt gear 513 and the lower belt gear 514 in the belt mechanism 510 are pivotally supported on the upper part and the lower part between the left wall 511a and the right wall 511b of the frame member 511, and between the upper belt gear 513 and the lower belt gear 514. An endless toothed belt 512 is wound around.
The belt drive motor 516 is connected to the upper belt gear 513, and the belt mechanism 510 is operated when the belt drive motor 516 is driven.
In addition, U-shaped slide recesses 518 and 519 are formed at the front end portions of the left wall 511a and the right wall 511b of the frame member 511 so as to face each other inward. The slide recesses 518 and 519 are formed penetrating in the longitudinal direction of the frame member 511 and serve as a rail of the right extension panel 491.

  Further, the rear end portion of the right overhanging panel 491 is formed in a T shape, and the slide recesses 518 and 519 and the rear end portion of the right overhanging panel 491 formed in a T shape are slidably fitted. To do. In order to slide the right overhanging panel 491 in the vertical direction, the toothed belt 512 and the lower portion of the rear surface of the right overhanging panel 491 are attached and fixed by a connecting metal fitting 515. As a result, the right overhanging panel 491 slides up and down as the belt mechanism 510 is driven.

  Further, since the rear end portion of the right overhanging panel 491 extends below the bottom surface other than the rear end portion, the right overhanging panel 491 is slid upward by the belt-type movable unit 503. At this time, the gap of the door frame 3 that occurs at the place where the right-extending panel 491 was originally located is filled. For this reason, it is possible to prevent an illegal act (goto) or mischief caused by putting a foreign object in the door frame 3 or the game area 5a. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent accidents such as a finger or other part of the body between the right-extending panel 491 and the gap, injury, and the like.

  As described above, the movable structure of the side overhang in the present example has been described, but not limited to the movable structure using the belt mechanism 510, for example, sliding using a rack and pinion that converts the rotational force of the gear into a linear motion, A linear motor may be used for sliding movement, and various methods can be selected as long as the sliding movement is configured.

  In addition to the configuration in which the height of the side overhang is changed depending on whether or not a game is being performed with respect to the sliding movement of the side overhang, the height of the side overhang may be adjusted on the game hall side.

  Depending on the game hall, a shelf that a player can use as a luggage storage may be installed above the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. In that case, when the side overhang slides upward, it collides depending on the height of the shelf, and there is a possibility that failure or breakage occurs. In order to prevent this, in this example, the upper limit value at which the side overhang increases can be determined on the game hall side.

A rotation sensor for detecting the rotation speed of the upper belt gear 513 is provided in the vicinity of the upper belt gear 513 of the belt-type movable portion 503 described above (not shown). Specify the amount. In addition, an operation part for determining an upper limit value at which the side overhang is raised is arranged on the back surface of the door frame 3 so that only a staff member of the game hall can operate it.
In addition, depending on the structure of the game hall, when the side overhang slides upward, there may be an obstacle on the movement path of one side overhang. Different upper limit values can be set.

  The operation unit is electrically connected to a peripheral control board, which will be described later, and can set an upper limit of the distance over which the side overhang slides upward from 0% to 100% depending on the operation on the operation unit. It is. When set to 0%, the side overhang does not rise in the fixed position. Moreover, when it is set to 100%, the side overhang can be raised to the maximum position where it can move. When an attendant of the game hall operates the operation unit and sets, for example, 50% as the upper limit value, a movement amount upper limit signal having a value of 50% is input from the operation unit to the peripheral control board. Next, based on the movement amount upper limit signal, the peripheral control board is configured to control the upper limit value of the distance that each side overhang can move to half of the maximum value.

[Modification of First Embodiment of Door Frame]
Further, in the door frame 3 of this example, the side overhang is swung up and down during the game, and as shown in FIG. 221, for example, after the side overhang is slid upward according to the game state, A pair of the left movable sheet 390 and the right movable sheet 391 that protrude to the player side appear at the place where the overhang was located. Also in this example, the structure of the right movable sheet 391 will be described, and the description of the left movable sheet 390 will be omitted.

The right movable sheet 391 is formed of a thin plate-like member, and has a sheet on which an ornamental design corresponding to the model of the gaming machine is drawn on the outside and inside, and can be used for production and advertisement. ing.
Further, the right movable sheet 391 includes separate sheets on the inner side and the outer side, respectively. For example, in this example, on the outside where hall customers other than the player can visually recognize, for the purpose of advertising using a sheet on which a decorative design corresponding to the model of the gaming machine (here, an image imitating a ladybird) is drawn. On the inside, where the player can see directly, “Gekiatsu” suggests that there is a high probability of developing to a big hit state, “Big hits!” Indicating that it has become a big hit state, etc. are drawn. It can be used for production by using a sheet.

  Next, the structure of the right movable sheet 391 will be described with reference to FIG. 222 (A). FIG. 222A is a diagram illustrating the right movable sheet 391 and a movable sheet rotating mechanism that rotates and moves the right movable sheet 391. FIG. 222 (B) is a schematic diagram showing a rotation mode of the right movable sheet.

The movable sheet rotating mechanism includes a right movable sheet 391 and a rotational movement mechanism 392. The rotational movement mechanism 392 rotates the right movable sheet 391 around the horizontal direction so that a player can visually recognize the position. The right movable sheet 391 is caused to appear.
The rotational movement mechanism 392 includes an upper gear 393, a middle gear 394, and a lower gear 395. The upper gear 393 is pivotally supported by the rotation shaft of the right movable seat 391, and the lower gear is pivotally supported by the lower belt gear 514 described above. Further, the middle gear 394 is arranged to mesh with the upper gear 393 and the lower gear 395.

  When the right extension panel 491 is slid upward by the belt-type movable portion 503, the lower belt gear 514 rotates in the clockwise direction. Therefore, the lower gear 395 supported by the shaft also rotates in the clockwise direction. Accordingly, the middle gear 394 that meshes with the lower gear 395 rotates counterclockwise, and the upper gear 393 that meshes with the middle gear 394 rotates clockwise. With the rotation of the upper gear 393, by rotating about the rotation axis of the right movable seat 391, the portion having the seat in the right movable seat 391 appears to be visible to the player. It has become.

  On the other hand, when the right extension panel 491 is slid downward by the belt-type movable portion 503, the lower belt gear 514 rotates counterclockwise, so that the lower gear 395 supported by the shaft also rotates counterclockwise. Rotate. Accordingly, the middle gear 394 that meshes with the lower gear 395 rotates clockwise, and the upper gear 393 that meshes with the middle gear 394 rotates counterclockwise. As the upper gear 393 rotates, the door frame allows the player to visually recognize the portion having the seat in the right movable seat 391 by rotating around the rotation axis of the right movable seat 391. 3 is configured to be housed in 3.

The right movable sheet includes a cover member 396, and is rotatably supported on the lower surface of the right movable sheet 391.
The cover member 396 has a role of filling a gap generated in the door frame 3 when the right movable sheet 391 is made visible. For this reason, it is possible to prevent an illegal act (goto) or mischief caused by putting a foreign object in the door frame 3 or the game area 5a. Further, it is possible to prevent an accident such as a part of a body such as a finger being sandwiched between the right movable sheet 391 and the gap or an injury.
Further, since the sheet stopper piece 397 is formed, the cover member 396 rotates toward the inside of the door frame 3 even when the cover member 396 is pressed with a finger or the like when the cover member 396 fills the gap. It is possible to prevent a gap from being intentionally generated.

  With the above configuration, when the right movable sheet 391 is in an invisible position, it is used as a normal door frame. On the contrary, when the right movable sheet 391 appears in the visible position, a production variation is added. Therefore, the function is different depending on the position of the right movable sheet 391.

  In addition, the left movable sheet 390 and the right movable sheet 391 described so far are thin plate-like members, and are provided with sheets on the outside and inside of which decorative designs corresponding to the type of gaming machine are drawn. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying an image, an organic EL display, and the like are provided on the outside and the inside, so that a gaming state or a game is being performed. The displayed image may be changed according to various situations, such as whether or not.

[Second Embodiment of Door Frame]
Further, the movement of the side overhang is not limited to the movable means that slides in the vertical direction as long as the function is different before and after the movement of the side overhang. The movable structure of the side overhang in this example is configured to rotate in a double-spread manner with the rear end portion of the side overhang as an axis. As shown in FIG. position). As shown in FIG. 224, the side overhang is closed after the movement.

  Further, since the side overhang of this example is provided with a left overhang display device 495 and a right overhang display device 496 on the outside, a structure in which the side overhang rotates and the pachinko machine 1 is operated by the player. When not playing or being played by a player, in a normal gaming state, the side overhanging was opened, and a function of advertisement using the left overhanging display device 495 and the right overhanging display device 496 was provided. Use as an accessory. On the other hand, when the player is playing a game, for example, when performing an effect suggesting that there is a high probability of developing into a big hit state, or when performing an effect indicating that the big hit state has been reached, it closes according to the game state. The state is set so that all or a part of the game area cannot be visually recognized by overhanging the side. Then, when the side overhang is in the closed state, the left overhang display device 495 and the right overhang display device 496 are combined, so that there is an effect function such as performing an image effect using the left / right overhang display device. Can be used as an accessory.

  Next, a structure for moving the side overhang will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 225 is a diagram showing a side overhang and a side overhang rotation mechanism using a rack and pinion that rotates and moves the side overhang.

The side overhanging rotation mechanism includes a left overhanging panel 490, a right overhanging panel 491, and a backside moving mechanism 481. The backside moving mechanism 481 opens and closes the left overhanging panel 490 and the right overhanging panel 491 in a double door. Is.
The contralateral movement mechanism 481 includes a left rack gear 485 and a left pinion 482, a right rack gear 486, a right pinion 483, and a drive gear 484. The left rack gear 485 and the right rack gear 486 are arranged in parallel along the left-right direction of the door frame base unit 100. The pinion shaft 487 of the left pinion 482 is vertically supported in the vertical direction along the left side of the door frame base unit 100, and the pinion shaft 488 of the right pinion 483 is vertically extended along the right side of the door frame base unit 100. The top and bottom are pivotally supported in the direction.
The drive shaft 489 of the drive gear 484 is pivotally supported in the short vertical direction at the center of the upper side of the door frame base unit 100. A drive gear 484 is arranged on the rear surface where the left rack gear 485 and the right rack gear 486 overlap so that the left rack gear 485 and the right rack gear 486 are engaged.

Further, the left rack gear 485 has rack teeth on the rear surface where it engages with the drive gear 484, and has rack teeth on the front surface where it engages with the left pinion 482.
The right rack gear 486 has rack teeth on the front surface at both positions where it meshes with the drive gear 484 and where it meshes with the right pinion 483.

  The rear end portion of the left overhanging panel 490 is fixed to the pinion shaft 487. Further, the rear end portion of the right extension panel 491 is fixed to the pinion shaft 488. Note that the left rack gear 485 is bent rearward so that the positions of the left pinion 482 and the right pinion 483 are the same in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, when the drive gear 484 reciprocates left and right, the left rack gear 485 and the right rack gear 486 move oppositely in parallel. Open and close with double doors.

  Further, the above-described side overhang rotation mechanism has been described as rotating both in synchronization with the left and right side overhangs, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, two drive gears 484 are used, and the left rack gear 485 The right rack gear 486 may be engaged with each other, and the side overhanging may be made independent and rotationally movable.

  When starting or resuming a game with the pachinko machine 1, the balance or prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) placed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall Although it is necessary to borrow a game ball, there is a problem that it is difficult to insert cash or a prepaid card due to the side overhang. However, in this example, when it is detected that there is no game ball in the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202, and it is necessary to insert cash or a prepaid card in order to start or resume the game, the ball lending machine automatically The side overhang on the side where the is disposed is rotated. For example, an upper plate detection sensor for detecting the presence of a game ball in the upper plate 201 is provided at a predetermined portion of the upper plate 201, and the presence of a game ball in the lower plate 202 is detected at a predetermined portion of the lower plate 202. When a detection sensor for a dish is provided and both the detection sensor for the upper dish and the detection sensor for the lower dish detect that there is no game ball, the left extension panel 490 or the right extension panel 491 rotates inward. A moving configuration can be exemplified. Further, depending on whether a ball lending machine is arranged on the right side of the pachinko machine 1 or a ball lending machine is arranged on the left side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to select a projecting panel to be rotated, for example, It can be exemplified that one of the left projecting panel 490 and the right projecting panel 491 can be selected to be rotated by operating a selection switch provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 by an attendant of the game hall. Thereby, it is possible to start the game without causing the player to feel stress without disturbing the insertion of cash or the like.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the above-described state, and it may be configured such that a player or an attendant of the game hall can manually rotate the left overhanging panel 490 and the right overhanging panel 491, and various correspondences can be selected. .

[Third embodiment of door frame]
In this embodiment, the movable structure of the side overhang is configured to rotate around the lower end of the side overhang as shown in FIG. 226. As shown in FIG. (Fixed position). As shown in FIG. 227, the state where the left overhanging panel 490 is tilted is after the movement.

  Further, since the left overhanging panel 490 of the present example is provided with the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 on the outside, when the pachinko machine 1 is not played by the player using the structure in which the left overhanging panel 490 rotates and moves, Alternatively, in a normal gaming state where a player is playing, the left extended panel 490 is set in an upright state, and an image is displayed on the left liquid crystal touch panel 471. On the other hand, when the player is playing a game, for example, when performing an effect in which the effect mode changes according to the player's operation, the left extension panel 490 is rotated to move the left liquid crystal touch panel 471. Therefore, it can be used as an accessory having a function of performing an effect of causing the player to operate the left liquid crystal touch panel 471. As a result, the function can be changed depending on the position of the left extension panel 490, and the player can be entertained with surprise and surprise that a new operation unit has appeared, and the player can enjoy the left liquid crystal touch panel 471. Can be made to participate in the production, and it is possible to actively entertain the production for the player and to prevent the interest from deteriorating. Further, by rotating the left extended panel 490 so that the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 can be operated, a special operation effect using a plurality of touch panels such as the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 and a touch panel 246 described later can be executed. . According to such a configuration, the presentation mode changes according to the player operation on both the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 and the touch panel 246, or according to the player operation on either the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 or the touch panel 246. It is possible to change the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game as compared with the prior art.

  Next, the operation of the left extension panel 490 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 228 is a diagram illustrating a left overhanging panel 490 and a left overhanging panel rotating mechanism that rotates and moves the left overhanging panel 490.

The left overhanging panel rotation mechanism includes a left overhanging panel 490 and a gear box 472. The gear box 472 rotates and moves the lower end rear portion of the left overhanging panel 490 about the front-rear axis, and the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 is moved to the player. Is moved to an operable position.
The gear box 472 includes a gear box base 473, a first gear 474, a second gear 475, a third gear 476, a motor 477, a rotation shaft 478, and a rotation base 479. The gear box base 473 is attached and fixed to the door frame base unit 100, and the rotation base 479 is attached and fixed to the rear end of the lower end panel 490. The rotating shaft 748 is supported on the rear surface of the rotating base, and the left projecting panel 490 rotates by rotating the rotating shaft 748 in the lateral direction. The first gear 474, the second gear 475, the third gear 476, and the motor 477 are disposed on the gear box base 473, the first gear 474 and the rotation shaft 478 are connected, and the third gear 476 and the motor 477 are connected. Is connected. Further, the second gear 475 is disposed so as to mesh with the first gear 474 and the third gear 476.

  When the left extended panel rotation mechanism moves the left extended panel 490 to a position where the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 can be operated, the third gear 476 connected to the motor 477 rotates clockwise. Along with this, the second gear 475 arranged to mesh with the third gear 476 rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the third gear 476. Accordingly, the first gear 474 disposed so as to mesh with the second gear 475 rotates clockwise. Along with the rotation of the first gear 474, the rotation shaft 478 and the rotation base 479 rotate clockwise, so that the left overhanging panel 490 is in a collapsed state.

  On the other hand, when the left extended panel 490 is moved to a position where the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 cannot be operated by the left extended panel rotation mechanism, the third gear 476 connected to the motor 477 rotates counterclockwise. Accordingly, the second gear 475 arranged to mesh with the third gear 476 rotates in a clockwise direction in conjunction with the third gear 476. Accordingly, the first gear 474 arranged to mesh with the second gear 475 rotates counterclockwise. As the first gear 474 rotates, the rotation shaft 478 and the rotation base 479 rotate counterclockwise so that the left extension panel 490 moves to an upright position.

  Further, regarding the rotational movement of the left extended panel 490, when the left extended panel 490 is rotated to a position where an operation on the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 can be performed, the player can adjust the rotation angle of the left extended panel 490. It is good as possible.

  Even if the left extension panel 490 rotates and moves to a position where an operation can be performed on the left liquid crystal touch panel 471, depending on the player, the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 is positioned at a position where the operation is difficult at the default position. There is a possibility. In that case, the stress caused by the inability to perform the operation comfortably is felt, and the interest in the game may be reduced.

  A rotation sensor for detecting the rotation speed of the first gear 474 is provided in the vicinity of the first gear 474 of the left extension panel rotation mechanism described above (not shown). The rotation amount of the overhanging panel 490 is specified. Further, the rotation angle of the left extension panel 490 can be adjusted by operating the touch panel 246.

  The amount of rotation of the left overhanging panel 490 can be adjusted in two steps according to the operation on the operation unit. In this example, the rotation of the left overhanging panel 490 is performed when it is set to the first step. At a rotation angle of 90 ° or more (default angle). Further, when set to the second stage, when the left extension panel 490 is rotationally moved, it is configured to rotate at a rotation angle of about 90 °. When the player operates the touch panel 246 and sets the second stage, for example, a rotational movement amount signal is input from the touch panel 246 to the peripheral control board. Next, the peripheral control board is configured to set and control the rotation amount of the left extension panel 246 based on the rotational movement amount signal.

  As the member that can be operated by the player provided on the above-described left extension panel 490, a liquid crystal touch panel is taken as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various correspondences can be selected as long as the left extension panel 490 can be operated by rotating and moving, such as selecting a member that can be pressed, such as a button. is there.

[First embodiment of the overhang panel]
In the upper part of the door frame 3 in this example, as shown in FIG. 229 and FIG. 230, on the front side of the door frame 3, an upper projecting panel 351 is provided above the game area 5 a so as to protrude to the player side. Yes.
The upper overhanging panel 351 has an upper display device 352 and an upper decorative member 353 on different surfaces, and the upper decorative member 353 is a decorative member having translucency, and has a plurality of LEDs on the inside. Is installed.

  The upper overhanging panel 351 includes moving means (described later) that can move with respect to the door frame 3, and the function of the upper overhanging panel 351 is different before and after movement. In this example, the upper overhanging panel 351 is configured to rotate about the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 229, the upper display device 352 provided in the upper overhanging panel 351 is directed upward. Before the movement (fixed position), as shown in FIG. 230, the state in which the upper display device 352 faces forward (player side) is after the movement.

  Before the upper overhanging panel 351 is moved, the upper decorative member 353 is directed toward the player, so that it is possible to perform a light emitting effect using a plurality of LEDs provided on the inner side, and after the movement, the upper display device Since 352 is directed to the player direction (viewable direction), display effects such as displaying an image can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to switch the effect that can be executed by rotating the upper overhanging panel 351 according to the gaming state, that is, without separately preparing a device for light emitting effect and a device for display effect. In both cases, the light emission effect and the display effect can be performed using only a single device.

  In addition, in the state before the upper overhanging panel 351 is rotated (in a fixed position), the upper display device 352 is in a position that is not visible to the player who is sitting, and therefore, an effect using the upper display device 352 during the game. When performing the display, the display of displaying the image after rotating the upper overhanging panel 351 to the position where the upper display device 352 can be visually recognized is performed. It is possible to surprise the player and entertain a surprising performance, and to improve the interest in the game.

  When the upper overhanging panel 351 is moved by a player, for example, in the normal gaming state, the upper overhanging panel 351 is positioned at a fixed position, and when an effect is performed by the peripheral control board, the upper decorative member 353 is used. It can be used as a movable object that performs a light decoration effect by a light emitting member such as an LED disposed on the surface. On the other hand, when the player is playing a game, for example, when performing an effect suggesting that the probability of developing into a big hit state is high, or when performing an effect indicating that the big hit state is achieved, the upper display device 352 is provided. The upper overhanging panel 351 is rotated and moved to a position where the player can visually recognize the image, and an image is displayed on the upper display device 352, for example. be able to. Accordingly, the function to be generated differs depending on the position of the upper overhanging panel 351, and the upper display device 352 is located at a place where it can be seen from a place where the player cannot see it. The player can be surprised by making it appear that the game has appeared, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The upper overhanging panel 351 includes an upper first speaker 354 and an upper second speaker 355 that are speaker units. The upper first speaker 354 is located on the side of the upper display device 352 and on the upper second speaker 355. Are provided on the side of the upper decorative member 353, two each.
When the upper overhanging panel 351 is rotated and moved due to a game state or an effect executed by a peripheral control board, which will be described later, the positions of the upper first speaker 354 and the upper second speaker 355 change accordingly. In 351, the way the player feels the sound differs depending on the position.

  More specifically, when the upper overhanging panel 351 is in the position after the movement, the sound emission direction of the upper first speaker 354 is in the player direction, while the sound emission direction of the upper second speaker 355 is downward, but the player's head Since the upper overhanging panel 351 is located higher than the position, it is in the direction of the player, and the player sounds as if sound is coming from nearby. On the contrary, when the upper projecting panel 351 is in a fixed position, the upper first speaker 354 is facing upward, and the upper second speaker 355 is facing the player direction (precisely parallel to the ground). It is in a state. When the sound is emitted from each speaker in that state, the sound emission direction of the upper second speaker 355 is the player direction, but the sound emission direction of the upper first speaker 354 is the ceiling direction opposite to the player. Therefore, the player sounds as if the sound is sounding from a place far away from the case where the upper overhanging panel 351 is in the position after the movement.

  In addition, the upper first speaker 354 and the upper second speaker 355 may be controlled by a peripheral control board, which will be described later, to determine whether or not to perform audio output depending on where the upper overhanging panel 351 is located. For example, when the upper overhanging panel 351 is in a fixed position, the sound may be emitted from only the upper first speaker 354 (in a sound emitting direction that is not the player direction), and by doing so, from a remote location The feeling that the sound can be heard (to a low volume) can be emphasized. On the contrary, when the upper overhanging panel 351 is in the position after the movement, the sound may be emitted from both the upper first speaker 354 and the upper second speaker 355, and a sound can be heard from near (in a loud volume). The sense can be emphasized. Accordingly, it is possible to make the difference in the sound heard from the player more clearly, rather than expressing the difference in how the sound is heard only by the position of the upper overhanging panel 351.

  According to the above configuration, the sound output from the upper first speaker 354 and the upper second speaker 355 differs depending on the position of the upper overhanging panel 351, so that the player has a high probability of developing into a big hit state due to the difference. It can be reminiscent of this suggestion, and furthermore, coupled with the rotational movement of the upper overhanging panel 351, it can be expected that a special gaming state will arrive. It is possible to improve the interest in

  Moreover, the upper overhanging panel 351 is not limited to the switching of the effect produced by the rotational movement, and may have different functions for the advertisement and the production as in the case of the side overhanging described above. Since the upper overhanging panel 351 of this example includes an upper decorative member 353 and an upper display device 352, the pachinko machine 1 is played by a player using a structure in which the upper overhanging panel 351 rotates. When there is not (in the demonstration state described above), the upper overhanging panel 351 is in a fixed position, and the LED of the upper decorative member 353 is made to emit light, etc., and used as a member that exerts an advertising function such as a visitor. Can do. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is played by the player (when the above-described demo state ends), the upper overhanging panel 351 is placed in the position after the movement, and an image effect using the upper display device 352 is performed. Because it can be used as a member that demonstrates the function of production, etc., it has a specification that has a function that can be demonstrated regardless of whether it is in the game or in the demo state, depending on the movable position of the upper overhanging panel 351. Yes.

  In addition to the upper display device 352, a touch panel (referred to as an upper touch panel in the present embodiment) may be provided instead of the upper display device 352. In this case, when the pachinko machine 1 is not played by the player or is played by the player, and in a normal gaming state, the upper overhanging panel 351 is in a fixed position, and the upper decorative member 353 emits light. It is used as a member that exerts advertising functions by, for example, being played by a player, and on the contrary, for example, when performing an effect in which the effect mode changes according to the player's operation, etc. Since the panel 351 is moved to a position after the movement, it moves to a position where the upper touch panel can be operated. Therefore, the panel 351 can be used as an accessory having a function of causing the player to operate the upper touch panel. it can. As a result, the function can be changed depending on the position of the upper overhanging panel 351, the player can be entertained with surprise and surprise that a new operation unit has appeared, and the player can operate the upper touch panel. By doing so, it is possible to participate in the production, it is possible to prevent the player from actively entertaining the production and lowering the interest. Also, by rotating the upper overhanging panel 351 so that the upper touch panel can be operated, a special operation effect using a plurality of touch panels such as the upper touch panel and a touch panel 246 described later can be executed. According to such a configuration, the effect mode changes according to the player operation on both the upper touch panel and the touch panel 246, or the effect mode changes according to the player operation of either the upper touch panel or the touch panel 246. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game as compared with the prior art.

  Next, a structure for moving the upper overhanging panel 351 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a plan view showing the upper overhanging panel 351 and the upper overhanging rotation mechanism using a gear that rotates and moves the upper overhanging panel 351. FIG. , (B) shows a state in which the upper overhanging panel 351 is in the position after the movement.

The upper overhang rotation mechanism includes an upper overhang panel 351 and an upper gear box 382. The upper gear box 382 rotates and moves the upper overhang panel 351 about the left and right axis, and is disposed on the upper overhang panel 351. The display device 352 is moved to a position where the player can visually recognize it.
The upper gear box 382 includes a front gear 383, a rear gear 384, and a drive motor 385. The upper overhanging panel 351 has a left rotation shaft 398 and a right rotation shaft 399.
The left rotation shaft 398 is formed at a substantially central portion on the left side surface of the upper overhanging panel 351, and the right rotation shaft 399 is coaxial with the left rotation shaft 398 and is formed at a substantially central portion on the right surface of the upper overhanging panel 351. . The front gear 383, the rear gear 384, and the drive motor 385 are disposed inside the upper gear box 382, the front gear 383 is connected to the left rotation shaft 398, and the rear gear 384 is connected to the drive motor 385. . Further, the front gear 383 is arranged so as to mesh with the rear gear 384.

  When the upper extension panel 351 is moved to the position where the player can visually recognize the upper display panel 351 disposed on the upper extension panel 351 by the upper extension rotation mechanism, the rear gear 384 connected to the drive motor 385 is provided on the left side surface. Rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the side. Accordingly, the front gear 383 arranged to mesh with the rear gear 384 rotates in a clockwise direction in conjunction with the rear gear 384. As the front gear 383 rotates, the left rotating shaft 398 rotates clockwise so that the upper overhanging panel 351 is in a state after being moved.

  On the other hand, when the upper extension panel 351 is moved by the upper extension rotation mechanism to the position where the player cannot visually recognize the upper display device 352 disposed on the upper extension panel 351, the rear gear 384 connected to the drive motor 385 is provided. Rotates clockwise as viewed from the left side. Accordingly, the front gear 383 arranged to mesh with the rear gear 384 rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with it. As the front gear 383 rotates, the left rotation shaft 398 rotates counterclockwise, so that the upper overhanging panel 351 is in a state before being moved (fixed position).

  Further, regarding the rotational movement of the upper overhanging panel 351, when the upper overhanging panel 351 is rotated and moved to a position where the player can visually recognize the upper display device 352 disposed on the upper overhanging panel 351, the player can play the upper overhanging panel 351. It is good also as what can adjust the rotation angle of.

  Even if the upper overhanging panel 351 rotates and moves to a position where the player can visually recognize the upper display device 352, depending on the height of the sitting height of the player who is playing the game, light such as lighting of the game hall may be displayed on the upper display device. There is a possibility that the image 352 is reflected and the displayed image is difficult to see. In this case, since the stress caused by not being able to enjoy the image production is felt and the interest in the game may be reduced, this example is eliminated.

  A rotation sensor (not shown) for detecting the rotation speed of the front gear 383 is provided in the vicinity of the front gear 383 of the above-described upper extension rotation mechanism. Measure the amount of rotation. Further, the rotation angle of the upper overhanging panel 351 can be adjusted by operating the touch panel 246.

  The rotation amount of the upper overhanging panel 351 after the movement can be set from 0% to 100% in this example according to the operation on the touch panel 246. When set to 0%, the upper overhanging panel 351 stands upright straight at the position after movement, and the upper display device 352 is in a state of being oriented in a direction parallel to the ground (default angle). Also, when set to 100%, the upper overhanging panel 351 further rotates from the position after the movement, makes an angle of 45 ° from the default angle, and the upper display device 352 is in the state of facing the player's line of sight. . When the player operates the touch panel 246 and is set to a value of 100%, for example, a rotational movement amount signal having a value of 100% is input from the touch panel 246 to the peripheral control board. Next, the peripheral control board is configured to set and control the rotation amount of the upper projecting panel 351 based on the rotational movement amount signal.

  Although illustration is omitted, a wiring cord for connecting the drive motor 385 and the door lower right relay board 281 is inserted into the upper extension panel 351 so that the upper extension panel 351 is controlled by the peripheral control board. ing.

[Second Embodiment of Upper Overhang Panel]
Further, the movement of the upper overhanging panel 351 is not limited to the one that rotates and moves as long as the functions of the upper overhanging panel 351 before and after the movement are different. In this example, the movable structure of the upper overhanging panel 351 is configured such that the upper overhanging panel 351 slides up and down with respect to the door frame 3, and the upper overhanging panel 351 slides upward as shown in FIG. The moving state is before moving (fixed position). As shown in FIG. 233, the state in which the upper overhanging panel 351 is slidingly moved downward is after the movement.

  The upper overhanging panel 351 of this example also includes an upper display device 352, an upper decorative member 353, an upper first speaker 354, and an upper second speaker 355. Using the structure in which the upper overhanging panel 351 slides, the pachinko machine 1 is not played by the player, or when the player is playing a game, and the upper overhanging panel 351 is fixed in a normal gaming state. It is located at the position, and can be used as a light emitting effect using the upper decorative member 353 or a sound emitting effect using the upper first speaker 354 and the upper second speaker 355. On the other hand, when a game is played by an engineer, for example, when performing an effect suggesting that there is a high probability of developing into a big hit state, or when performing an effect indicating that a big hit state is achieved, In response, slide down. In this case as well, a sound emission effect using the upper first speaker 354 and the upper second speaker 355 is performed, but the upper first speaker 354 and the upper second speaker 351 are slid downward. Since the position at which the sound is emitted from the speaker 355 is also changed, the sound is heard differently from the state in which the sound slides upward. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that the way the sound is heard has changed, to amplify the expectation for the jackpot, etc., and to improve the interest in the game.

  In addition, an upper third speaker 356 is disposed behind the upper overhanging panel 351. When the upper overhanging panel 351 is slid upward, the upper overhanging panel 351 is overlapped in the front-rear direction. Because it is located, it is not visible, and if it emits sound in that state, the front of the sound emission part is blocked, so that the player can hear a roaring sound Yes. Further, when the upper overhanging panel 351 is slid downward, the upper third speaker 356 is in a visible state, and when the sound is emitted in that state, the front of the sound emitting portion is not blocked. The player can hear the sound clearly. For example, the sound that the player feels can be enjoyed by releasing the sound from the upper third speaker while the upper overhanging panel 351 slides from the upper side to the lower side, so that the sound can be gradually heard clearly. In addition to the above difference, the upper overhanging panel 351 is also slidably moved, so that a sense of expectation or the like for the jackpot can be improved and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  Further, the upper third speaker 356 emits sound having a sound quality different from that of the upper first speaker 354 and the upper second speaker 355 that are always visible. When the two speakers 355 output a high sound, in addition to that, a low sound is output as a so-called woofer speaker, or the upper first speaker 354 and the upper second speaker 355 output a sound with a low sound pressure (sound is low). In this case, by producing different sound output such as outputting a sound with a high sound pressure (sound is loud), the sound can be given a profound feeling, so that the thickness of the production can be increased and the game entertainment can be improved. It is possible. The sound quality emitted by the upper first speaker 354, the upper second speaker 355, and the upper third speaker 356 may be the same.

  The upper overhanging panel 351 moves within the range where the position before moving (fixed position) and after moving does not overlap the game area 5a in the front-rear direction, regardless of whether it rotates or slides up and down. Therefore, even if the upper overhanging panel 351 moves, the game area 5a is always visible, so that the game is not hindered.

  Next, a structure for sliding the upper overhanging panel 351 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 234A is a diagram showing the upper overhanging panel 351 and the upper overhanging slide mechanism for sliding the upper overhanging panel 351. (B) is a schematic side view showing a state in which the upper overhanging panel 351 is slid upward by the upper overhanging slide mechanism. (C) is a schematic side view showing a state in which the upper overhanging panel 351 is slid downward by the upper overhanging slide mechanism.

  The upper overhanging slide mechanism includes an upper overhanging panel 351, an upper right gear box 371, and an upper left gear box 372. The upper right gear box 371 and the upper left gear box 372 each have a cam disposed therein. The upper overhanging panel 351 is slid in the vertical direction by rotating. Since the upper right gear box 371 and the upper left gear box 372 have a common structure, the structure of the upper right gear box 371 will be described here, and the detailed description of the upper left gear box 372 will be omitted.

  The upper right gear box 371 includes a cam member 373, an upper front gear 374, an upper rear gear 375, an upper drive motor 376, and a slide recess 377. Further, the upper overhanging panel 351 has a side recess 379 and a slide protrusion 378. The upper front gear 374, the upper rear gear 375, and the upper drive motor 376 are disposed inside the upper right gear box 371. The upper rear gear 375 is connected to the upper drive motor 736, and the upper front gear 374 is connected to the upper rear gear 371. The gear 375 is engaged with the gear 375. Further, the cam member 373 is disposed outside the upper right gear box 371 and is connected to the rotation shaft of the upper front gear 374.

  Further, the side recess 379 is a recess provided on both side surfaces of the upper overhanging panel 351, and the cam member 373 is disposed inside the side recess 379 so as to face the side recess 379. As shown in FIG. 234 (B), since the side surface of the cam member 373 is in contact with the inner upper surface portion of the side surface recess 379, the side surface farthest from the shaft portion of the cam member 373 is the inner upper surface portion of the side surface recess 379. Is in a state of sliding upward (fixed position). Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (C), when the side surface closest to the shaft portion of the cam member 373 is in contact with the inner upper surface portion of the side recess 379, the upper overhanging panel 351 is slid downward. It becomes. In addition, since the slide convex portion 378 formed on the upper overhanging panel 351 is fitted with the slide concave portion 377 formed on the upper right gear box 371, the angle of the upper overhanging panel 351 is fixed and can be moved up and down without rattling. It is possible to slide it straight.

[Third Embodiment of Upper Overhang Panel]
The movable structure of the upper overhanging panel 351 in the present embodiment is not limited to the movement of the entire upper overhanging panel 351 as described above. In this example, the upper display device in the upper overhanging panel 351 is disposed. The structure which made the surface (henceforth an upper overhang | projection upper surface part 351a) rotationally movable can be illustrated.

  The upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a of this example is capable of rotational movement with respect to the upper overhanging panel 351. As shown in FIG. 235, the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is accommodated in the upper portion of the upper overhanging panel 351. In addition, the state in which the arranged upper display device 352 is invisible to the player is before movement (fixed position), and as shown in FIG. 236, the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is raised, The state in which the display device 352 is at an angle that can be visually recognized by the player is after the movement.

  Prior to the movement of the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a, the upper display device 352 is in an invisible state, and the upper decorative member 353 is directed toward the player, so that it is possible to perform a light emitting effect using the same. Since the upper display device 352 is positioned so as to be visible from the player after the movement, in addition to the light emission effect by the upper decorative member 353, a display effect such as displaying an image can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to switch the effect that can be executed by rotating the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a according to the gaming state, that is, the device for wave height production and the device for display production can be switched to the upper overhanging panel 351. It also serves as.

  In addition, in the state before the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is rotated (fixed position), the upper display device 352 is in a position that cannot be seen by the player who is sitting, so the upper display device 352 was used during the game. When performing an effect, the display of displaying the image after rotating the upper overhanging panel 351 to a position where the upper display device 352 can be visually recognized is performed. This makes it possible to surprise the player in a variety of performance modes, entertain a surprising performance, and improve the fun of the game.

The movement opportunity of the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is, for example, when the player is playing a game, and the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is positioned at a fixed position in a normal gaming state, and when the normal effect is performed by the peripheral control board It can be used as a movable object that performs a light decoration effect by a light emitting member such as an LED disposed on the decoration member 353. On the other hand, when the player is playing a game, for example, when performing an effect suggesting that the probability of developing into a big hit state is high, or when performing an effect indicating that the big hit state is achieved, the upper display device 352 is provided. The upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is rotationally moved to a position where the player can visually recognize the player, for example, by displaying an image on the upper display device 352 in addition to the light emitting effect by the upper decorative member 353, for example, suggesting the result of the success / failure It can be used as a movable object for performing display effects such as. As a result, the function differs depending on the position of the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a, and the player can be surprised by causing the upper display device 352 to appear from a location that is not visible to the player. Can improve the interest of the game.
In this embodiment, an upper touch panel may be adopted instead of the upper display device 352.

  Next, a structure for rotating the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 237 is a view showing the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a of the upper overhanging panel 351 and the upper surface portion rotation mechanism for rotating the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a. (A) is a side view showing a state where the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is located at a fixed position. (B) is a side view showing a state where the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a rises upward by the upper surface portion rotation mechanism.

  The upper surface rotation mechanism has an upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a and a gear mechanism portion, and the gear mechanism portion rotates around the rotation shaft 344 of the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a and is disposed on the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a. The upper display device 352 is moved to a position where the player can visually recognize it. The gear mechanism has an upper surface shaft gear 341, a rear gear 342, and a drive motor 343. The upper surface portion shaft gear 341 is connected to the rotation shaft 344 of the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a, and the rear gear 342 is connected to the drive motor 343. The upper surface shaft gear 341 is disposed so as to mesh with the rear gear 342.

  When moving the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a to the position where the player can visually recognize the upper display device 352 disposed on the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a by the upper surface rotation mechanism, the rear gear 342 connected to the drive motor 343 is used. Rotates clockwise. Accordingly, the upper surface shaft gear 341 arranged so as to mesh with the rear gear 342 rotates counterclockwise. As the front gear 383 rotates, the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a rises around the rotation shaft 344, and the receiving portions 348 and 349 formed in the upper overhanging panel 351 come into contact with the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a. The upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is positioned after the movement.

  On the other hand, when the upper surface rotation mechanism moves the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a and the upper display device 352 disposed on the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a to a position (fixed position) where the player cannot visually recognize the driving motor 343. The rear gear 342 connected to rotates in a counterclockwise direction. Accordingly, the upper surface shaft gear 341 arranged to mesh with the rear gear 342 rotates in a clockwise direction in conjunction with the rear gear 342. With the rotation of the front gear 383, the upper projecting upper surface portion 351a is tilted to a fixed position around the rotation shaft 344, so that the upper projecting upper surface portion 351a moves to a fixed position.

  Further, an upper overhanging lid portion 358 is provided at a position facing the bottom surface of the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a, and has a function of supporting when the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is in a fixed position. In addition, when the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is in a position after movement, the upper overhanging panel 351 has a function of preventing dust, dirt, foreign matters, etc. from being entered by the player.

  Further, regarding the rotational movement of the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a, when the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a rotates and moves to a position where the player can visually recognize the upper display device 352 disposed on the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a, It is good also as what can adjust the rotation angle of the overhang | projection upper surface part 351a.

  Even if the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a rotates and moves to a position where the player can visually recognize the upper display device 352, depending on the angle viewed from the player who is playing the game, light such as lighting of the game hall, pachinko machine 1 May be reflected by the upper display device 352, making it difficult to visually recognize the displayed image. In that case, since there is a possibility that the stress due to not being able to enjoy the image production despite the rotation of the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a and the interest in the game may be reduced, this is eliminated in this example.

  A rotation sensor (not shown) for detecting the rotation speed of the rear gear 342 is provided in the vicinity of the rear gear 342 of the upper surface rotation mechanism described above. The upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is detected by the rotation speed of the rear gear 342. Measure the amount of rotation. Further, the rotation angle of the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a can be adjusted by operating the touch panel 246.

  The rotation amount of the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a after the movement can be set from 0% to 100% in this example according to the operation on the touch panel 246. When set to 0%, when the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is in a position after movement, the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is in contact with the receiving portions 348 and 349 (default angle). When set to 100%, the upper overhanging panel 351 rotates so as to be in an upright state from the position of the default angle, and the upper display device 352 faces in the horizontal direction. When the player operates the touch panel 246 and is set to a value of 100%, for example, a rotational movement amount signal having a value of 100% is input from the touch panel 246 to the peripheral control board. Next, the peripheral control board is configured to set and control the rotation amount of the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a based on the rotational movement amount signal.

  As mentioned above, although the example of the upper extension panel 351 was shown, it is not limited to this, The thing provided with two or more upper extension panels 351 in the upper part of a door frame as another example may be adopted. For example, as shown in FIG. 238, the upper projecting panel 351 is arranged on the upper side of the door frame 3 side by side. The left and right upper overhanging panels 351 may also be configured to be capable of rotational movement as described above, and each upper overhanging panel 351 may be driven using the upper gearbox 382 disposed therebetween. Thereby, for example, each upper overhanging panel 351 is rotated and moved so that the player can visually recognize the upper display device 352, the left and right upper display devices 352 display character images and the like, and the upper first speaker Since there are more variations in the production than the case where there is only one upper overhanging panel 351, such as performing an effect such that the character images are conversing with each other using the 354 and the upper second speaker 355, it does not get tired and the game Decline in interest can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper overhanging panel 351 has a function different between the two surfaces of the upper display device 352 and the upper decorative member 353. However, the upper overhanging panel is not limited to this. Three or more surfaces whose functions change as the 351 rotates can be provided.
For example, when the upper overhanging panel 351 can be rotated 360 degrees about the left-right direction and different upper decorative members 353 are arranged on the respective surfaces, and the surface that can be visually recognized by the player as the game progresses is changed to 1 It is possible to entertain the player with 4 patterns of decoration by using the two overhanging panels 351. Furthermore, by configuring the player to indicate the degree of expectation for the jackpot to the player with the decoration of 4 patterns. When the upper decorative member 353 is visually recognized, it is possible to keep anxious about the game, and it is possible to keep the game interesting.

  Further, the members provided on the upper overhanging panel 351 are not limited to the upper decorative member 353, the upper display device 352, the upper first speaker 354, and the upper second speaker 355. For example, different shaped objects (dolls, etc.) can be visually recognized from each surface of the upper overhanging panel 351, and the upper overhanging panel 351 moves (rotates and moves) about the left and right direction, so that the player can visually recognize it. Things may change. Specifically, it is an upper overhanging panel 351 having three or more surfaces facing the player direction by rotational movement, the inside of which is a hollow space that can accommodate a plurality of shaped objects, and further, an upper decorative member On each surface of 353, a window part is provided through which at least one modeled object among the modeled objects accommodated therein can be visually recognized. Then, the molded object that can be visually recognized by the player is changed by rotating the upper projecting panel 351 and changing the surface facing the player. In addition, as a modeling thing accommodated in the inside of the upper extension panel 351, it can be visually recognized from the 1st surface of the upper extension panel 351 (it can be visually recognized from the window part of the 1st surface), for example. “Right-handed notification” that is visible from the second surface of the upper projecting panel 351 (visible from the window portion of the second surface) and the character modeled object (first modeled object) as the motif “Left arrow to notify left-handedness” that is visible from the third surface of the right-sided shaped object (second shaped object) and the upper projecting panel 351 (visible from the window on the third surface). When the upper projecting panel 351 is rotated in accordance with the progress of the game and functions as a decorative means for the outside (the first modeled object can be visually recognized). With the correct side facing the player) , When functioning as an assist means (means for suggesting the direction in which the game ball should be shot) that informs the game method that the player does not lose (the second and third objects can be viewed in the direction of the player) State). The situation in which the upper overhanging panel 351 functions as an assist means includes a gaming state in which a left-hand strike described below is performed and a gaming state in which a right-hand strike described below is performed until the gaming state ends or the gaming state Peripheral control so that the surface corresponding to the gaming state is faced in the player direction until a certain period of time (the passage of a predetermined time or execution of a predetermined number of fluctuations) has passed since the start of the game. It can be illustrated that the substrate controls the overhang panel 351. As the modeled object, besides the above-described ones, a design sheet on which a predetermined decorative design is drawn, a plate on which a message or the like is drawn, and the like may be appropriately selected and adopted.

[Coordinated production of side overhang and upper overhang panel]
As described above, the side overhang and the upper overhang panel 351 (hereinafter referred to as both overhangs together with the side overhang and the upper overhang panel 351) are individually moved at a predetermined opportunity, respectively, before and after the movement. The example of using different functions such as members has been described, but in this example, the functions of both overhangs before and after the operation using both the side overhang and the upper overhang panel 351 (in cooperation). And different effects.

[First embodiment of both overhangs]
In this example, both the upper overhanging panel 351 and the side overhanging are configured to move with a predetermined trigger, and the functions played by both overhangs are different before and after movement. In the two overhangs of this example, the side overhang slides in the vertical direction, and the upper overhang panel 351 rotates and moves around the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 239, the side overhang is slid downward, and the state in which the upper display device 352 provided on the upper overhang panel 351 faces upward is before movement (in a fixed position). As shown, the side overhang is in a state of sliding upward, and the state in which the upper display device 352 provided in the upper overhanging panel 351 faces the player is after movement.

  When both overhangs are in a state before movement, the upper display device 352 faces upward, so that the upper display device 352 is in a state where it is difficult for both players and other hall customers to see. On the other hand, since the upper decorative member 353 is located in a state facing the player direction, the upper overhanging panel 351 functions as a light emitting effect using the upper decorative member 353. In addition, since the side overhang is in a state of sliding downward, a sheet (not shown) on which a decorative design corresponding to the model of the pachinko machine is drawn is inserted, and the side overhang is passed through the window portion 491a for the right outer surface. It functions as a member that advertises the pachinko machine 1 to hall customers.

  In addition, when the two overhangs are in the state after movement, the upper display device 352 rotates and moves so as to face the player direction, so that the upper overhang panel 351 functions as an image effect using the upper display device 352. . Further, since the side overhang slides upward, it functions as a movable accessory that slides when performing an effect.

  The movement opportunity of both overhangs is, for example, a game played by a player. In a normal gaming state, both overhangs are positioned at a fixed position, and when the production is performed by the peripheral control board, they are arranged on the upper decorative member 353. A light decoration effect is provided by a light emitting member such as an LED, and the side projection has a decoration function by a sheet that can be visually recognized through the window portion 490b for the left inner surface and the window portion 491b for the right inner surface.

  On the other hand, when the player is playing a game, for example, when performing an effect suggesting that the probability of developing into a big hit state is high, or when performing an effect indicating that the big hit state is achieved, the upper display device 352 is provided. The upper overhanging panel 351 is rotationally moved to a position where can be visually recognized, and the side overhang is slid upward. Further, the upper display device 352 displays a message such as “Intense heat!”, “Reach!”, “Big hit!”, Etc. depending on the game state at that time.

  With the above configuration, in addition to the message displayed on the upper display device 352 for the player, the side overhang can be experienced in conjunction with the upward sliding movement, so both overhangs are used separately for production. Compared with, the impact which can be given to a player increases and the interest with respect to a game can be improved.

  Furthermore, since both overhangs are provided on the door frame, not only the player but also the hall customer can easily see the movement when operating in the state after movement, for example, Because it is possible to let other hall customers know the direction of the production that suggests that there is a high probability of developing to a big hit state, and the state of the production showing that it has become a big hit state, it can make the player feel a sense of superiority In addition, the pachinko machine 1 can select the pachinko machine 1 because it can be used not only for production but also for the promotion by gathering the gazes of other hall customers according to the movement of both overhangs. Has also been improved.

  As the movable structure of the both overhangs in this example, the side overhang uses the above-described vertical movement slide method using the belt-type movable portion 503, and the upper overhang panel 351 uses the above-described upper overhang rotation mechanism for rotational movement. Is used.

[Second embodiment of both overhangs]
In this example, of the two overhangs, the upper overhang panel 351 is provided with a moving means that rotates and moves with respect to the door frame 3, and the functions played by both overhangs are different before and after the movement. In the upper overhanging panel 351 of this example, as shown in FIG. 241, the state in which the upper display device 352 provided in the upper overhanging panel 351 faces upward is before movement (in a fixed position), and as shown in FIG. In addition, the state in which the right side surface of the upper overhanging panel 351 is opposed to the upper surface of the right overhanging panel 491 and the two overhangs are combined is after the movement.

  When the upper overhanging panel 351 is in a state before being moved, the upper display device 352 faces upward, so that the upper display device 352 is in a state where it is difficult for both players and other hall customers to see. On the other hand, since the upper decorative member 353 faces the player direction, the upper overhanging panel 351 functions as a light emitting effect using the upper decorative member 353. In addition, as described above, a sheet (not shown) on which a decorative design corresponding to the model of the pachinko machine is inserted is inserted into the right-extending panel 491, and it is provided to the hall customers through the window portion 491a for the right outer surface. Used as a member for advertising the pachinko machine 1. That is, each of the right extension panel 491 and the upper extension panel individually functions as a member for production for the player and a member for advertisement for hall customers who are not players.

  Further, when the upper overhanging panel 351 is in a state after movement, the upper surface of the upper overhanging panel 351 and the outer surface of the right overhanging panel 491 are combined so that the hall customers see the island facility along the passage. It is possible to make an illusion that a huge overhang is placed. With this high-impact huge advertising member (when combined), attention to the pachinko machine 1 can be raised more than any gaming machine, and the possibility that the pachinko machine 1 is selected can be improved.

  Further, in addition to the advertising effect of the huge advertising member, the upper display panel 351 is combined with the right extension panel 491 so that the upper display device 352 is also visible, so that an image and a message are displayed on the upper display device 352. Thus, in addition to the advertisement by the sheet inserted in the right extension panel 491, a further advertisement effect can be added.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is informed to hall customers by a message displayed on the upper display device 352 whether or not a game is being played by the player. Specifically, when a game is being played by the player, the upper overhanging panel 351 is positioned in a state before the movement, and when the game is not being played by the player and when the player is away The upper overhanging panel 351 is positioned in the state after the movement. When the upper overhanging panel 351 is in the state after the movement, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is being played by the player. In order to notify, for example, messages such as “vacant” and “seated” are displayed on the upper display device 352. As a result, it is possible to recognize whether the pachinko machine 1 is not being played, or whether the pachinko machine 1 is just leaving the seat for a break or the like, which leads to trouble prevention between customers.

  In addition, the display such as “vacant” and “seated” by the upper display device is configured to change depending on whether or not the “demo state” described in the first embodiment of the door frame. In the “demo state” which is a so-called customer waiting state, “vacant” is displayed to notify the hall customers that no one is playing. In addition, although the state where the contact with the handle lever 504 is not detected continues, the game ball is borrowed from the ball lending machine (the game ball is detected by at least one of the above-described upper plate detection sensor and lower plate detection sensor). If it is detected that the user is present), it is determined that the user is away from the seat, and “separate seat” is displayed to notify other players from accidentally starting the game. Yes.

  Even if the upper overhanging panel 351 is being played by a player, the upper overhanging panel 351 may be positioned in the state after the movement so that the two overhangs are combined. For example, when the player is playing a game, for example, when performing an effect suggesting that there is a high probability of developing into a big hit state, or when performing an effect indicating that a big hit state has been achieved, the upper overhanging panel 351 is moved to the right. Rotate and move to unite with the overhanging panel 491. Further, the upper display device 352 displays a message such as “Intense heat!”, “Reach!”, “Big hit!”, Etc. depending on the game state at that time.

  With the above configuration, the message displayed on the upper display device 352 functions as an object for informing the hall customers of the gaming state, and also shows the player a motion to rise while the upper overhanging panel 351 rotates. The function as a movable accessory can be achieved. Therefore, even if the upper overhanging panel 351 rotates and cannot perform a light emitting effect using the upper decorative member 353, the movement of the two overhanging can be enjoyed itself, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. Can do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 243, an upper second display device 359 is disposed behind the upper overhanging panel 351. When the upper overhanging panel 351 is positioned at a fixed position, the upper overhanging panel 351 is disposed. Because it is located in the place where it overlaps in the front-rear direction, it is not visible. Further, when the upper overhanging panel 351 is in a state after being moved, the upper second display device 359 is in a state visible to the player, and for example, a message “big hit” is displayed on the upper display device 352. In the same way, not only let the other hall customers know the game status, but also make the player visually recognize the same message by displaying the message “big hit” on the upper second display device. Can do. Thereby, even when the upper overhanging panel 351 is in the state after movement, the display effect by the upper second display device 359 can be obtained by visually recognizing the place where the upper overhanging panel 351 is located at the fixed position. In addition to being able to prevent a decrease in interest due to the inability to provide the player with the function of the light emission effect produced by the upper overhanging panel 351, the display mode of the upper second display device 359 can be changed. It is possible to produce a wider range of effects than the light emission effects.

  The device disposed behind the upper overhanging panel 351 is not limited to the upper second display device 359. For example, instead of the upper second display device 359, an EL sheet is arranged, the light emission luminance is changed depending on the gaming state, a window part that can be seen rearward is arranged, a space is provided at the back of the window part, and the motif of the gaming machine The character modeled object etc. which become may be arrange | positioned and you may make it visually recognize through a window part. Alternatively, for example, the above-described upper third speaker 356 may be arranged, and various devices can be appropriately selected.

  In addition, in order to make the two overhangs function as one huge advertising member, as shown in FIG. 244, instead of the upper display device 352, a sheet on which a picture inserted in the side overhang is drawn. The same decoration is placed on the upper surface of the upper overhanging panel 351, and when the upper overhanging panel 351 is in the state after movement, the decoration arranged on the upper overhanging panel 351 and the right overhanging panel 491 are inserted. The sheet may be combined to be visible as a single picture. By combining both overhangs, it can be thought that both overhangs have a huge right overhang panel, and it becomes an advertising member that can have a large impact compared with the advertisement performed only with the sheet inserted in the right overhang panel 491. It becomes the composition which changes. In addition, when the island facility is viewed along the passage, both overhangs are more easily noticed by the hall customers, and the possibility that the pachinko machine 1 is selected is improved over other gaming machines.

  Next, referring to FIG. 245, a structure for rotating and moving the upper overhanging panel 351 with the upper surface portion of the right overhanging panel 491 will be described. FIG. 245 is a rear view showing the both overhang combining mechanism for rotating the upper overhanging panel 351. (A) is a rear view showing a state in which the upper overhanging panel 351 is in a fixed position. (B) is a rear view showing a state where the upper overhanging panel 351 is rotated and moved by the both overhanging uniting mechanism and united with the upper surface of the right overhanging panel 391.

  The both overhang uniting mechanism has an upper overhang panel 351, a right overhang panel 491, and a mechanism portion. The mechanism portion connects the upper overhang panel 351 and the right overhang panel 491 with a hinge, and the upper overhang with a hinge shaft. The panel 351 is rotated, and the upper surface portion of the upper overhanging panel 351 and the side surface portion of the right overhanging panel 491 are united. The mechanism unit includes a hinge 361, a hinge shaft 362, a sector gear 363, a motor gear 364, and a motor (not shown). The hinge 361 is fixed to the right side surface of the upper overhanging panel 351 and the upper surface of the right overhanging panel 491, and has an open structure that switches between a closed state and an open state with the hinge shaft 362 as an axis, and the maximum angle in the open state is an internal angle of 90 °. It has become. In the open state, the upper overhanging panel 351 is in a fixed position, and in the closed state, the upper overhanging panel 351 is in a state after movement. The sector gear 363 is fixedly attached to the rear surface portion of the upper overhanging panel 351 and is disposed so as to mesh with the motor gear 364. The motor is disposed on the door frame base unit 100 and connected to the motor gear 364.

  When the upper overhanging panel 531 is rotated and moved to the position after the movement by the both overhang combining mechanism, the motor gear 364 connected to the motor rotates clockwise. Accordingly, the sector gear 363 arranged to mesh with the motor gear 364 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in conjunction with the motor gear 364. With the rotation of the sector gear 363, the upper overhanging panel 351 rises around the hinge shaft 362, and the hinge 361 is closed, so that both overhangs are combined.

  On the other hand, when the upper overhanging panel 531 is rotated and moved to the position before the movement by the both overhang combining mechanism, the motor gear 364 connected to the motor rotates counterclockwise. Accordingly, the sector gear 363 arranged so as to mesh with the motor gear 364 rotates in a clockwise direction in conjunction with it. As the sector gear 363 rotates, the upper overhanging panel 351 returns to its original position with the hinge shaft 362 as an axis, so that the hinge 361 is in an open state, and the upper overhanging panel 351 moves to a fixed position.

[Operation of both overhangs by RTC]
Further, the operation of each overhang panel is not necessarily limited to the movement operation triggered by the gaming state at that time. For example, regardless of the gaming situation at that time, such as whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is being played by a player or whether or not the gaming state is a big hit state, each overhanging panel is operated using the RTC described later. May be.

  Since the RTC (to be described later) provided in the main control MPU has a clock / calendar function, in this embodiment, a time counting function for counting year, month, day, hour, minute, second is used. When a predetermined time comes, a timed overhang effect is provided in which both overhangs are moved regardless of the gaming state.

  For example, when a predetermined time is measured by the RTC, the upper overhanging panel 351 is rotated about the left and right directions so that the upper display device 352 faces the player, and the side overhanging slides upward. When configured, the player who is playing at that time can recall the fact that both overhangs have moved regardless of the gaming state, and suddenly a hot production has started, and can increase expectations for jackpots. , Can improve the game entertainment. In addition, when a hall customer who is not playing at that time looks at the island facility along the passage, the line of sight moves naturally toward both overhangs that are moving, so it becomes an advertisement that attracts the attention of the hall customer, and from which gaming machine Can also increase attention to the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 1 is not being played by anyone, if the hall customer witnesses where both overhangs are moving, the advertisement can be recalled as a chance if the game is started now. With these configurations, the possibility that the pachinko machine 1 is selected can be improved.

  Moreover, the time-projecting effect that is executed when the predetermined time is counted as described above can have various effects depending on the time that is executed. For example, by performing a timed project effect in accordance with the opening time of the game hall, the attention and interest of the hall customers can be gathered as soon as the store opens. In addition, for example during lunch time, by limiting the time to the time period when the player's game rate tends to decrease, etc. It can be reduced effectively. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the hall manager can arbitrarily set the time for performing the timed overhanging effect by operating a predetermined time setting operation unit.

  In addition, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side on the island facilities in the game hall, it is possible to perform the time-projecting effect all at once. Compared to the timed overhanging effect that is executed with only one unit, the time-performing effect is performed simultaneously with multiple units, so that the entire periphery where the plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed is installed with other gaming machines. It has a lively atmosphere that is different from the surroundings and has a spectacular view. Thereby, the interest of the hall customer can be attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, as an example of the timed overhang effect, as described above, the upper overhanging panels 351 of the plurality of pachinko machines 1 are simultaneously rotated and moved so that the upper surface of the upper overhanging panel 351 and the outer surface of the right overhanging panel 491 are substantially flush with each other. Combine to be. Next, on the upper display device 352 arranged on the upper projecting panel 351, an image on which a message such as “During limited-time production! Chance !?” is displayed as an image for a timed projecting effect. By doing so, the player can be reminded that a big hit may come if the game is started now, and the possibility that the pachinko machine 1 is selected can be improved. In addition, when a variation effect is executed during a timed overhanging effect, a time limited variation effect during which the timed overhanging effect is executed may be separately prepared and replaced, for example, displayed in the central liquid crystal display device 1500. On the variation production screen, display “During limited-time production” and make a difference by replacing the background image etc. with a different one from the background image displayed in the variation production performed outside the timed production production. By making the player have a sense of expectation, the interest in the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, as an example of the timed overhang effect, as described above, the upper overhanging panel 351 of the plurality of pachinko machines 1 is sequentially rotated and moved, and “the upper surface of the upper overhanging panel 351 and the outer surface of the right overhanging panel 491 are substantially flush with each other. The operation of combining so as to be performed may be executed with a predetermined time difference in each of the plurality of pachinko machines 1. Specifically, when the hall manager operates a predetermined time setting operation unit provided in the pachinko machines 1A to 1C, the pachinko machine 1B rotates the upper extension panel 351 and the pachinko machine 1B. The time B for rotating the upper overhanging panel 351 and the time C for rotating the upper overhanging panel 351 with the pachinko machine 1C can be set. Then, under the situation where the pachinko machines 1A to 1C are arranged in order, for example, the time A is set to “10:00:00”, the time B is set to “10:00:01”, and the time Set C to “10:00:02”. In this case, the pachinko machines 1 </ b> A to 1 </ b> C sequentially perform “operation for combining the upper surface of the upper overhanging panel 351 and the outer surface of the right overhanging panel 491 so as to be substantially flush” with a shift of 1 second. By doing in this way, unlike the case where a plurality of pachinko machines simply start production at the same time, a new aspect can be produced simultaneously, which gives the player surprise and surprise.

  Further, as described above, in the configuration in which the upper overhanging panels 351 of the plurality of pachinko machines 1 are simultaneously rotated and the upper overhanging panel 351 of the plurality of pachinko machines 1 are sequentially rotated, the “upper overhanging panel 351 When the time for executing the "operation to combine the upper surface of the right side and the outer surface of the right overhanging panel 491 so that they are substantially flush" is displayed based on the variation pattern in which the special symbol is a big hit. Only the gaming machine may be controlled so as not to execute the “operation for combining the upper surface of the upper projecting panel 351 and the outer surface of the right projecting panel 491 so as to be substantially flush with each other”. As a result, the surrounding gaming machines execute their own operation or all at once, even though “the operation of combining the upper surface of the upper overhanging panel 351 and the outer surface of the right overhanging panel 491 so as to be substantially flush” is performed. Through the fact that there is no change in the gaming machine, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that “it may be a hit”, and it is possible to further enhance the gaming interest.

[3-1. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 27 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the production operation unit of the dish unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit for each main member and viewed from above. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from above with the mounting base unit disassembled, and FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as viewed from below.

  FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering operation unit touch unit as seen from above and FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit as seen from below. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit button unit as seen from above and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as seen from below. 40 is a plan view of the dish unit, FIG. 41 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the effect operation unit in the section BB in FIG. 40, and FIG. 42 is an effect operation in the section CC in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Further, FIG. 43 (a) is a front view of the lower right door production unit of the dish unit, (b) is a right side view of the lower right door production unit, and FIG. 44 (a) shows the lower right door production unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right direction production unit from back. 45 is a DD cross-sectional view of the door lower right rendering unit of FIG. 43 (b). 46 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the rear. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit as seen from the back. FIG. 50A is a front view of the door lower right effect unit with the door lower right rotating body facing forward, and FIG. 50B is a front view of the door lower right rotating body facing rear.

  FIG. 51 (a) is a perspective view of the dish unit with the upper dish ball removal unit attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 51 (b) is a perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from back in the state. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 54 (a) is a perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 54 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front.

  The dish unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. The tray unit 200 is an upper tray 201 that stores game balls to be paid out from the payout device 830 and to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game that is disposed below the upper tray 201 and is supplied from the upper tray 201. And a lower tray 202 capable of storing a sphere. In addition, the dish unit 200 is attached to the plate-shaped dish unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the front upper part of the dish unit base 210, and the left side of the left and right center bulges greatly forward, and the upper dish 201 And a lower plate body 214 which is attached to the center of the left and right at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 210 and bulges forward to form the lower plate 202. .

  The dish unit 200 covers the production operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper plate body 212 and the front surface of the dish unit base 210, and the front and lower sides of the upper plate body 212, the lower plate body 214, and the production operation unit. A dish unit cover 260 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, a door lower right effect unit 270 disposed on the right side of the dish operation unit 220 and attached to the right front portion of the dish unit base 210, and a door lower right effect unit. An effect unit cover 300 that covers the front side of the plate unit base 210 and covers the front side of the plate 270, and a game ball that is mounted so as to sandwich the plate unit base 210 from the front and back and is stored in the upper plate 201 of the upper plate body 212 On the lower plate 202 and the lower plate main body 214 on the lower side Mounted includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Further, the dish unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the production operation unit 220, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, An upper plate top decorative member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission, and is attached to the left side of the front surface of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the plate unit cover 260 so that light can be emitted forward. Plate unit left decorative substrate 345 having a plurality of LEDs, and attached to the front right side of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the production unit cover 300 and on the lower side of the door lower right production unit 270. A dish unit right decorative board 346 having a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light, and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 The upper plate decorative board 233, the upper plate decorative board 235, the upper plate liquid crystal board 241, the vibration device 242, the touch panel 246, the production button decoration board 251, the production button press sensor 258, the door lower right relay board 281, which will be described later. The dish unit left decorative board 345 and the dish unit relay board 347 for relaying the connection between the dish unit right decorative board 346 and a peripheral control board (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

[3-1a. Dish unit base]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the dish unit base 210 of the dish unit 200 extends long to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit base 210 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the front view and extends back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth under the upper dish ball supply opening 210a. A speaker slit 210b having a plurality of elongated holes extending in the vertical direction, a lower tray ball supply port 210c penetrating forward and backward in the lower center of the left and right center when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; There is provided an upper dish ball feed opening 210d that penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the ball supply opening 210c in the front view and extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper dish body 212.

  In addition, the dish unit base 210 has a rectangular through-hole 210e that penetrates forward and backward on the left side when viewed from the front of the upper dish ball feed opening 210d, and a receptacle that protrudes forward from the bottom side of the through-hole 210e in a plate shape. The piece 210f, the relief opening 210g penetrating back and forth on the upper right side of the upper tray ball feed port 210d, and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 penetrating back and forth in the lower right corner of the front view are inserted. A handle insertion port 210h, a cylinder insertion port 210i through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 passes through in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front, and a right side when viewed from the front of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c. , And a notch 210j that is notched forward from the rear end.

[3-1b. Upper plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the upper plate body 212 of the dish unit 200 is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. ing. The upper plate body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a that is opened only to the left and rearward on the right end side when viewed from the front and through which game balls can be circulated. The upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the bottom surface is generally lower at the right end. More specifically, in a state where the upper plate body 212 is attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is a game ball from a position below the upper plate ball supply port 210a from the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. It inclines so that it may become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter. Thereby, the game ball released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate body 212, and the received game ball is received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feed opening 210d.

  The upper plate body 212 includes a metal grounding metal 212b extending from the left and right centers to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the ground metal fitting 212b is electrically grounded (grounded), and the game ball can be contacted to remove static electricity charged in the game ball.

[3-1c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the lower dish body 214 of the dish unit 200 has a trapezoidal shape in plan view with a long rear end with respect to the front end, and is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate body 214 includes a ball hole 214a that penetrates the bottom surface in the vertical direction and can be closed by the lower plate ball hole unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the ball hole 214a. doing. The lower tray main body 214 can receive and store game balls released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 210c of the tray unit base 210, and can store the game balls below the tray unit 200 from the ball release holes 214a. Can be discharged.

[3-1d. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The production operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A and the attachment base unit 220A, which are attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish body 212 in the center of the left and right when viewed from the front, as shown in FIGS. Touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the attachment base unit 220A on the left side when viewed from the front of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the attachment base unit 220A. A unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end in front view of the attachment base unit 220A.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire circumference in the center of the outer peripheral surface in the axial direction. The damper 222 in the present embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220 or the dish unit base 210 side by reducing the impact when the touch unit 220B is struck, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted by the vibrating device 242 that is transmitted to the mounting base unit 220 and the dish unit base 210 side.

[3-1d-1. Mounting base unit]
As shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the mounting base unit 220 </ b> A of the production operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and opened upward, and an upper side of the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 which is attached and has a rear end attached to the front end of the upper plate body 212 and can accommodate the touch unit 200B from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231 A unit cover that covers the front side of the front lens member 232, the front plate front decorative member 233 that is disposed between the front plate lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and includes a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And an upper dish decorative member 234 having translucency attached to the H.224.

  Further, the mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231 and has an upper dish rear decorative board 235 provided with a plurality of LEDs that can emit light upward, and an upper side of the upper dish rear decorative board 235. The upper plate rear decoration member 236 that is disposed on the unit cover 224 and has translucency, and is sandwiched between the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, and from the upper plate rear decoration board 235. A linear light-emitting lens member 237 capable of guiding the light and emitting an upper end linearly, a cylindrical button attachment member 238 attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side when viewed from the front of the upper dish decoration member 236, and a button attachment member And an upper dish ball removal button 239 that is slidably attached to the upper and lower sides by 238.

  The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined so as to become lower from the front and rear substantially center to the front side, and the mounting base receiving portion 230a that passes through the mounting side receiving portion 230a. One through-hole 230b and a cylindrical tubular receiving portion 230c extending downward from the periphery of the through-hole 230b are provided. The through hole 230b has a rectangular inner periphery. The cylindrical receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal cylindrical shape so as to be narrowed downward (see FIG. 42). More specifically, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c has a front inner peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a, and a rear inner peripheral wall extending downward from the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a. As it goes to the front, it extends at an angle so that it goes forward. Moreover, the cylindrical receiving part 230c is inclined and extended so that the inner peripheral walls on the left and right sides are slightly close to the lower ends (tips) with respect to the vertical of the surface of the attachment side receiving part 230a.

  The unit case 231 is opened upward and protrudes in a cylindrical shape one by one apart from the housing recess 231a that can accommodate the touch unit 220B and the front and rear ends of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a in the front-rear direction. Horizontal support pins 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c projecting in a cylindrical shape upward and away from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and from the left and right centers on the front and rear end sides of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a A central support protrusion 231d that protrudes upward, and two receiving protrusions 231e that protrude in a pyramid shape so as to narrow toward the bottom from the bottom of the housing recess 231a and are spaced apart from each other left and right. .

  Further, the unit case 231 is circularly penetrated up and down on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a in the front view, and is disposed around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower part of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending from the upper and lower sides to the left and right of the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the receiving recess 231a and recessed downward from the upper end are disposed. And a cutout portion 231h.

  The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 has a shape in plan view that is a combination of a quadrangle extending left and right and a trapezoid projecting outward from the left and right sides of the quadrangle. In addition, the receiving recess 231a is formed such that the bottom surface of the quadrangular portion is lower downward than the bottom surfaces of the trapezoidal portions on the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is formed slightly lower than the height (axial length) of the damper 222.

  The four lateral support pins 231 b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the housing recess 231 a and are formed so as to be insertable into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b includes a truncated cone-shaped taper portion 231i whose diameter decreases toward the upper end side on the upper end side (see FIG. 41). The lateral support pin 231 b is formed such that the distance from the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a to the middle of the taper portion 231 i is the same as the length of the damper 222, and the entire length is longer than the damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231 c can be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222 and is formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion in the housing recess 231a. The receiving projection 231e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a square outer periphery. The two receiving protrusions 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The receiving projection 231e has a front outer peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and is inclined so that the rear outer wall moves forward with respect to the bottom of the housing recess 231a. And extended. In addition, the receiving projection 231e extends so that the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined so that the lower ends (tips) slightly approach each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231 e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230 c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted into the through-hole 230a of the mounting base 231, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The front plate decorative member 234 is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper dish decoration board 235 includes a plurality of decoration LEDs 235a for decorating the upper dish decoration member 236 and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for emitting and decorating the linear light emitting lens member 237. .

  The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right sides than the upper dish decoration member 236, and the light receiving part 237a and the light receiving part 237a disposed above the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the upper dish decoration substrate 235. And a flat line-shaped light emitting portion 237b that is continuous with the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the linear light-emitting portion 237b is fitted into the notch 231h of the unit case 231, so that the front surface of the linear light-emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light-emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving unit 237a, guide the light received by the light receiving unit 237a to the linear light emitting unit 237b, and the linear light emitting unit 237b. The entire upper end can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper dish ball removal button 239 is attached by a button attachment member 238 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and includes an extending piece 239a extending downward from the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper plate ball removal button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 (pull out). )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. Further, the outer peripheral surface of the two receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached and the mounting base 230 in which the lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) that causes the unit case 231 to move downward from the touch unit 220B side is applied, the force is not immediately transmitted to the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the concave portion 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, whereby force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends. Therefore, the force can be attenuated to some extent by the bending and transmitted to the mounting base 230.

  Further, the receiving projection 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface that are inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (a surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving projection 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a provided with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. To do. Thereby, the force from the receiving protrusion 231e (unit case 231) side is dispersed, and it can be avoided that a large force is applied to the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is hardly damaged. .

[3-1d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the touch unit 220 </ b> B of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 that is open on the upper side, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 that is attached to the lower case 240 from the upper side, A pair of vibration devices 242 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240 and the upper side of the pair of vibration devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are attached to the lower case 240 and attached to the upper side. A shallow box-shaped base member 243 having an open portion, an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is inserted into the base member 243 from above and is controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241, and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. A frame-shaped earth metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate covering the outer periphery, and a transparent touch panel covering the upper surfaces of the earth metal fitting 245 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 And 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 in an assembled state. A sheet-like waterproof seal 248 having a waterproof property is provided which extends over substantially the entire length of the left and right rear end surfaces of the case 240 and the like and is attached to the rear end surfaces of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247. ing.

  The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the housing recess 213a of the unit case 231 and is formed so as to be housed in the housing recess 213a. The lower case 240 includes a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-like protruding portion 240b protruding in a trapezoidal shape from both the left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a, and an outer diameter of the damper 222. A pair of damper mounting recesses 240c that are vertically opened and partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are spaced apart in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. And a vibration device attachment portion 240e to which the vibration device 242 is attached and disposed near the substrate attachment portion 240a between the pair of damper attachment recesses 240c in the protrusion 240b.

  The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c at the substantially upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

  The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a with the center of gravity being eccentric. The vibration device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibration drive motor 242a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a in which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from above and formed in a shallow box shape, and an extending portion 243b extending outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a, A screw hole 243c that penetrates up and down at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip of the extension part 243b and is formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c. A chamfered tapered portion 243d (see FIG. 41) having a diameter that increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 is such that the distal end side can pass through the tapered portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b in the unit case 231 and the proximal end side (lower side) from the tapered portion 231i. It is formed in a size that cannot pass.

  The touch panel 246 includes a tempered glass that is strong against impact and is not easily broken, a capacitive sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. ing.

  The touch unit 220B can attach the damper 222 by inserting the damper 222 from the C-shaped open side into the damper mounting recesses 240c provided on the left and right sides of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240 d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240 c is inserted into the groove 222 a of the damper 222. Thereby, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. In a state where the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 abuts on the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Protruding.

  In the touch unit 220 </ b> B, the vibration drive motor 242 a of the pair of vibration devices 242 is sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibration devices 242 can independently generate vibrations.

  Further, the touch unit 220 </ b> B can visually recognize an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from the upper side. Then, an image such as a button is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 so as to operate the button of the image.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B has a prevention water seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the dish unit 200, the liquid enters the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from being damaged by the ingress of liquid.

[3-1d-3. Button unit]
As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the button unit 220C of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit main body 250 attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g of the unit case 231 in the attachment base unit 220A, and a lower part of the unit main body 250. And a board cover 252 that covers the lower side of the stage button decoration board 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250.

  The button unit 220C is disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250, and the button base 253 is attached to the upper side. A spring member 254 that is energized, a light guide member 255 that is inserted into the button base 253 and that can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 upward, and a plurality of minute electrodes disposed above the light guide member 255. A sheet-like diffusing lens member 256 having a prism, a translucent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffusing lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251 And an effect button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the descending end.

  The unit main body 250 includes three attachment pieces 250a that extend outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and are attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-like shelf 250b that extends inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 includes a cylindrical lower tube portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical tube-shaped upper tube portion 253b whose diameter increases upward from the upper end of the lower tube portion 253a, A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b, has a lower end capable of passing through the through-hole 250c of the unit main body 250, protrudes outward from the lower end, and can engage (contact) the lower surface of the unit main body 250. A pair of engaging claw portions 253c and an upper cylindrical portion 253b that protrude radially outwardly from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylinder portion 253b and whose lower ends can come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250 A plurality of flat plate-like contact pieces 253d, and a detection piece 253e that extends outward from the outer peripheral surface of the lower tube portion 253a and the upper tube portion 253b in a flat plate shape and is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258. There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as illustrated. The spring member 254 has a lower end abutted against the upper surface of the shelf 250 b of the unit main body 250, and an upper end supported by a plurality of abutting pieces 253 d on the button base 253.

  The light guide member 255 extends to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower cylinder portion 253a of the button base 253 from the bottom surface of the disk-like main body portion 255a fitted into the upper portion of the upper cylinder portion 253b of the button base 253. A plurality of columnar light guides 255b. The plurality of light guide portions 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and can guide the light from the LEDs to be emitted from the entire upper surface of the main body portion 255a.

  In the button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusing lens member 256, and the upper plate effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. it can. These button bases 253 and the like are such that the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 protrudes upward from the upper end of the unit main body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 are Engagement with the lower surface of 250 restricts further elevation, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the ascending end.

  When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258, and the upper A pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250, and further lowering is restricted. Thus, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are in the lower end.

  Further, the button unit 220 </ b> C can decorate the upper plate effect button 257 by causing the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 to emit light. The LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 is a full color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be decorated with light emission in various colors.

[3-1d-4. Features of production operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 41, the rendering operation unit 220 of the present embodiment is assembled, and the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B is lower than the lower surface of the lower case 240. Since this also protrudes downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the bottom surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. In addition, the front end surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom face of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and upward of the touch unit 220B with respect to the horizontal support pins 231b. Movement is regulated by a flat washer on the head of a screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231 i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231 b and the tapered portion 243 d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243 c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the production operation unit 220 has a slightly higher upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the side of the lateral support pin 231b. Projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240. Further, a gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231 d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the left and right lateral support pins 231b.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 220 is constricted downward in the unit case 231 in which the touch unit 220B is attached from above in a pyramid-shaped cylindrical receiving portion 230c constricted downward in the attachment base 230 of the attachment base unit 220A. The lower end of the full pyramidal receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. Thus, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the housing recess 231a) floating in the air.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 31 and the like, the rendering operation unit 220 has a linear upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 along the rear side close to the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B ( It is exposed in a band shape. The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. An upper dish rear decoration member 236 is disposed on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, an upper dish ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the upper dish rear decoration member 236 in front view. Further, a button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player in accordance with the game state that is changed by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, an image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 and can be enjoyed.

  As an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, an image imitating an operation button is displayed, and by allowing touch detection by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 to be accepted, the image of the image can be displayed to the player. The operation buttons can be operated, and an effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of production using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported in a state of being lifted from the unit case 231 by the plurality of dampers 222, and therefore the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibration device 242 according to the gaming state. Can be vibrated. When the touch panel 246 is produced, the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibration device 242 so that the vibration of the vibration device 242 is applied to the finger or hand of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246. Even if the operation button of the image is operated to the player, the player can be surprised by illusioning that the actual operation button is operated. It is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating by making the player entertain.

  Further, since the production operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B, the player can press the upper plate production button 257 according to the gaming state, and the upper plate production button 257 can be operated. You can entertain the operation. More specifically, the image operation buttons on the touch panel 246 only have a touch on the touch panel 246, so that the operation feeling is less than that of the actual operation buttons. However, the upper plate effect button 257 is actually pressed. Therefore, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 does not give a sense of incongruity, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 can be comfortably enjoyed, and the decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed. .

  Since the production operation unit 220 is arranged at a portion where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging forward, the game can be performed even during production using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a possibility that a person may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the rendering operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of floating from the lower unit case 231. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 The impact can be absorbed to some extent by force. More specifically, when an impact (load) is applied from above, such as when the touch unit 220B is struck, it is transmitted to the damper 222 in which the left and right lateral support pins 231b are inserted, and the damper 222 is lowered while the touch unit 220B is lowered. Is compressed. By compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pins 231b, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered by the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 comes into contact with the upper end of the damper 222 into which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B is lowered. The damper 222 is compressed downward. Accordingly, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

  When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by an impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces of the left and right sides of the housing recess 231a and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. Thereby, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 is bent by the load from the center support protrusion 231d so that the center moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. By bending the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, the pair of receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is lowered. Then, when the receiving projection 231e is further lowered by the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and from the touch unit 220B. The impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are each formed in a pyramid shape that narrows downward, the receiving projection 231e is directed to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (on the mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is distributed and transmitted in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230 and a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, since the structure that absorbs the impact applied to the touch unit 220B before the transmission to the mounting base 230 is arranged in layers, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230 and the like can be made difficult to be damaged by the impact.

  In addition, the production operation unit 220 has a linear light emitting portion of a linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the post-upper decorative board 235 according to the gaming state. The upper end of 237b can be emitted linearly. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, etc. can be enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, depending on the gaming state, the decoration LED 235a on the back plate decoration board 235 is used to light-decorate the back plate decoration member 236 arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (the rear side from the linear light emitting portion 237b). be able to. By decorating the back plate decoration member 236 with light emission, the player's interest is attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B in the same manner as the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. It is possible to entertain the presentation presented by the presentation operation unit 220 and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is attached to an upper plate lower covering portion 262, which will be described later, of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. The waterproof seal 248 is pasted on the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Thereby, even if water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). In addition, it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and it is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from generating a malfunction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, since the post-upper decorative board 235 for decorating the post-upper decorative member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

[3-1e. Dish unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 27 to 30, the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 extends leftward and rightward, and the center of the left and right bulges forward, and is formed in a shell shape opened rearward. . The dish unit cover 260 is opened to the front substantially at the center of the left and right, and a lower dish opening 261 whose rear end is closed by the dish unit base 210, and a top plate side (upper side) on the inner peripheral wall of the lower dish opening 261. Are arranged on the left side when viewed from the front of the lower plate opening portion 261 and the lower plate opening portion 261 and covers the lower side of the upper plate body 212 and the rendering operation unit 220. A speaker grille 263 that transmits sound from the speakers, a dish unit left decorative member 264 that is arranged on the upper side of the speaker grille 263 and is lit and decorated by the dish unit left decorative substrate 345, and a lower dish opening 261 arranged on the right side of the front view. The handle unit 265 through which the rear part of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes and the bottom surface of the dish unit cover 260 are formed. A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  In the lower dish opening 261, the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall is closed by the lower dish body 214. The speaker grille 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are provided in a metal plate.

  The dish unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and a rugged surface on the right side. Moreover, the right side of the front view is substantially translucent.

  The dish unit cover 260 is formed at an interval between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262 so that the dish unit cover 260 can be grasped with one hand. Thus, when the player touches the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B can be performed. Can be easily performed.

  Specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the upper surface of the front end of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the upper surface of the rear end of the touch unit 220B and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 are The distance from the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the distance between the front end of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 and the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. Accordingly, the player can grasp the space between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262.

[3-1f. Door lower right production unit]
As shown in FIGS. 43 to 50, the door lower right effect unit 270 of the dish unit 200 is disposed on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 220, and rotates according to the gaming state. A spherical door lower right rotator 270A for luminescent decoration is provided. The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the unit base 271 so as to close the escape opening 210g on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and rotatably supports the door lower right rotating body 270A. Door lower right drive motor 272, drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of door lower right drive motor 272, driven gear 274 meshed with drive gear 273 and attached to door lower right rotary body 270A, driven A shaft member 275 that rotatably supports the gear 274 and is attached to the unit base 271.

  The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body 270A from the driven gear 274 and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271 and the door lower right bearing member 276. A base side bearing member 277 that rotatably supports the rotating body 270A on the opposite side of the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271, and the rotation of the door lower right rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting the position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side when viewed from the front of the door lower right rotating body 270A, and a rear side of the unit base 271 and attached to the front surface A door lower right base decorative board 280 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271, A detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decoration board 280, and a door lower right relay board 281 for relaying connection between a door lower rotary body decoration board 291 and a peripheral control board (not shown) to be described later. .

  The lower right door rotator 270A constitutes the outer shell and is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which is hemispherical, and between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are formed with semicircular cutout portions 285a and 286a around the rotation axis, respectively. The front outer shell member 285 has a translucent hemispherical surface, a band decoration 285b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction, and a heart shape disposed at the center of the band decoration 285b. A heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction on a surface of a hemispherical shell having translucency. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear outer shell member 286 are connected.

  48 and 49, the rotating body internal unit 290 includes a disc-shaped door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 provided with a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and the center of the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291. A columnar first fixed shaft member 292 that extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and has a tip attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292 are: A cylindrical shape that is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and has a tip attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. The second fixed shaft member 293. Although not shown, a wiring cord for connecting the door lower right relay board 281 and the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 is inserted into the second fixed shaft member 293.

  Further, the rotating body internal unit 290 is disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and is a flat and annular transparent reflector base 294 attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A morning glory-shaped first reflector 295 which is attached to the reflector base 294 and is open in the axial direction, and is attached to the reflector base 294 through the annular ring of the first reflector 295. And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect light from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of flat ribs extending radially.

  The rotary body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotary body decoration board 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296. They are separated from each other for relative rotation.

  The unit base 271 has a flat ring shape from the annular upper portion 271a disposed on the rear side of the door lower right rotating body 270A and the upper right portion of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a obliquely from the upper right portion when viewed from the front. A first projecting piece 271b projecting in the form of a plate, a second projecting piece 271c projecting in a flat plate shape from a portion opposite to the first projecting piece 271b on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a, and a second projecting piece 271c And a bearing groove 271d into which the tip of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted in a U-shape from the front end toward the rear.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first protruding piece 271b in a state where the rotation shaft penetrates. The driven gear 274 has a larger diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a that is attached to the front end of the first protruding piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the mounting portion 275a. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b, and can support the tip end of the first fixed shaft member 292 in a non-rotatable manner by the inner periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b.

  The rotating body side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-like detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second protruding piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second protruding piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second protruding piece 271c symmetrically across the rotation axis of the door lower right rotator 270A. The two rotation detection sensors 278 have a rotational position in which the heart decoration 285c of the lower right rotating body 270A faces forward (see FIG. 50A) and a rotational position in which the heart decoration 285c faces rearward (FIG. 50B). Can be detected respectively.

  The door lower right effect unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the door lower right rotating body 270A by the door lower right drive motor 272 and stop so that the heart decoration 285c faces forward according to the gaming state. Depending on whether or not, the player can be informed of the arrival of a chance and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, the door lower right effect unit 270 has the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A mounted non-rotatably, so that the door right lower rotating body 270A is rotated while the door right lower rotating body 270A is rotating. When the lower rotating body decorative board 291 (LED thereof) is caused to emit light, the position of light emitted from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 moves as the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 295 Since the direction of light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, the door lower right rotator 270A is illuminated and decorated so that the light is blinking without blinking the LED on the door lower right rotator decoration board 291. Or by irradiating light of various colors from the LED, the lower right rotating body 270A of the door can be illuminated and decorated in rainbow colors, and the player can be entertained.

[3-1 g. Production unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the production unit cover 300 of the dish unit 200 includes a hemispherical and transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical door lower right rotating body 270 </ b> A in the door lower right effect unit 270. The decorative unit 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side when viewed from the front of the dish unit cover 260, and penetrates back and forth on the lower right side of the rotating body cover 301. And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The production unit cover 300 has a translucent shape as a whole with a container shape opened at the rear. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is illuminated and decorated by the lower right door base decorative board 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover section 301 is the dish unit right decorative board 346. Is decorated with luminous.

[3-1h. Upper dish ball removal unit]
As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the through-hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an opening 311a through which the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through hole 210e of the dish unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 that is attached to a position that is upper left in front view, a pressure transmission member 313 that is rotatably supported by the front base member 312, and that rotates by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 239, and a pressure transmission member A first spring member 314 that urges 313 in the direction in which the upper pan ball removal button 239 rises.

  The upper dish ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 so as to close the upper dish ball feeding port 210d of the dish unit base 210 from the rear side, and a rear base member. An upper dish ball removal slider 316 disposed between the plate unit base 315 and the rear base member 315 so as to be movable up and down, and the pressure transmission member 313 is in contact with the upper side from the upper side; And a second spring member 317 that urges the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel with the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and is attached to the cover 311. The front base member 312 and a pair of extensions extending forward from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a. The protruding piece 312b, the shaft support portion 312c recessed in a U-shape from the front end of the extending piece 312b, and the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a are provided, and the rear end of the first spring member 314 is locked. And a hook-like spring locking portion (not shown).

  The pressure transmission member 313 includes a horizontally long cylindrical shaft portion 313a that is rotatably inserted into a pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rearward extension that extends rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape. An upper extension piece 313c that extends upward in the form of a flat plate from the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface of the extension piece 313b and the rear extension piece 313b and can contact the lower end of the extension piece 239c of the upper dish ball removal button 239. A downwardly extending piece 313d extending downward from the right end in front view on the lower surface of the rearward extending piece 313b, and a first spring protruding downward from the lower side of the shaft portion 313a near the left end in front view. And a hook-like spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downwardly extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward as it goes rearward, and its lower end can be brought into contact with the upper dish ball removal slider 316.

  The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the dish unit base 210, and is provided with a base part 315a attached to the dish unit base 210 and spaced from the left and right at the front surface of the base part 315a. A slider support portion 315b that slidably supports the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316, and a front opening at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper tray ball feed port 210d of the tray unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a. An upper entrance 315c that opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and allows game balls to circulate.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 includes a first guide path 315d that extends downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a continuously with the upper inlet 315c, is opened rearward, and has a lower end curved backward. An L-shaped second guide path 315e that extends downward from the lower side of the one guide path 315d and extends leftward in front view, the left end is opened leftward, and the whole is opened rearward; The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat passage cover 315f closing the rear end side of the portion extending to the left in the guide passage 315e and an L-shaped second guide passage 315e. There is provided an opening 315g that penetrates, and a spring locking portion 315h that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and that locks the upper end of the second spring member 317.

  The L-shaped second guide path 315e in the rear base member 315 is inclined such that a portion extending leftward becomes lower as it goes leftward. As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into a notch 210j of a cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210, and the second guide path 315e The lower dish ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

  The upper plate ball removal slider 316 has a flat plate shape, a slider base 316a that is slidably supported by the slider support portion 315b of the rear base member 315, and a dish from the left to the front from the center in front view at the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b that extends to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and can contact the lower end of the lower extension piece 313d of the pressure transmission member 313, and a slider on the lower side of the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c that protrudes rearward from the rear side of the base 316a and a hook-like spring mechanism that protrudes from the front surface of the slider base 316a and that engages the lower end of the second spring member 317. A stop portion 316d.

  In the upper dish ball removal unit 310, the upper inlet 315 c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right side as viewed from the front of the guide passage part 212 a of the upper dish body 212 in the state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be supplied from the upper entrance 315c to the ball feeding unit 540 through the first guide path 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

  Further, when the upper dish ball removal unit 310 presses the upper dish ball removal button 239 downward, the pressing transmission member 313 resists the biasing force of the first spring member 314 by the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239. Then, the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d rotates about the shaft portion 313a in the direction of moving downward. When the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d moves downward as the pressing force transmitting member 313 rotates, the upper piece of ball is removed by the transmission piece 316b of the upper dishball removing slider 316 with which the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d is in contact. The slider 316 slides downward against the urging force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper plate ball removal slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmission unit 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first guide path The 315d side communicates with the second guiding path 315e side. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 are discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper inlet 315c, the first guide path 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second guide path 315e. The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 239 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 316 and the upper dish ball removal button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317, It is possible to return to the original state.

[3-1i. Lower dish ball removal unit]
As shown in FIG. 54 and the like, the lower dish ball removing unit 320 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower dish body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the dish unit cover 260, and the ball of the lower dish body 214. A flat plate-shaped lower dish ball removal base 321 having an opening 321a coinciding with the hole 214a, and a flat slide lid 322 that can slide left and right on the lower plate ball removal base 321 to close the opening 321a. A knob 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front surface of the dish unit cover 260, and a spring biasing the slide lid 322 in a direction to close the opening 321a by the slide lid 322 A member 324, and a holding device 325 that holds the slide lid 322 in a position where the opening 321a is opened against the urging force of the spring member 324; It is provided.

  The opening 321a of the lower dish ball removal base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right from the left and right in the front view. By attaching the lower dish ball removal base 321 to the lower dish body 214, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported between the lower dish ball removal base 321 and the lower dish body 214 in a lateral direction. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322a that is held by a holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

  The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower dish ball removal base 321 and a pair of holding claws 325b that protrude from the main body 325a so as to be openable and closable and can hold the holding protrusion 322a. When the holding protrusion 322a is inserted between the pair of open holding claws 325a and pressed toward the main body 325a, the holding device 325 closes the pair of holding claws 325b to hold the holding protrusion 322a and The nail 325b is kept closed. In this state, when the holding protrusion 322a is moved toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325a are opened, and the holding protrusion 322a is released.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 320 has a slide lid 322 between the opening 321a and the ball removal hole 214a of the lower dish body 214 in a state where the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right in the front view. Thus, the game balls in the lower plate 202 do not come out downward from the ball release holes 214a, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 202.

  From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower plate 202 passes through the ball removal hole 214a and the opening 321a and can be pulled out below the plate unit 200, and the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be extracted. At this time, since the holding protrusion 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even when the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can continue to pull out the game balls inside.

  To close the slide lid 322, when the knob 323 is slightly operated to the left side, the pair of holding claws 325b are opened, the holding projection 322a is released, and the slide lid 322 slides to the right side by the biasing force of the spring member 324. Then, the ball removal hole 214a is closed. In this manner, by operating the knob 323 of the lower dish ball removing unit 320, the game balls can be stored in the lower dish 202, or the game balls stored in the lower dish 202 can be extracted.

[3-1j. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 330 of the dish unit 200 includes, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, etc., a unit case 331 which is attached to the upper surface near the right end in front view of the rendering operation unit 220 and has translucency. A ball rental button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by the player; a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the ball rental button 332 and operable by the player; And a display unit 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the return button 333.

  When the ball lending operation unit 330 pushes a ball lending button 332 after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, the ball lending operation unit 330 receives a predetermined number of game balls. 200 can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 201, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion and the prepaid card are returned after being drawn. In addition, the display unit 334 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, or an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-1k. Top plate top decorative member]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the upper dish top decorative member 340 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the left and right center of the upper end of the dish unit base 210 and has a light-transmitting upper dish top lens. 340a and an upper plate top decorative board 340b attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  The upper dish top decoration member 340 can cause the upper dish top lens 340a to emit light in a band shape by causing the LED of the upper dish top decoration substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper plate top decoration member 340 is disposed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 220, the upper plate top decoration member is similar to the light emission decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, the linear light emitting lens member 237, and the like. By lighting 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the production operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the production presented by the production operation unit 220 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating. be able to.

[3-1l. Characteristic effects of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 according to the present embodiment has a game ball in the game area 5a on the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 having the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a. When an image is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in accordance with the gaming state that is changed by driving in, a belt-like shape is formed along the outer peripheral edge of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 on the side close to the game area 5a. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper dish decoration member 236, the upper dish decoration member 340, and the like can emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (view) It is possible to notice light from the outside of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and to attract the player's line of sight (interest) to the linear light emitting lens member 237, that is, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 side. Can. Accordingly, in the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, when presenting an effect such as an image according to the game state, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, so that the player uses the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 to emit light. The presentation of the effect can be noticed, and the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, since the dish unit 200 includes the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the gaming state, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed, the dish unit 200 is disposed outside the gaming area 5a. Since the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is used to indicate the arrival of a chance, a game in the game area 5a and an effect on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a are given to the player. Both can be cared about. Therefore, by making the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (the upper liquid crystal display device 244) care, it is possible to entertain a tight game with a sense of speed and reduce the interest of the player. In addition, when displaying an image suggesting the arrival of an opportunity on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, thereby causing the player to make the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 emit light. It is possible to attract attention and to make the player entertained by surely recognizing the arrival of the opportunity. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside and outside of the game area 5a may be concerned, so that the player may not be able to concentrate on both, and the interest may be reduced. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in response to the arrival), the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be concentrated in the game area 5a until the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light, and the game in the game area 5a can be enjoyed. In addition, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, it is possible to entertain the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and to make the game sharp and hard to get tired.

  In addition, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging to the player side below the game area 5a, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is disposed at a position close to the player. Become. This makes it easier for the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1 to hide the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and makes it difficult for other players to see the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 next to or behind. An effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to reduce the feeling of being uncomfortable by being looked at by other players and to reduce the interest, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light when presenting an effect by 244, it is possible to make it difficult to overlook the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous than the case where light is emitted in a dotted manner, and the player Even if the consciousness is concentrated in the game area 5a, it is possible to easily notice the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237, etc. It can suppress that it falls. Further, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in a band shape, it becomes a light-emission mode different from light emission of other light-emitting decorative bodies, and can be reduced from being mistaken for light emission of the light-emitting decorative bodies, The light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be surely noticed.

  In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at the rear position close to the game area 5a in the outer peripheral edge of the upper liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, Light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can easily enter the player's field of view, and the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be noticed and the production of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed.

  In addition, the production unit 200 having the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 is placed in the game area 5a. Since the player for confirming the amount of game balls to be turned turns the line of sight at a certain frequency, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237, etc. It becomes easy to enter the field of view and it becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player directs his / her line of sight to the upper plate 201 at a certain frequency, it is easy to direct his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the upper plate 201 (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244). Accordingly, when the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately transferred to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the presentation presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the effect operation unit 220 is arranged below the game area 5a, and the player is irradiated with light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like from below, so that it is arranged above the game area 5a. Compared to the above, it is easy for the player to get into the eyes, and it is possible to easily notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and the player can be surely paid attention to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the operation unit 220 entertain.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit 220 (top plate liquid crystal display device 244) is arranged at a position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, the center of the player's line of sight is in any position in the game area 5a. However, the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the player can be surely noticed by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the production by the production operation unit 220 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that interest falls.

  In addition, since the production operation unit 220 is provided with the touch panel 246, in addition to the production by the image, the production can be performed by causing the player to operate the touch panel 246. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, it is possible to participate in the production, and it is possible to actively entertain the production for the player and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (linear light emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B transfers the game ball in the upper plate 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball launching device 680). An upper dish ball removal button 239 for operating the upper dish ball removal unit 310 is disposed between the guide passage section 212a and the guide passage section 212a. In other words, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of a place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position that the player cares about even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, the player's interest is attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (the effect image by the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246 The timing of the touch operation, etc.) can be easily noticed.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the upper surface of the upper lower plate covering portion 262 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. Since the waterproof seal 248 is affixed to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B, the upper plate 201 touches the outside air on the upper plate body 212 or the surface of the game ball. Even if condensed water (water droplets) flows below the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems in

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, since the post-upper decorative board 235 for decorating the post-upper decorative member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200, when the touch unit 220B having the touch panel 246 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibration device 242, a plurality of (two) touch units 220B are provided. Since it is attached to the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A with the damper 222 interposed therebetween, the vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibration device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. Thus, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Accordingly, when the touch unit 220B of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, if the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242, only the touch unit 220B vibrates, so that the player can touch the touch panel of the touch unit 220B. The operation feeling of H.246 can be sufficiently provided, and the player can enjoy the touch operation of the touch panel 246 to suppress the interest from being lowered.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibration device 242, in addition to the operational feeling of the touch panel 246, the player is surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B, or the timing of operating the touch panel 246 is suggested. It is possible to entertain an operation effect by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 from the lower side, even if an impact or a load is applied to the touch unit 220B by hitting or pressing the touch unit 220B from the upper side, the damper 222 Since it is possible to absorb the impact, etc., it is possible to reduce the damage of the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A, etc. due to the impact, etc., and the game is interrupted by the damage of the touch unit 220B, etc. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the touch panel 246 is operated by the touch unit 220B, the player touches the touch panel 246 for a longer time than when the player presses the button. When the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242 when the 246 is touched, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, since the player can feel that the touch panel 246 is operated by vibrating the player's finger, a sufficient operational feeling can be given, and the player can enjoy operating the touch panel 246. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, by changing the image displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it becomes possible to deal with various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with a variety of performances and to reduce interest. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B includes the touch panel 246, compared to the conventional push button, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and touch Various operations such as holding can be performed. Thereby, more various operation effects can be performed and it can suppress that a player is entertained and an interest falls.

  Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A (unit case 231) so as not to move upward and to move downward. The touch unit 220B is elastically (biased) by a plurality of dampers 222. Is pressed against the upper moving end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move during the operation of the touch panel 246, and the operation of the touch panel 246 can be easily performed accurately. Further, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it is possible to make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B that was thought not to move does not vibrate according to the gaming state. The player can be surprised by vibrating with the device 242, and the player can be prevented from being entertained and the interest is reduced.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibration device 242 at a position close to the part operated by the player on the touch panel 246, it is strong. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates a position different from the position to be operated on the touch panel 246, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is informed that the operation is wrong. It is possible to allow the player to perform a correct operation, and it is possible to entertain an operation effect using the touch panel 246 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon can be generated at an arbitrary position on the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of vibration of each vibration device 242. Can do. Therefore, by controlling each vibration device 242 so that a resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further operational feeling or greatly surprise the player, It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed and an impact or a load acts on the touch unit 220B, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. For this reason, the shock from the upper side or the like can be absorbed (attenuated) to some extent by the bending of the damper 222 and the touch unit 220B and transmitted to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, an impact or load from the touch unit 220 </ b> B side via the unit case 231 is applied to the mounting base 230. Can be widely dispersed and transmitted. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e projecting downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c in which the receiving projection 231e is inserted on the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230. Since a gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall and the unit case 231 bends downward due to an impact or load from the touch unit 220B, the receiving projection 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other. Thus, an impact or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the impact or the like is transmitted to the mounting base 230 in a state further attenuated by the bending of the unit case 231. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving protruding portion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other, the receiving projection 231e (unit case) 231) The impact, load, etc. from the side are transmitted in an oblique direction with respect to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. As a result, the force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward) that causes the mounting base 230 to bend is reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed, the impacts and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230. The attachment base unit 220A can be prevented from being damaged.

[3-2. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. FIG. 55A is a perspective view of the door frame foul cover unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back with the lid member removed. FIG. 57 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 520 of the present embodiment is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the front side of the unit main body 522 and a shallow box-like unit main body 522 that is open on the front side. A flat lid member 524. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and passes through the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. A full sphere receiving port 528 that opens toward the rear on the right side of the front sphere passage 526 in the front view and communicates with the full guide path 862 of the lower full sphere route unit 860 of the main body frame 4; It has.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is opened upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 528 when viewed from the front, and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 530 for receiving a game ball (foul ball), and a game ball received in the full tank receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 that are opened forward in the lower right corner when viewed from the front are released. And a ball discharge port 532 communicating with the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is formed between the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 and the ball discharge port 532 by the unit main body 522 and the lid member 524, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 533 having a possible width, a plate-shaped movable piece 534 constituting a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 533 and having a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 522, and a movable A full tank detection sensor 535 that detects the rotation of the piece 534 away from the storage passage 533 and a spring 536 that biases the movable piece 534 toward the center of the storage passage 533 are provided.

  The foul cover unit 520 has a certain amount in the storage passage 533 when the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is filled with game balls and the game balls are not released from the ball discharge port 532 to the lower plate 202 side. The number of game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the movable piece 534 rotates so that the upper end of the movable piece 534 moves away from the storage passage 533 due to the weight of the game ball, The rotation is detected by a full tank detection sensor 535. Thereby, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls, when full tank detection is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535, payout of further game balls is stopped, This can be notified to a player, a staff member of the game hall, or the like, and urged to eliminate the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 520 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 522 and below the through ball passage 526, and the guide path opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 537 with which the operation protrusion 863e of 863 can contact is provided (see FIG. 80). The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operation protrusion 863 e of the guide path opening / closing door 863 contacts. When the operating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 537, the guideway opening / closing door 863 rotates to downstream ends (front opening) of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862. ) Can be opened.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 59 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame exploded for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame exploded for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, respectively, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. .

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; A locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out a game ball to the player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a main body attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be opened and closed. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 58 to 61, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangle whose front view extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion slot 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, A game board placement part 602 that forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 602 and is located at the left and right of the lower end of the game board 5 And a game board restricting portion 603 for restricting rearward movement.

  Further, the main body frame 4 includes a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting a ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 as viewed from the front, and a front-rear side of the launching device mounting portion 604 on the right side when viewed from the front. And the cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted and the bass speaker of the board unit 900 that penetrates back and forth from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 to the lower left side. And a circular speaker opening 607 that penetrates forward and backward on the lower left side in front view of the game board mounting portion 602 and faces the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 to the front. And.

  Furthermore, the main body frame 4 extends in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 601 to the rear, and the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is attached to the rear end to be rotatable. The rear extension part 608 is provided. The main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends at the left end of the front view on the rear surface, and an upper hinge mounting portion 609 and a lower hinge for mounting the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. A mounting portion 610 is provided.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be opened and closed, and to be pivoted to a position slightly below the left side of the front and right center of the game board mounting portion 602, And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 601.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attaching portion 609 and the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

  The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent downward in an L-shape, and projects upward in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The main body frame upper hinge pin 622 that is pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the upper hinge main body 621 pass through the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 when viewed from the front, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is pivotally supported. And an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the main body frame 4 at a portion bent downward in the upper hinge main body 621.

  The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. A lower hinge hole for outer frame (not shown) pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641 The rear part of the plate-like plate material is bent upward in an L shape and penetrates the lower hinge second main body 643 and the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 up and down, and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 is passed through. A door frame lower hinge hole 644 for axial support, and a door frame extending upward from the left end on the rear side of the door frame lower hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a regulating piece 645 for regulating the rotation range of 3. .

  The lower hinge second body 643 is configured such that a horizontally extending portion is spaced upward from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 that extends horizontally, and a portion bent upward is a lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the portion bent upward of the main body 641. The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame 4 at a portion bent upward from the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and downward behind the portion extending rightward from the front end. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 and enter the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58, 60 and 61. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In the ball launching device 680, the game ball driving strength changes according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is attached to the rear launching surface 681 of the flat plate-like launching base 681 attached to the launching device attaching portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and the launching base 681 on the rear surface in the front view. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a ball striking rod 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and a slanting upper left extension from the vicinity of the tip of the ball striking rod 683 And a launch rail 684 attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 and capable of rolling a game ball.

  In this ball launcher 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and a game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. When the handle lever 504 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with the strength corresponding to the turning angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting ball 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hit ball 683 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  If the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the game ball, the space between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). From the lower foul cover unit 520 to the foul ball receiving port 530, passes through the foul cover unit 520, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically. The locking unit 700 protrudes forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 protruding rearward from the unit base 701 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and a columnar shape protruding forward from the lower part of the unit base 701 from the front side And a key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the door frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703 according to the rotation direction of the inserted unlocking key.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 73. 62 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from behind. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the rear. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 68 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as seen from behind. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the front, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 71A is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 71B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. FIG. 72A is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 72B is an illustration showing a state in which the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. It is. FIG. 73 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, a portion of the payout blade in the payout device.

  Fig. 74 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 75 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 76 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 76 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full ball path unit as seen from the back. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 79A is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full sphere path unit, and FIG. 79B is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is opened. . FIG. 80 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. FIG. 81 is an explanatory view showing a guideway opening / closing door according to an embodiment different from those shown in FIGS. 76 to 80. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and an upper portion of the payout unit base 801. The tank tank 802 stores a game ball supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape that is open to the left and right and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. And a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 leftward as viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two rows in the front and rear directions by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 82) that hangs down from above.

  The payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 on the upper left side when viewed from the front, and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 which is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board housed in the payout control board box 950; It is equipped with. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, game balls circulate in two rows, and from the payout device 830, game balls are paid out one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls on the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. A normal guiding path 861 for guiding the game ball forward from the front end to the through-ball passage 526 of the door frame 3, and guiding the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e forward to the door frame 3 from the front end. A full frame guiding path 862 for guiding to the full tank receiving port 528, and the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are arranged on the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has a rear side open, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has a front side open, and a front case 821 and the rear case 822, and a flat partition plate 823 that partitions the front case 821 and the rear case 822. The front and rear ends of the partition plate 823 penetrate the front case 821 and the rear case 822. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 that is attached, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and a movable piece member rear 826 that are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and are disposed in the front case and the rear case, respectively. The ball breakage detection sensor 827 is mounted in the front case 821 and can detect the rotational position of the pair of movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826.

  The front case 821 has a ball guide inlet 821a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that opens at a position to the right of the bottom center in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through. 821b, and a ball guide inlet 821a and a ball guide outlet 821b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 821c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 821c includes an introduction portion 821d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. The detection portion 821e extends straight down to the vicinity, and the meandering portion 821f extending in a meandering manner from the detection portion 821d to the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 includes a notch 821g on the right side wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 includes a ball guide inlet 822a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that is opened at a position to the right of the bottom center in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through. 822b, a ball guide inlet 822a and a ball guide outlet 822b, and a guide passage 822c through which a game ball can flow. The guide passage 822c includes an introduction portion 822d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. The detection unit 822e extends straight down to the vicinity, and the meandering unit 822f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822d to the left and right widths of the rear case 822. The rear case 822 includes a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection unit 822e in the guide passage 822c.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and is formed so that the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c coincide with each other in a state where the ball guide unit 820 is assembled. Yes.

  The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b penetrating forward and backward at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a. An extension portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle to the right surface of the movable piece 825a, and connecting the extension portion 825c and the movable piece 825a, extends in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and the upper portion of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f that extends outward from the right-hand tip and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the movable piece member front 825 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 825b, the weight attaching portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from rotating further in the direction protruding into the guide passage 821c (left direction in front view). Further, when the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guide passage 821c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b penetrating forward and rearward at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and a movable piece 826a. The extension portion 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d and the upper portion of the extending portion 826c, and a through hole extending in the front-rear direction, The detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end to the outside and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and extends from the position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d to the outside in the form of a flat plate. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the movable piece member rear 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch 822g of the rear case 822, and the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance path 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). Further, when the movable piece member front 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 826a is moved toward the guide passage 822c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f in front of the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a line in the front and back by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case in a state where the plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. By 822, it is possible to guide to the lower dispensing device 830 in two rows before and after (see FIG. 82). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are partitioned by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and flow well. Can do.

  Further, when the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guide unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f before the movable piece member 825 and the detection piece 825f and 826f after the movable piece member 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball break detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  When the game ball is paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c flow downstream. When a game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is increased, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It bounces back to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the abutment of the game ball, the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust, dirt, and the like, and the movable pieces 825 and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight or the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826, respectively, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 825 are movable. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f after the single member 826 is detected by one single ball break detection sensor 827, when there is no game ball in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c, the front of the movable piece 825 Alternatively, the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece rear 826 are rotated so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball is lost are detected by the ball break detection sensor 827. . Therefore, since it is possible to detect a shortage of the game ball at an early stage, it is possible to quickly replenish the game ball and shorten the time when the game is interrupted as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the weight of the movable piece member front 825, the movable piece member rear 826, and the weight is obtained by screwing and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attaching portions 825e, 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. Thus, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of protruding into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment has the movable piece front 825 and the movable pieces 825a and 826a behind the movable piece member 826 projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow due to their own weight. By attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece 825a can be changed depending on the weight of the movable piece member 825 and the movable piece member 826 by its own weight and the weight. 826a can be easily rotated (protruded) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passage 822c and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be obtained. Or the like does not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. The movable pieces 825a and 826 (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes, the weight is not affected even if the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are rotated frequently. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 (the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e) are not detached from each other, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time. . Moreover, since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost associated with the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the guide passages 821c and 822c are provided with an introduction portion 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 825c on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 825c protrude to the inside. As the game ball flows in the passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust or dirt that is sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front piece 825 and the rear piece 826 of the movable piece can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be rotated well, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be detected reliably, and the game ball It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to erroneous detection or the like. In addition, even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a. The game ball can be replenished to the player, and the time at which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
A payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 73. The payout device 830 has a box shape with the rear side open, a payout entrance 831a that is open to allow the game ball to pass in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and an opening that allows the game ball to pass near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 831b, a ball outlet 831c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout passage 831d through which the payout inlet 831a and the payout outlet 831b communicate with each other. , And a front box 831 having a ball discharge passage 831e which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 831c and through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-like opening that is open at the front side, a payout entrance 832a that is open to allow the game ball to pass through in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, A payout outlet 832b that is open to allow passage, a ball outlet 832c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout inlet 832a and a payout outlet 832b that are connected to each other. A possible payout path 832d and a back box 832 having a ball discharge path 832e branched from the middle of the payout path 832d and communicating with the ball discharge outlet 832c and allowing game balls to flow therethrough.

  The payout device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-like front cover 833 that is open on the rear side, and is attached to the front box 831 so that the rotary shaft passes through the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshing with the front box 831 and the front cover 833 are rotatable. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 penetrates rotatably, the front end is attached to the front cover 833, and the rear A shaft member 838 whose end passes through the front box 831 and is attached to the back box 832, and is rotatably attached through the shaft member 837, and the front box 831 and the back box 832 Discharge vanes 839 that are disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotate integrally with the driven gear 837, and blade rotation detection sensors 840 that are attached between the front box 831 and the back box 832 and detect the rotation of the discharge vanes 839. And.

  Further, the payout device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the back box 832, and has a flat partition plate 841 that partitions the payout path 831 d of the front box 831 and the payout path 832 d of the back box 832, and the front box 831. , A back box 832, a payout detection sensor 842 that detects a game ball discharged by the rotation of the payout vane 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831 b, 832 b, payout passages 831 d, 832 d, and a ball discharge passage 831e, 832e is a portion where the front box 831 and the back box 832 are pivotally attached at a portion where the branch box 831e, 832e is branched, and a ball removal movable piece 843 capable of closing the ball removal passages 831e, 832e, the front box 831 and the back A ball removal lever 844 that is slidably attached to the upper part of the right side of the box 832 in a front view so that the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated or cannot be rotated; It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right as viewed from the front so as to go from the payout inlet 831a to the ball outlet 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so as to extend vertically and bends substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the front box 831 from the left end. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the front box 831, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. Dispensing vanes 839 are arranged in the portion of the dispensing passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831e further extends a portion extending obliquely from the discharge inlet 831a to the lower right in the discharge passage 831d, and is about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward in a portion extending vertically toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d. And a lever attachment portion 831g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the back box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right as viewed from the front so as to go from the payout inlet 832a to the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the back box 832. After being bent so as to extend vertically to the left and approximately horizontally to the left in the vicinity of the center of the total height, it extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right widths of the back box 832. It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about ¼ from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the back box 832. Dispensing blades 839 are arranged at portions of the dispensing passage 832d that are bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 832e further extends a portion of the payout passage 832d that extends obliquely from the payout entrance 832a to the lower right. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the back box 832 is formed on the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 832f protruding forward as it goes downward in a portion extending vertically toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d. And a lever attachment portion 832g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The discharge passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the back box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream side of the portion where the payout vanes 839 are arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. That is, the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 832d of the back box 832 are moved forward and backward between the front box 831 and the back box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 is a spur gear-like gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and projects radially from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angular interval of 60 degrees, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the center of the gear portion 837a to the rear and has an unevenness on the peripheral surface of the rear end and can be connected to the discharge vane 839. .

  The discharge vane 839 extends in a cylindrical shape in the front and rear direction, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a at a constant interval from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a. The plurality of (three) front blades 839b and the front blades 839b from the rear end of the base tube portion 839a are alternately projected in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tube portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. 3) Rear blade 839c, and a connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a cylindrical shape and has concavities and convexities that can be connected to the connecting portion 387c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  Three front blades 839b and three rear blades 839c of the discharge blade 839 are provided at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blades 839c are arranged around the front blades 839b so as to be staggered. It is offset outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction and extends outward. The payout blade 839 of the present embodiment is connected by a circular arc that is recessed toward the center between the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), and the diameter of the circular arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  Further, the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c are formed such that the outer diameter D1 of the base cylinder portion 839a is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the diameter D2 around the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (sphere housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blade 839c). Is formed approximately 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 73). That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1-0. It is supposed to be 4 times.

  Therefore, it is possible to hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer periphery of the game ball by the arc portion (the ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. Thereby, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (the ball housing portion 839e).

  In the state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment has the front blade 839b located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c located in the dispensing passage 832d of the back box 832. The game balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. Further, the payout vanes 839 are arranged at portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height of the front case 821 and the back box 832. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout blade 839 is located immediately below a portion extending vertically downward from the center of the entire height of the front case 821 and the back box 832. In the portion of the discharge passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the discharge blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the discharge blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in a circular arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 62). In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  As a result, the payout device 830 can pass through the portion of the payout passages 831d and 832d bent in a crank shape when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 abuts the outer periphery of the front blades 839b and 839c. Therefore, it is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, the game ball moves along with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the portion bent in the crank shape of the payout passages 831d and 832d, from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Released downwards.

  In the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball housing portion 839e has a diameter 1 of the game ball. Since the depth of / 7 to ¼ is accommodated, the time required to accommodate the game ball can be shortened while reducing the outer diameter of the payout vane 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated rapidly, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Accordingly, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required for paying out game balls can be shortened.

  The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front / rear direction, and a lower portion is bent to form a body shape in a front view, and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front / rear direction at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A shaft tube portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the back box 832 respectively, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper portion of the outer surface bent in a square shape of the main body portion 843a, and a main body portion 843c A weight attaching portion 843d (see FIG. 72) including a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction in a lower portion bent in a square shape.

  In the state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower portion of the main body portion 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the upper cylindrical tube portion 843b is disposed to disengage the front box 831 and the back box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position that extends obliquely from the pay-out entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view, and slightly outside the wall on the right in the front view that is slightly above the part that is bent downward Installed on.

  In the normal state, the payout device 830 of the present embodiment is configured such that the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 contacts the protrusion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843 from the right side in front view. Touching. As a result, the ball removal movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 72A).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a bent in the shape of a square of the ball extraction movable piece 843, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. It extends to. And the lower end of the main-body part 843a is located in the vicinity of the site | part which the payout channel | paths 831d and 832d and the ball extraction channel | paths 831e and 832e branch. Therefore, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a part of the wall of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The ball removal movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball removal movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front acts on the anti-clockwise rotation by the ball removal lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball removal lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 moves away from the protruding portion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843, and the ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Movement restrictions are lifted. Accordingly, the ball-moving movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the shaft tube portion 843b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a comes into contact with the left surfaces of the members forming the right side surfaces of the front box 831 and the back box 832. (See FIG. 61 (b)). Accordingly, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game ball that has entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a comes into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removal movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removal passages 831e and 832e and is released downward from the ball removal outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball removal movable piece 843 includes the weight attachment portion 843d, the ball attachment lever 844d is slid upward by screwing and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attachment portion 843d. Thus, when the restriction of counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball removal passages 381e and 832e by the weight of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It is possible to facilitate rotation in a direction (counterclockwise in a front view).

  Further, in a normal state where the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, a game ball that has entered from the payout inlets 831a and 832a enters the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Accordingly, dust or dirt sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removal movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate by biting or dust.

  Further, since a metal screw as a weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portion 843d that is a through hole, the weight is removed from the ball-moving movable piece 843 even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state over a long period of time without being disengaged from the (weight attaching portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. The cost which concerns on can be reduced.

  By the way, if the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removal movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotation shaft of the ball removal movable piece 843 or the rotation shaft rusts, and the ball The extraction movable piece 843 may become difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Therefore, the ball removal passage 831e is formed by the ball removal movable piece 843. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, so that the impact of the contact The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removal lever 844 is operated to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated favorably, so that the game ball can be removed with certainty. The workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to a position below the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full base 851 whose rear side is opened, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full base 851 and has its front side opened. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a discharge device pressing member 853 which is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and can press the discharge device 830 upward are provided.

  Further, the upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward so that a game ball can pass through from the left and right center to the left when viewed from the front, and the right and left from the center when viewed from the front and from the center. Is formed between the upper full base 851 and the upper full cover 852 which are opened upward so that game balls can pass therethrough and received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c having a predetermined size for the game balls to circulate, a normal discharge port 850d opened downward at a position immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and an upper sphere storage A full tank discharge port 850e opening downward at a portion excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d and a full tank discharge port 850e And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  The upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball passage 850g that guides a game ball that has entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and an upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. A ball outlet 850h. The upper full sphere path unit 850 has a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball discharge outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side when viewed from the front and opened downward. The upper full ball path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full base 851.

  In the state where the upper full ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlet 831b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball discharge inlet 850b is It is located directly under the ball outlet 831c of the dispensing device 830. Further, the upper full sphere path unit 850 is assembled in the dispensing unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are the normal guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860. 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower bulb guide path 865 are respectively opened immediately above the rear end openings (see FIG. 82).

  In the upper full tank path unit 850, the game balls that have been paid out by the payout device 830 and released downward from the payout outlet 831b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball that has entered the upper sphere storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is opened directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. The normal discharge port 850d is discharged.

  When the inside of the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls, the game balls cannot be stored, and when the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is closed. In this state, when a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game ball stored on the upper side of the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the partition piece 850f, the game ball newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c gets over the partition piece 850f and becomes full. It will be discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850e and sent to the lower plate 202 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860.

  As described above, the upper full-ball path unit 850 automatically drops the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 201 according to the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 202.

[4-6d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full sphere path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full path path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full-ball path unit 860 guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full-ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through-ball path 526 of the door frame 3. A full tank guide path 862 that guides the game balls released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides the game balls from the front end to the full tank reception port 528 of the door frame 3; A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal path 861 and the full tank guideway 862. And a closing spring 864 biasing in a direction to close the front end opening.

  Further, the lower full ball path unit 860 guides the game ball released from the upper ball exit 850h of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward, and moves on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900 from the center right end in the front-rear direction. And a lower ball extraction guide path 865 for discharging to the bottom.

  In the lower full ball path unit 860, a normal guide path 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 have rear ends that open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right sides, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full tank guide path 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guide path 861. As shown in the drawing, the normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided vertically.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867 and is rotated clockwise by a closing spring 864. It is energized. More specifically, a full tank guide path 862 that opens to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860 is one game for the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a position lower by the height of the sphere. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and to the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-like base portion 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends obliquely from the base portion 863a to the upper left side and that can close the front end opening of the normal guideway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending rightward from the base portion 863a and closing the front end opening of the full guide path 862, and an extending portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a obliquely to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. And an operating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extending portion 863d and can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings, and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass. The operating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape with the base 863a as the center when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863 c is located from below the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By contacting the boss portion 867a protruding forward, the clockwise rotation is restricted.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, and the front end of the through ball path 526, the full tank reception port 528, and the door opening / closing door in the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is provided. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 537 (see FIG. 80). Since the guide path opening / closing door 863 is not in contact with the operating protrusion 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guide path opening / closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. Thus, the second door plate portion 863c is stopped in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are positioned in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 79). (See (a)). Accordingly, in this state, the game balls in the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding are not performed. Game balls will not spill from the road 862.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operation protrusion 863e of the guide path opening / closing door 863, and the operation is performed. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force acts to rotate the guide path opening / closing door 863 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c, which have closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861 In addition, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 79B). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate portion 863b is positioned below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is positioned above the front end opening of the full tank guide passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are filled. A through ball passage 526 and a full tank reception port 528 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide passage 862. A game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 526 and the full tank receiving port 528 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made by turning the guideway opening / closing door 863. Since opening and closing is performed, the operation range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full-way guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  The payout unit 800 of the present embodiment has a larger number of game balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 201. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls. When a game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guiding path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it will circulate to the full tank outlet 850e side, and the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 from the full tank outlet 850e, The payout of game balls to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 520 is automatically switched. Thereafter, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls in addition to the upper plate 201 and cannot be supplied to the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 520 is provided. Game balls are stored in the storage passage 533. And when the movable piece 534 rotates and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535 by storing the game ball in the storage passage 533, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full of game balls. And the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is released.

  Note that the stop of the game ball payout by the payout device 830 relative to the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 534 is detected in the storage passage 533 of the foul cover unit 520. In such a state, the number can be filled in the storage passage 533 on the upstream side, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860, and the upper ball storage path 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, it is possible to store more game balls than conventional pachinko machines. Therefore, in a gaming state where a lot of game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are released by the payout of the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being filled with game balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on the big hit game and have fun.

  Thus, in the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more game balls can be stored in the upper full ball path unit 850 and the lower full ball path unit 860 than in the conventional pachinko machine. When a large number of game balls are stored in the upper full ball path unit 850 and the lower full ball path unit 860 when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the frame 4, the load of these game balls is normally guided. This greatly acts on the guideway opening / closing door 863 closing the front end opening of the road 861 and the full tank guideway 862, and the guideway opening / closing door 863 may be easily damaged. Therefore, the guideway opening / closing door 870 of the embodiment as shown in FIG. 81 may be used.

  A guide path opening / closing door 870 shown in FIG. 81 has a disc-shaped base portion 870a that is rotatably attached, and a first door that extends obliquely from the base portion 870a to the upper left side and that can close the front end opening of the normal guide path 861. A plate portion 870b, a second door plate portion 870c extending rightward from the base portion 870a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full guide path 862, and an extension extending obliquely from the base portion 870a to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. A protruding portion (not shown) and an operating protrusion 870e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extending portion and can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3. ing. In addition, the guideway opening / closing door 870 includes a plurality of recesses 870 into which a part of the game ball fits on the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c.

  The rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c of the guideway opening / closing door 870 are inclined so as to move backward as the distance from the base portion 870a increases, as illustrated. Therefore, when the game ball that has rolled forward in the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 contacts the rear surface of the first door plate portion 870b or the second door plate portion 870c, the inclination of the rear surface causes It will roll to the base part 870a side, and the game ball stored in the normal guiding path 861 or the full tank guiding path 862 can be brought close to the base part 870a side. Thereby, the load of the game ball stored in the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 is applied to the base portion 870a attached to the lower case 867 in the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c. Since it acts at a close position, the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c can be made difficult to be deformed, and the guideway opening / closing door 870 is hardly damaged and durability can be enhanced.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the plurality of recesses 870d of the guideway opening / closing door 870 are held at the positions where the game balls approach the base 870a side on the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c. Are arranged as follows. As a result, the game ball that has circulated in the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 is fitted into the recess 870d, so that the game ball can be surely moved to the base 870a side, and the same as described above. An effect can be produced.

  Although not shown, the recess 870d extends in an arc shape with the base 870a as the center so that the guideway opening / closing door 870 can rotate even when a game ball is fitted.

  In this case, it is desirable that the left and right widths W of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 be different from an integral multiple of the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls abutting on the rear side with respect to the game balls brought closer to the base 870a side by the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c are the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path. If it is in contact with the inner walls on the left and right outer sides of 862, the direction of the load acting from the rear game ball is directed obliquely forward toward the base portion 870a side, and to the base portion 870a side attached to the lower case 867 A large amount of load can be applied, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably exhibited.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910. Speaker unit 920, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear right side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and has interface control inside. Interface control board box 940 in which a board is accommodated, and a payout control board box that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and contains a payout control board that controls the dispensing of game balls. 950.

  The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board accommodated in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 83 to FIG. FIG. 83 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the left front. FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from behind. Further, FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main structure, and FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear after being disassembled for each main structure. FIG. 89 is a perspective view seen from the front showing only the front structural member and the game panel in the game board, and FIG. 90 is a perspective view seen from the rear showing only the front structural member and the game panel in the game board.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is driven when a player operates a handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. In addition, the game board 5 has a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape that is substantially rectangular when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. A board-like gaming panel 1100 to be partitioned, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by driving a game ball into the gaming area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel 1100 A central liquid crystal display device 1500 attached to the rear side so as to be visible from the front side, a peripheral control unit 1600 attached to the rear side of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

  The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open are different from the plurality of general winning holes 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start opening 2002 that is always open to accept a game ball, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a to detect the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received in accordance with the normal lottery result lottered and the first lot selected by receiving the game balls into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 In accordance with the special lottery result or the second special lottery result, there is provided a lower major prize opening 2005 and an upper major prize opening 2006 that allow the reception of game balls.

  In addition, a starter unit 2100 having a first starter port 2002 that is attached right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and an inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starter port unit 2100 in front view. A side unit 2200 having a plurality of general winning ports 2001 and a right general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, and a second starting port that are mounted to the right of the starting port unit 2100. 2004 and an attacker unit 2300 having a lower prize-winning opening 2005, and a frame shape having an upper prize-winning opening 2006 attached above the starter opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2300. The center role 2500 is provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like back box 3010 that is open at the front, and a lock for removably attaching the central liquid crystal display device 1500 to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A mechanism 3020, a lower left ball passage unit 3030 attached near the lower left front end of the back box 3010, and a right lower ball passage unit 3040 attached near the lower right front end of the back box 3010 are provided.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a lamp drive board 3060 attached to the rear side of the opening 3010a on the rear face of the back box 3010, a lamp drive board cover 3061 covering the back of the lamp drive board 3060, and the back box 3010. A motor drive board 3062 attached below the opening 3010a in the rear view on the rear surface, a motor drive board cover 3063 covering the back of the motor drive board 3062, and a rear face on the rear box 3010 attached to the lower left corner in the rear view. Panel relay substrate 3064.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back peripheral decoration unit 3080 attached along the upper and left sides at the front end of the back box 3010, and a back movable production unit attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. 3100, a back bottom front movable effect unit 3200 attached below the opening 3010a in the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010, and a back right movable effect attached in the back box 3010 to the right of the opening 3010a. The unit 3300, the back left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a and behind the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 Moveable directing unit 3500 after the back, and the movable back directing unit 3100 within the back box 3010 and moveable after the back A back corners movable direction unit 3600 attached to the respective left and right sides of the output unit 3500, and a.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001, and a stop portion 1006 with which a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 contacts is provided. The stop portion 1006 functions as a buffer member that relaxes and softens the momentum of the game ball that is driven into the game area 5a, and is formed of rubber or the like in this example. The material of the stopper 1006 is not limited to rubber as long as it functions as a buffer member.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 formed with a transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. The panel plate 1110 has a plurality of attachment ports 1112 (see FIG. 89, FIG. 90, etc.) penetrating forward and backward to attach the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 holds the panel plate 1110 so as to be detachable from the rear side. The panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes and positioning holes for mounting the back unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  In a state where the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a can be guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guiding unit 1003 and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side when assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and formed on the bottom surface. The discharged portion 1201 (see FIG. 87) can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board (not shown) for controlling game contents, game ball payout, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board and is attached to the board holder 1200. I have.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by looking at the opening and closing traces, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against unauthorized actions on the main control board is enhanced.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs to display a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 has two status indicators that display a gaming status and a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball to the gate portion described later. A lottery was drawn by accepting a game symbol in the first starting port, which will be described later, and a normal symbol display device consisting of LEDs, a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate part A first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special retention number display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions relating to the reception of game balls to the first starting port; , A second special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving a game ball at the second starting port, which will be described later, and a game ball accepting person at the second starting port When the second special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit”, etc. And a round indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of times the open / close pattern is repeated (number of rounds).

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Central LCD display]
Next, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 includes two left fixed pieces 1501 projecting outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece projecting outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. 1502. This central liquid crystal display device 1500 has a back box in two fixed grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface in front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010 to be described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixed pieces 1501 obliquely from 3010, the right fixed piece 1502 side is moved forward, the right fixed piece 1502 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism, and the lock mechanism is slid downward. Thus, it is attached to the back box 3010.

[5-7. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. Peripheral control unit 1600 is attached to the rear surface of central liquid crystal display device 1500. Although not shown, the peripheral control unit 1600 displays a peripheral control board that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board, and an effect image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. An image display control board to be controlled, a ROM board having a ROM storing production images, production sounds, production control programs, and the like, and a peripheral housing the peripheral control board, the image display control board, and the ROM board And a control board box 1620.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the rear. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the starter unit of the front unit as viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the starter unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 94A is a perspective view of the front unit as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 94B is a perspective view of the side unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 95 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the attacker unit as viewed from the front and top, (b) is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the back and up, and (c) is the rear view of the attacker unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the center unit of the front unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 97 is a perspective view of the center unit of the front unit viewed from the rear.

  The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the attachment port 1112. Projecting rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls that have been struck into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game balls, and the game balls are gated The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing the section 2003, and the lottery by receiving the game balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 The lower special winning opening 2005 and the upper large winning opening 2006 are provided that allow game balls to be received either in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  A plurality (four here) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged on the right side in the game area 5a from the center in the vertical direction to the lower side. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate portion 2003. The lower prize winning opening 2005 is arranged near the lower end portion in the game area 5a below the second start opening 2004. The upper prize winning opening 2006 is disposed above the second start opening 2004 and in the vicinity of the upper end in the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached immediately above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002, and a left side of the start port unit 2100 in front view. The side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has a plurality (three in this case) of general winning ports 2001, and is attached to the right side of the starting port unit 2100, and one general winning is received. An attacker unit 2300 having a port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second start port 2004, and a lower prize-winning port 2005, and is mounted above the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2300. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a big prize opening 2006.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. In the game area 5a, the start port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1111 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002.

  The start port unit 2100 includes a unit base 2101 attached to the panel plate 1110, a ball receiving member 2102 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 2101 and protruding forward to form a first start port 2002, A box-shaped front decoration base 2103 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2101 below the ball receiving member 2102 and protrudes forward and extends left and right, and the front surface of the unit base 2101 in the front decoration base 2103 And a front center decorative substrate 2104 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  Further, the start port unit 2100 is attached to the front surface of the front decoration base 2103 and has a front decoration member 2105 that has a predetermined decoration and is lit and decorated by the front center decoration board 2104, and the rear side of the unit base 2101. And a guide passage member 2106 for guiding the game ball received in the first start opening 2002 downward, and a game ball attached to the guide passage member 2106 and received in the first start opening 2002 are detected. A first start port sensor 2107.

  The ball receiving member 2102 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and rear, and can receive a game ball from above as the first start port 2002 and guide it backward. The front decoration base 2103 extends evenly to the left and right around the ball receiving member 2102 (first start port 2002), and is inclined so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the left and right ends. The front decoration member 2105 extends left and right, and has a fake portion 2105a formed in a plate shape with substantially the same size and shape as a lower large prize opening door member 2352 that opens and closes a lower big prize opening 2005 described later. ing. By this fake part 2105a, the player can have an illusion that there is a big winning opening below the first starting opening 2002.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. The side unit 2200 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning ports 2001.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extends in a circular arc shape along the inner rail 1002, and is attached to the vicinity of the upper edge of the lower portion of the front surface of the unit base 2201. The two first ball receiving members 2202 projecting forward and forming a general winning opening 2001, and attached to the left side from the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit base 2201, and projecting forward to the general winning opening A second ball receiving member 2203 forming 2001, a side decorative substrate 2204 disposed behind the unit base 2201 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the side decorative substrate 2204 so as to cover from the rear. A board cover 2205 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2201.

  The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so as to become higher toward the left in front view. In addition, the unit base 2201 has a first shelf 2201a that is inclined to be lower toward the right at a portion on the left side and above the portion to which the second ball receiving member 2203 is attached. It has a projecting portion 2201b projecting to the back. The unit base 2201 has translucency and is decorated with light emission by the side decorative substrate 2204.

The first ball receiving member 2202 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and rear, and can receive a game ball from above as a general winning opening 2001 and can guide it backward.
The second ball receiving member 2203 is formed in a box shape with the rear open, and has a second shelf 2203 a that is inclined so as to be lowered toward the right on the upper surface, and a lower portion of the second shelf 2203 a. And a ball receiving portion 2203b that opens to the upper left side and forms a general winning opening 2001.

  The substrate cover 2205 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front open, and is opened upward to a portion that is behind the ball receiving portion 2203b of the two first ball receiving members 2202 and the second ball receiving member 2203. And has a bowl-shaped guiding portion 2205a for guiding the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 backward.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the board cover 2205 is inserted into the attachment port 1112. It can be guided to the rear of the plate 1110.

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. The attacker unit 2300 is disposed in the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2300 has one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a lower large winning port 2005. Specifically, the second start opening 2004 is arranged on the right side of the general winning opening 2001, and the gate portion 2003 is arranged immediately above the second starting opening 2004. A lower prize winning port 2005 is arranged below the second starting port 2004. The lower grand prize winning port 2005 extends to the left and right from the position immediately below the second start opening 2004 to the left beyond the position directly below the general winning hole 2001.

  The attacker unit 2300 has a general winning opening 2001 and a gate part 2003, and is attached to the panel base plate 1110 from the front and a unit base 2301 attached to the front upper part of the unit base 2301. The front opening member 2302 to be decorated, the shelf member 2303 that is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2301 between the front opening member 2302 and the lower prize winning port 2005 and projects forward, and the unit base 2301 A ball guide member 2304 for guiding a game ball received on the second start port 2004, which is attached to the rear side, and a gate sensor 2305, which is attached to the unit base 2301 and detects the passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2003, It is equipped with.

  Further, the attacker unit 2300 is disposed at a portion corresponding to the rear side of the unit base 2301 and between the front opening member 2302 and the shelf member 2303, and a lower attacker decorative board 2306 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. A substrate cover 2307 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 so as to cover the back of the lower attacker decorative board 2306, and a grid frame-shaped light shield attached between the lower attacker decorative board 2306 and the unit base 2301. And a member (not shown).

  Further, the attacker unit 2300 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2301 and is provided with a second starting port unit 2320 for opening and closing the second starting port 2004, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2301 and is connected to the lower prize winning port 2005. And a lower large prize opening unit 2350 that opens and closes.

  The unit base 2301 has a gate portion 2003 protruding forward from the upper end portion, and one general winning port 2001 protruding forward from a lower left portion of the gate portion 2003 when viewed from the front. Further, the unit base 2301 includes a bowl-shaped bowl portion 2301a that guides a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 backward. This unit base 2301 has translucency.

  The start port front member 2302 includes a pair of side wall portions 2302a (see FIG. 175 (a)) extending forward along the left and right sides of the second start port 2004, and an upper end of the left side wall portion 2302a in front view. A guiding portion 2302b extending so as to become higher toward the left side, and a flat plate-like outer wall portion 2302c extending forward from a side wall portion 2302a on the right side when viewed from the front with a distance allowing a game ball to pass to the right. A pair of side wall portions 2302a, a guiding portion 2302b, and a flat front plate portion 2302d connecting the front ends of the outer wall portions 2302c. The left end of the guiding portion 2302b extends further to the left than the gate portion 2003.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (a) and the like, the shelf member 2303 has an upper surface extending from a position immediately below the right side wall 2302a of the start port front member 2302 to a position immediately below the center of the left and right of the general winning opening 2001 so that the left end is lowered. ing. As a result, when a game ball rolls on the upper surface of the shelf member 2303 and is released from the left end when the lower major prize opening 2005 is in the open state, it is accepted into the lower major prize opening 2005 with a very high probability. The ball guide member 2304 is attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 2307. In addition, the ball guiding member 2304 passes the game ball received in the second start port 2004 between the second start port unit 2320 and the lower large prize port unit 2350 behind the unit base 2301. It is formed so as to be discharged downward after being guided rearward from the unit 2350.

  The second start port unit 2320 includes a front case 2321 having a second start port 2004 opened at the front end and attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301, and a rear case 2322 attached to the rear side of the front case 2321. After the second start port door member 2323 and the second start port door member 2323 are slid forward and backward, the front case 2321 is supported so as to be able to slide forward and backward so as to protrude forward from the second start port 2004. A start opening solenoid 2324 attached in the case 2322 and a second start opening sensor 2325 which is attached so as to be sandwiched between the front case 2321 and the rear case 2322 and detects a game ball received in the second start opening 2004. And.

  In the state where the second starter unit 2320 is assembled to the attacker unit 2300, the front end of the front case 2321 passes through the unit base 2301 from the rear side and is positioned on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the unit base 2301. Thereby, the 2nd starting port 2004 is opened toward the front. In a normal state where the start port solenoid 2324 is not energized, the second start port door member 2323 is immersed in the front case 2321, and the game ball flowing down in front of the second start port 2004 is the second start port. Without entering 2004, it passes down the second starting port 2004 and flows downward. On the other hand, when the start port solenoid 2324 is energized, the second start port door member 2323 projects forward from the second start port 2004. In this state, when a game ball flows down in front of the second start port 2004, the game ball comes into contact with the second start port door member 2323 and the flow direction changes from the lower side to the rear side. Accepted. The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2325 and then guided to the ball guiding member 2304 and discharged downward.

  The lower major prize opening unit 2350 is a unit case 2351 that is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 and that has a rectangular lower major prize opening 2005 that is open to the left and right on the front, and the lower major prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A horizontally-long rectangular plate-like lower prize-winning door member 2352 that is pivotally attached to 2351, and a lower-large prize-winning door member 2352 that is attached inside the unit case 2351 and is driven to open and close depending on the gaming state. Lower large prize opening solenoid 2353, a lower large prize opening sensor 2354 that is attached to the unit case 2351 and detects a game ball received in the lower large prize opening 2005, and is attached to the lower surface of the unit case 2351 on the upper surface. Lower large prize opening decoration board 2355 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and lower large prize opening solenoid 235 Includes inferior vena winning hole sensors 2354, starting opening the solenoid 2324, and a second start hole sensor 2325 or the like, the attacker unit relay board 2356 relaying the connection between the main control board, the.

  The lower university winning opening 2005 is open forward. The lower big prize opening door member 2352 capable of opening and closing the lower big prize opening 2005 is attached so that the left and right ends of the lower side can be rotated by the unit case 2351, and the upper side moves so as to move forward and downward. By doing so, the lower prize winning opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

  In the lower prize winning unit 2350, the lower prize winning door member 2352 stands upright and closes the lower prize winning port 2005 in a normal state where the lower prize winning solenoid 2353 is not energized. When the lower big prize opening solenoid 2353 is energized according to the gaming state, the lower big prize opening door member 2352 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly higher than the lower side. It will be in the position. That is, the lower big prize opening door member 2352 is inclined so as to become higher from the lower side of the lower big prize opening 2005 toward the front.

  In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the lower prize winning opening 2005 and comes into contact with the lower prize winning opening door member 2352, the inclination of the lower prize winning opening door member 2352 changes the flow direction from below to the rear. It will be accepted into the Shimodai prize opening 2005. The game balls received in the lower major prize opening 2005 are detected by the lower major prize opening sensor 2354 and then discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2351.

[5-8d. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. FIG. In the game area 5a, the center accessory 2500 is disposed above the start port unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300 and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500 disposed behind the game panel 1100 can be viewed from the front through the frame. The center accessory 2500 has an upper prize winning opening 2006 that allows a game ball to be received according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the center accessory 2500 has a part of the lower side extending downward between the start port unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300 to the vicinity of the lower right rail 1004. That is, the center accessory 2500 divides the game area 5a to the left and right.

  The center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the flange portion 2511 having a flat plate frame-like flange portion 2511 that abuts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the periphery of the mounting port 1112 that is largely open at the center of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped center base having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 that prevents entry of game balls into the cage frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 that protrudes rearward from the flange portion 2511 and is inserted into the mounting port 1112. 2510.

  The front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. The front peripheral wall portion 2512 has the highest position on the upper side slightly leftward from the center in the left-right direction.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 enters a warp inlet 2520 in which the game ball in the game area 5a is open on the outer peripheral surface of the lower left side when viewed from the front on the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510, and the warp inlet 2520. The warp passage 2521 for guiding the game ball to the vicinity of the left end in front of the lower side within the frame of the center base 2510, the warp outlet 2523 opening the game ball at the downstream end of the warp passage 2521, and the warp outlet 2523 A stage 2530 that allows the game ball released from the ball to roll, extends to the left and right along the lower side within the frame of the center base 2510, and discharges the supplied game ball into the game area 5a. ing.

  The stage 2530 is curved such that the left and right ends are high and the left and right sides of the portion corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a are the lowest, and the space between the lowest portions is bulged to be slightly higher. Yes. This stage 2530 is formed in a portion corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, and is formed in a center guide groove 2531 cut out from the front end to the rear and two lowest portions, respectively. And a fan-shaped side guide groove 2532 that decreases toward the left and expands to the left and right. In the assembled state of the game board 5, the first starting port 2002 is located immediately below the central guide groove 2531, and the game balls released from the central guide groove 2531 into the game area 5a are first with a very high probability. It is received in the start port 2002.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the right end portion of the front side wall portion 2512 on the front side when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball that bounces back against the stop portion 1006 to roll in the direction of the upper game space 2541 described later. Part 2540. The guide portion 2540 is formed as a member different from the center accessory 2500 and is attached to the center accessory 2500 to extend the right end portion in front view of the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 in the right direction in front view. In addition, the guide portion 2540 is formed of a resin having a stronger strength than the center accessory 2500. Specifically, the center accessory 2500 is formed of a PC resin (polycarbonate resin), while the guide portion 2540 is formed of a POM resin (polyacetal resin) that is more durable than the PC resin.

  As described above, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a come into contact with the stop portion 1006, the game balls loosen their momentum, but some of the game balls are moved by the stop portion 1006 to the front peripheral wall of the center accessory 2500. It is rebounded in the upper side direction of the portion 2512. Further, in order to bring the game ball into contact with the stop portion 1006, most players turn the handle lever 504 to the maximum to drive the game ball, so that the momentum of the game ball to be launched is directed to the first start port 2002. It is stronger than normal games aimed at winning a prize. Then, when the game ball hit in this way is bounced back by the stop portion 1006, the center accessory 2500 may be damaged due to frequent drops on the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. For this reason, the right end portion in front view of the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 is attached to the center accessory 2500 as a separate guide portion 2540 and is formed of a highly durable POM resin to prevent the center accessory 2500 from being damaged. ing. In this example, since all the center actor 2500 is not formed of POM resin, only the guide portion 2540 is formed of POM resin, so even if the guide portion 2540 is damaged, only the guide portion 2540 is replaced. Can be repaired easily, and can be easily repaired in the event of breakage.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 176 described later, the guide portion 2540 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to have a step with the front peripheral wall portion 2512. In this example, it is attached so that the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 is above the upper side of the guide portion 2540 in front view. As a result, when the game ball bounced back by the stopper 1006 reaches this step, it is returned to the upper game space 2541 without exceeding the step. In addition, the friction coefficient of the upper side of the guide portion 2540 is low due to the smooth mirror finish, and the game ball that could not exceed the step between the front peripheral wall portion 2512 and the guide portion 2540 is quickly flowed down to the upper game space 2541. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging due to the game ball staying on the upper side of the guide portion 2540.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 176 described later, the upper side of the guide portion 2540 is formed by a three-dimensional member that is longer than the right side (left and right sides). The upper side of the guide portion 2540 requires a certain length to receive the game ball bounced back by the hitting portion 1006, but the space in the game area 5a can be made by making the upper side and the right side (left and right sides) comparable. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine decreases. Therefore, by forming the right side (left and right sides) of the guiding portion 2540 shorter than the upper side, a space in the up and down direction of the game area 5a is secured so as not to reduce the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine.

  The center accessory 2500 is sandwiched between the guiding portion 2540 and the stop portion 1006, and an upper right entrance where the game balls in the game area 5a are open to be able to enter, and an upper side of the center base 2510 below the upper right entrance. The upper game space 2541 having a predetermined size with the upper prize winning opening 2006 opened on the left side when viewed from the front, and the right edge of the center base 2510 from the right end when viewed from the front at the bottom of the upper game space 2541 A right passage 2542 in which the lower end is bent to the left and the game ball can circulate, and a lower right exit 2543 that opens downward at the lower end of the right passage 2542 is provided. .

  The upper right entrance extends vertically with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the upper portion extends upward. The upper game space 2541 is formed in such a size that the game ball can sufficiently move in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. In the upper game space 2541, an upper prize winning opening 2006 is opened to the left of the front view from the upper right entrance. In addition, the upper game space 2541 has a guide portion 2541a that is inclined immediately below the upper right entrance so as to become lower toward the right in front view. By this guide portion 2541a, the game ball that has fallen through the upper right entrance is rolled along the bottom surface of the upper game space 2541 without jumping up in the upper game space 2541 and smoothly guided to the right passage 2542. Can be made.

  The right passage 2542 is provided with a plurality of protrusions 2542a extending left and right alternately on the front and rear wall surfaces, and the game balls are brought into contact with the protrusions 2542a so that the flow velocity of the game balls is reduced. Can be attenuated. The lower right exit 2543 is opened immediately above the gate portion 2003 in the attacker unit 2300 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted between the lower right exit 2543 and the gate portion 2003 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110).

  Further, the center accessory 2500 has an upper prize port door member 2550 that closes the upper prize port 2006, and an upper prize port solenoid 2551 that opens and closes the upper prize port door member 2550 according to the gaming state. The upper prize winning hole sensor 2552 for detecting the game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006, and the rear guiding path 2553 for guiding the game ball detected by the upper prize winning hole sensor 2552 to the rear of the flange portion 2511 ( 175), a rear discharge port 2554 that is open at the rear end of the rear guide path 2553 and through which a game ball can pass, and is branched from the middle of the rear guide path 2553, and is on the right side of the center base 2510 in front view. An escape passage 2555 that guides the game ball downward along, and a discharge port 2556 that opens at the lower end of the escape passage.

  The upper prize-winning door member 2550 opens and closes the upper prize-winning hole 2006 that opens to the left in front of the upper right entrance in the upper game space 2541. The upper prize-winning door member 2550 is attached to the lower end to the left of the upper right entrance so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth in the vicinity of the bottom surface of the upper game space 2541. It extends to the ceiling of the upper game space. The upper prize winning opening door member 2550 stands upright in a normal state, and closes the upper prize winning opening 2006. Then, when the upper prize winning solenoid 2551 is energized according to the gaming state, the upper prize opening 2006 is rotated so that the upper end moves to the right when viewed from the front and the game ball can be received. Open. In this state, the upper end of the upper grand prize opening door member 2550 is higher than the lower end and is located further to the right in front view than the upper right entrance. Accordingly, the game ball that has passed through the upper right entrance and dropped onto the upper prize winning door member 2550 is guided by the upper prize winning door member 2550 and accepted into the upper prize winning port 2006.

  The game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 is detected by the upper prize winning opening sensor 2552 disposed at the lower left of the upper prize winning opening door member 2550, and then is behind the flange portion 2551 by the rear guiding path 2553. Be guided. The rear discharge port 2554 that is open at the rear end of the rear guide path 2553 is usually defined by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310a of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 described later. It is closed. Accordingly, when the game ball is not released from the rear discharge port 2554, the game ball enters the escape passage 2555 branched immediately before the rear release port 2554, and is discharged downward from the discharge port 2556 through the escape passage 2555. .

  The center accessory 2500 includes a front movable effect unit 2560 attached to the upper side of the center base 2510 and a lower movable effect unit 2570 attached to the lower side of the center base 2510. The front movable production unit 2560 of the center accessory 2500 is mounted in a frame of the center base 2510 so as to be movable up and down, and has a front movable decoration body 2561 that is decorated in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, A front movable decorative body decorative board (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the upper movable decorative body 2561 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 and in a gaming state And an upper surface driving motor 2563 that moves the upper surface movable decorative body 2561 up and down.

  The front and lower movable effect unit 2570 is attached to a portion extending downward from the stage 2530 on the lower side of the center base 2510, and has a translucent front surface with a decoration on the front surface. The lower decorative body 2571, the first rotational decorative body 2572, the second rotational decorative body 2573, and the third rotational decorative body 2574 that are rotatably attached to the front of the front and lower decorative bodies 2571, and the center base 2510 A lower drive motor 2575 that is attached to the side and rotates the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 according to the gaming state, and the rear side of the lower decorative body 2571 And a front and lower movable decorative body decoration board 2576 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  In the lower movable production unit 2570, the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 are formed in a shape imitating a shuriken, and driven by the lower drive motor 2575. , Each rotating in the same direction.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view in which the back unit is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view in which the back unit is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. A central liquid crystal display device 1500 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the liquid crystal display device 1500 and a game ball attached to the lower left front end of the back box 3010 and received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 are guided downward. The lower left ball passage unit 3030 that discharges onto the holder 1200, and the game ball that is attached to the lower right front end of the back box 3010 and is received in the general winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 and the upper large winning port 2006 are received. The outlet 3303a of the back lower right base 3303 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 to be described later. A lower right ball passage unit 3040 for guiding the discharged game ball and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 2556 of the escape passage 2555 of the center accessory 2500 downward and releasing it onto the substrate holder 1200, and a lower left ball passage unit 3030 and a lower right ball passage unit 3040, and a general winning opening sensor 3050 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, respectively.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010 and is mounted on the left side of the opening 3010a. The back unit 3000 drives each decorative board based on the control command from the peripheral control board, and the lamp drive. A lamp driving board cover 3061 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 so as to cover the back of the board 3060, and a control command from the peripheral control board attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a in the rear view. A motor drive board 3062 for driving each drive motor based on the motor drive board, a motor drive board cover 3063 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the back of the motor drive board 3062, and a rear view on the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is installed in the lower left corner and relays the connection between the main control board and each prize opening sensor and each prize opening solenoid. That the panel relay board 3064, and a.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back peripheral decoration unit 3080 attached along the upper and left sides at the front end of the back box 3010, and a back movable production unit attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. 3100, a back bottom front movable effect unit 3200 attached below the opening 3010a in the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010, and a back right movable effect attached in the back box 3010 to the right of the opening 3010a. The unit 3300, the back left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a and behind the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 Moveable directing unit 3500 after the back, and the movable back directing unit 3100 within the back box 3010 and moveable after the back A back corners movable direction unit 3600 attached to the respective left and right sides of the output unit 3500, and a.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. The back box 3010 has a box shape with a front opening and a square opening through the rear wall, and a frame-shaped liquid crystal attachment projecting in a flat plate shape with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. Part 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside on the right side in the back view of the liquid crystal attachment part 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1501 of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is inserted, and the back view of the liquid crystal attachment part 3010b A notch 3010d that is notched from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In addition, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the central liquid crystal display device 1500 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100.

  The back box 3010 is not described in detail, but a boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting each movable effect unit and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Lower left ball passage unit]
Next, the lower left sphere passage unit 3030 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. The lower left sphere passage unit 3030 is attached to a portion corresponding to the rear of the side unit 2200 in the back box 3010. The lower left sphere passage unit 3030 is formed in an L shape in which the side of the front view shape extending vertically is shorter than the side extending left and right, and the inside is formed hollow. The lower left ball passage unit 3030 is provided with three entrances 3031 that are open forward on the front surface and through which game balls can pass. These three entrances 3031 are formed at positions corresponding to the three guide portions 2205 a in the side unit 2200.

  The lower left ball passage unit 3030 is inclined so that the hollow interior is lowered toward the right when viewed from the front, and the game ball that has entered from the three entrances 3031 is released downward near the right end of the lower surface. The A general winning opening sensor 3050 is attached to the lower left ball passage unit 3030, and a game ball that has entered inside from the entrance 3031 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050. That is, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050 attached to the lower left ball passage unit 3030.

[5-9c. Lower right ball passage unit]
Next, the lower right sphere passage unit 3040 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. This lower right sphere passage unit 3040 is attached to a portion of the back box 3010 corresponding to the rear of the attacker unit 2300. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is open toward the front, a first entrance 3041 through which a game ball received in the general winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 can enter, and a back right movable effect unit 3300 described later. A second advancement entrance 3042 that opens upward just below the discharge port 3303a that opens on the lower surface of the first entrance, and a center that is open upward to the right and in front of the second entrance 3042. And a third entrance 3043 through which the game ball discharged from the outlet 2556 through the escape passage 2555 of the accessory 2500 can enter.

  The lower right ball passage unit 3040 discharges the game balls that have entered the first advance entrance 3041, the second advance entrance 3042, and the third advance entrance 3043 downward through independent passages. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is provided with a general winning opening sensor 3050 for detecting a game ball that has entered the first entrance 3041. That is, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050 attached to the lower right ball passage unit 3040.

[5-9d. Back edge decoration unit]
Next, the back periphery decorative unit 3080 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. The back periphery decoration unit 3080 is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front end of the back box 3010 at portions corresponding to the upper side, the left side, and the lower left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. The back periphery decoration unit 3080 is attached to the rear periphery decoration member 3081 having translucency extending in a C-shape and the back periphery decoration member 3081, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. A back periphery decorative substrate 3082 and a substrate cover 3083 that covers the back of the back periphery decorative substrate 3082 and is attached to the rear side of the back periphery decorative member 3081.

  The back periphery decoration unit 3080 can light-decorate the back periphery decoration member 3081 by appropriately causing the LEDs on the back periphery decoration substrate 3082 to emit light. Further, when the game board 5 is assembled, the front surface of the back periphery decorative member 3081 is visible from the player side through the transparent panel board 1110, and the outside of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a is decorated.

[5-9e. Backward movable production unit]
Next, the back movable production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102 (a) is a perspective view of the backside movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 102 (b) is a perspective view of the backside movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the backside movable effect unit as seen from the front and FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the backside movable effect unit as seen from the back. FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the backside decorative body unit of the backside movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. FIG. Further, FIG. 107 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back upper auxiliary decorative body in the back movable decorative body unit. FIG. 108 is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism when the backside decorative body unit of the backside movable effect unit is in the retracted position, and FIG. 109 is the first backside decorative body unit of the backside movable effect unit. FIG. 110 is a front view showing a state of the internal mechanism at the appearance position, and FIG. 110 is a front view showing a state of the internal mechanism when the back decorative body unit of the back movable production unit is at the second appearance position.

  FIG. 111 (a) is a front view showing a part of the internal mechanism of the back movable production unit, and FIG. 111 (b) is a perspective view of a part of the internal mechanism different from (a) as seen from the front. (C) is the perspective view which looked at (b) from the back. Further, FIG. 112 is an explanatory view showing a partial movement of the internal mechanism of the back movable production unit. FIG. 113 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the main members constituting the internal mechanism in the retracted position, and FIG. 113 (b) shows the first transmission member rotating from the state of FIG. FIG. 114 (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the transmission of rotation to the transmitted member is started, and FIG. 114 (c) is a back view of the first transmitted member further rotated together with the first transmitted member from the state of FIG. 113 (b). It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the upper decoration body unit is falling toward the 1st appearance position from a retracted position, (d) is a 1st to-be-transmitted member further rotated with a 1st transmission member from the state of (c). And it is explanatory drawing which shows the state which transmission of the rotation to a 1st to-be-transmitted member was complete | finished, and the back decorative body unit reached | attained the 1st appearance position.

  Further, in FIG. 115 (e), the second transmission member of the transmission mechanism that has been rotated together with the first transmission member from the state of FIG. 114 (d) further rotates to transmit the rotation to the second transmitted member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state started, (f) is a state where the 2nd to-be-transmitted body unit rotates with a 2nd transmission member from the state of (e), and a back upper decoration body unit is a 2nd appearance position from a 1st appearance position. FIG. 116 (g) is an explanatory view showing a state where the second transmission member rotates together with the second transmission member from the state shown in FIG. 115 (f). It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which is rotating while the body unit further descend | falls toward a 2nd appearance position, (h) is a state where the 2nd transmitted member further rotates with the 2nd transmission member from the state of (g). The transmission of the rotation to the second receiving member is finished and the back decorative unit is in the first appearance position. While descending from the state is an explanatory view showing a state that has reached the second occurrence position by half turn.

  The back movable production unit 3100 is mounted in the back box 3010 above the opening 3010a. The back movable production unit 3100 has a space formed between a unit base 3101 attached in the back box 3010 and extending to the left and right and a unit base 3101 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3101. A rear cover 3102 and a back drive motor 3103 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3101 in the vicinity of the right end in a front view and having a rotating shaft penetrating the unit base 3101 and projecting between the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102; It is equipped with.

  Further, the backside movable rendering unit 3100 includes a spur gear-like drive gear 3104 fixed to the rotating shaft of the backside drive motor 3103, and a spur gear-like first large-diameter gear 3105a meshing with the drive gear 3104. And a first small-diameter gear 3105b that is smaller in diameter than the first large-diameter gear 3105a and rotates integrally with the first large-diameter gear 3105a on the rear side of the first large-diameter gear 3105a. A first driven gear 3105 disposed on the opposite side, a spur gear-shaped second large diameter gear 3106a meshing with the first small diameter gear 3105b of the first driven gear 3105, and a smaller diameter than the second large diameter gear 3106a. The second large-diameter gear 3106a has a second small-diameter gear 3106b that rotates integrally with the second large-diameter gear 3106a, and is disposed on the left side of the first driven gear 3105 when viewed from the front. The second driven gear 3106 has a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3107a meshing with the second small-diameter gear 3106b of the second driven gear 3106, and is arranged on the left side of the second driven gear 3106 in front view. The first transmission member 3107 has a spur gear-like second transmission gear 3108a meshing with the first transmission gear 3107a of the first transmission member 3107, and is disposed on the left side of the first transmission member 3107 when viewed from the front. Second transmission member 3108 (see FIG. 111 (a) and the like).

  The first driven gear 3105, the second driven gear 3106, the first transmission member 3107, and the second transmission member 3108 are rotatable between the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102 by the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102. Installed.

  The first transmission member 3107 includes a cylindrical first transmission pin 3107b projecting forward from the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge in front of the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3107a in parallel with the rotation axis, and revolution of the first transmission pin 3107b. Between the disk-shaped first lock protrusion 3107c that protrudes forward concentrically from the front surface of the first transmission gear 3107a with a radius smaller than the radius, and between the first lock protrusion 3107c and the first transmission pin 3107b, From an equal range toward both sides of the axis line connecting the center of the first transmission gear 3107a and the center of the first transmission pin 3107b on the outer peripheral surface of the first lock protrusion 3107c toward the center of the first lock protrusion 3107c. And a first notch 3107d that is cut out in a fan shape.

  The second transmission member 3108 includes a cylindrical second transmission pin 3108b projecting forward from the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge in the front surface of the spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3108a, and a revolution of the second transmission pin 3108b. Between the disk-shaped second lock protrusion 3108c and the second lock protrusion 3108c and the second transmission pin 3108b projecting forward concentrically from the front surface of the second transmission gear 3108a with a radius smaller than the radius, From an equal range toward both sides of the axis line connecting the center of the second transmission gear 3108a and the center of the second transmission pin 3108b on the outer peripheral surface of the second lock projection 3108c toward the center of the second lock projection 3108c. And a second cutout portion 3108d cut out in a fan shape.

  The first transmission gear 3107a and the second transmission gear 3108a of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are formed to have the same diameter. Further, the first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 have the same cylindrical diameter and the same revolution radius. The first lock protrusion 3107c and the second lock protrusion 3108c of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are formed to have the same diameter. Further, the first notch 3107d and the second notch 3108d of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are 72 degrees with respect to the circumferences of the first lock projection 3107c and the second lock projection 3108c. It is formed in a fan shape in the angle range.

  Further, the back movable production unit 3100 has a columnar slide shaft 3109 that is attached to the unit base 3101 at the front surface near the left end of the unit base 3101 when viewed from the front and extends vertically, and an upper end of the slide shaft 3109. A shaft attachment member 3110 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3101; a left slider 3111 having a plate-like detection piece 3111a attached to the slide shaft 3109 so as to be vertically slidable and extending backward; A back up / down detection sensor 3112 that detects the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111 and is attached to the unit base 3101, and an upper part of the front of the unit base 3101 are attached to the left in front of the back drive motor 3103. , Lower end is unit base 310 A rail bracket 3113 extending vertically so as to protrude downward from the lower surface of the rail, a slide rail 3114 having a right slider 3114a attached to the left side surface of the rail bracket 3113 when viewed from the front, and sliding up and down, A rack member 3115 having a rack gear 3115a attached to the right slider 3114a of the rail 3114 and extending vertically, and a flat plate-like first movable member whose left and right ends are respectively attached to the left slider 3111 and the rack member 3115. A base 3116.

  Also, the back movable production unit 3100 includes a flat plate-like first substrate portion 3117a formed in a droplet shape, and a columnar first substrate projecting forward from a droplet-like tip in the first substrate portion 3117a. It has an action pin 3117b, and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3101 so that the first action pin 3117b revolves at the right side of the front face of the first transmission member 3107 on the front surface of the unit base 3101. A first bearing member 3117 capable of transmitting the rotation of the first transmission member 3107 and a first bearing slit 3118a into which the first action pin 3117b of the first member 3117 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction. And a bearing member 3118 attached to the rear surface of the first movable base 3116.

  The first movable base 3116 has an opening 3116a that penetrates forward and backward and extends from the lower end to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction. On the rear surface of the first movable base 3116, a rack member 3115 is attached to the right of the opening 3116a in front view. The rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 extends along the opening 3116a in a state where the tooth tip is directed leftward when viewed from the front.

  The first movable base 3116 is slidable up and down (movable up and down) by a slide shaft 3109 and a slide rail 3114 via a left slider 3111 and a right slider 3114a. The first movable base 3116 is regulated in the vertical direction by the first action pin 3117 b of the first transmitted member 3117 inserted in the first bearing slit 3118 a of the bearing member 3118. Accordingly, when the first acting member 3117 is rotated to revolve the first action pin 3117b and the vertical position of the first action pin 3117b is changed, the first action pin 3117b is moved in the first bearing slit 3118a. While sliding in the left-right direction, the first movable base 3116 slides in the up-down direction. That is, when the first transmitted member 3117 is rotated, the first movable base 3116 slides up and down.

  The first substrate portion 3117a of the first transmitted member 3117 has a base circle whose front view has a diameter substantially the same as the valley diameter of the gear teeth of the second large-diameter gear 3106a of the second driven gear 3106, and the base circle thereof. It is formed in a shape (so-called droplet shape) mainly composed of two sides extending so as to contact from the outside. The first transmitted member 3117 has the center of the base circle of the first base portion 3117 a as the center of rotation, and this center of rotation is arranged coaxially with the center of the second driven gear 3106. The first action pin 3117b protrudes from the vicinity of the two sides in contact with the base circle in the first substrate portion 3117a (a droplet-shaped tip).

  The first transmitted member 3117 has a cylindrical first received body portion 3117c having the same diameter as the base circle of the first substrate portion 3117a and protruding rearward from the rear surface of the first substrate portion 3117a, and the first received member 3117a. A first transmission slit 3117d that is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 3117c toward the center and into which the first transmission pin 3107b is slidably inserted, and a first transmission slit 3117d on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body 3117c. And a pair of first lock recesses 3117e that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The first lock recess 3117e is recessed with an arc having a slightly larger diameter than the diameter of the first lock protrusion 3107c of the first transmission member 3107. The pair of first lock recesses 3117e are formed so that the lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In the state where the back movable production unit 3100 is assembled, the first transmitted member 3117 includes the first transmitted body 3117c, the first transmission pin 3107b and the first lock projection 3107c of the first transmission member 3107, The position in the front-rear direction is the same. Accordingly, the first transmission pin 3107b can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3117d, and the rotation can be transmitted through the first transmission pin 3170b and the first transmission slit 3117d. Further, a part of the first lock protrusion 3107c can be inserted into the first lock recess 3117e, and a part of the first lock protrusion 3107c is inserted into the first lock recess 3117e, thereby The rotation of the transmitted member 3117 can be restricted (locked).

  Further, the back movable production unit 3100 has a second bearing slit 3119a penetrating front and rear at the upper end portion and extending left and right, and a bearing hole 3119b penetrating front and rear at substantially the center in the vertical direction. The second movable base 3119 is slidably mounted on the rear surface of the first movable base 3116 so that the bearing hole 3119b faces the front from the opening 3116a, and is disposed in front of the first movable base 3116. A backside decorative body having a shaft portion 3151a rotatably inserted into the bearing hole 3119a of the second movable base 3119 and imitating the head including the face of a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 It is attached to the rear end of the shaft portion 3151a of the unit 3150 and the backside decorative body unit 3150 passing through the second movable base 3119. A spur gear-shaped decorative body rotating gear 3120 meshing with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115, and a flat gear mounted on the rear surface of the second movable base 3119 so as to cover the rear of the decorative body rotating gear 3120. A cover 3121.

  When the second movable base 3119 is slid relative to the first movable base 3116, the back decorative unit 3150 attached to the bearing hole 3119 b of the second movable base 3119 also moves together with the second movable base 3119. Slide to. At this time, the decorative body rotating gear 3120 attached to the shaft portion 3151a of the backside decorative body unit 3150 meshes with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 attached to the first movable base 3116. When the two movable bases 3119 slide, the decorative body rotation gear 3120 rotates together with the back upper decorative body unit 3150.

  Further, the back movable production unit 3100 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3101 below the front second transmission member 3108 and in front of the unit base 3101 so that the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 can be transmitted. The second transmitted member 3122, the rotating link member 3123 attached to the front surface of the second transmitted member 3122 so as to be slidable in the direction along the rotating surface, and the second transmitted member on the front surface of the rotating link member 3123. 3122 is slidably mounted in a direction intersecting the sliding direction with respect to 3122 and is rotatably mounted behind the first movable base 3116 and protrudes rearward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center. A cylindrical second action pin 312 slidably inserted into the second bearing slit 3119a of the two movable bases 3119. Includes a second movable base driving member 3124 to have a, a shaft member 3125 are rotatably mounted relative to the second movable base driving member 3124 first movable base 3116, a.

  The second transmitted member 3122 includes a disk-shaped second substrate portion 3122a that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3101, and a cylindrical second received body portion 3122b that protrudes rearward from the periphery of the second substrate portion 3122a. A second transmission slit 3122c that is recessed toward the center from the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted body portion 3122b and into which the second transmission pin 3108b is slidably inserted, and an outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted body portion 3122b On both sides of the second transmission slit 3122c, a pair of second lock recesses 3122d recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center, and recessed backward from the front surface of the second substrate portion 3122a and with respect to the rotation axis A first transmission guide portion 3122e having a groove shape and one end portion opening on the outer peripheral surface of the second substrate portion 3122a. (See, etc. FIG. 111 (b) and (c)).

  The second transmitted member 3122 has a radius of the second substrate portion 3122a (second transmitted main body portion 3122b) shorter than the distance from the rotation center to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108, and the second lock protrusion. It is formed longer than the distance to the outer peripheral surface of 3108c. The second lock recess 3122d is recessed with an arc having a slightly larger diameter than the diameter of the second lock protrusion 3108c of the second transmission member 3108. The pair of second lock recesses 3122d is formed so that the lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  The first guide transmission portion 3122e extends at an angle of 54 degrees with respect to the direction in which the second transmission slit 3122c extends. In addition, the first guide transmission portion 3122e opens on the circumferential surface in the direction opposite to the direction in which the second transmission slit 3122c opens on the circumferential surface.

  The rotating link member 3123 protrudes from the rear surface of the flat link body 3123a and the link main body 3123a, and is inserted into the first transmission guide 3122e of the second transmitted member 3122 so as to be slidable. A pair of first transmitted guide portions 3123b, a front projecting portion 3123c projecting from the front surface of the link main body portion 3123a, and recessed from the front surface of the front projecting portion 3123c to the rear, the first transmitted guide portion 3123b extends. A groove-shaped second transmission guide portion 3123d extending in a direction intersecting with the direction in which both ends are open on the outer peripheral surface of the front protrusion 3123c (FIGS. 111 (b) and ( c) etc.).

  The pair of first transmitted guide portions 3123b of the rotary link member 3123 are provided symmetrically with respect to an axis passing through the center of the link main body 3123a and are provided eccentric from the center. The second transmission guide portion 3123c is provided on an axis passing through the center of the link main body portion 3123a. The first transmitted guide portion 3123b and the second transmitted guide portion 3123c each extend in a direction that intersects at an angle of 95 degrees.

  The second movable base drive member 3124 protrudes rearward from a position where the second action pin 3124a is eccentric with respect to the rotation center, and a drive main body 3124b that is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116; The second transmitted guide portion that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the portion 3124b, passes through the center of rotation and extends at a right angle to the rotational axis, and is slidably inserted into the second transmission guide portion 3123d of the rotary link member 3123. 3124c (see FIGS. 111B and 111C).

  As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 includes a decorative body base 3151 having a flat plate shape and a shaft portion 3151a protruding in a cylindrical shape from the center of the rear surface, and a decorative body base 3151. Is attached to the front of the decorative base 3151 and a back decorative body 3152 having three elliptical openings 3152a that three-dimensionally imitate the head of a predetermined character. And a C-shaped back decorative substrate 3153 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  The back upper decorative body unit 3150 is disposed behind the back upper decorative body 3152 in the approximate center of the front surface of the decorative body base 3151 and extends in the left and right directions, and both ends of the guide shaft 3154. Is attached to the front surface of the decorative body base 3151 so that it can be guided to the left and right by a guide shaft 3154, and has a guide slit 3156a extending vertically at the lower center in the left-right direction. A flat accessory slider 3156 and a pair of openings 3152a attached to the front surface of the accessory decorative slider 3156 and closing the pair of openings 3152a on the back upper ornament body 3152, and an oval shape facing the opening 3152a The sub-upper decorative body 3157 provided with the sub-decoration 3157a and the rear side of the sub-upper decorative body 3157 Includes a backing on a secondary decorative substrate 3158 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the front surface of the decorative body slider 3156 is mounted, the.

  Further, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is attached to the rear upper sub drive motor 3159 attached to the vicinity of the lower end of the front surface of the decorative body base 3151 so that the rotation shaft extends left and right, and to the rotation shaft of the back upper sub drive motor 3159. Worm gear 3160, a disc-shaped main body 3161a that is rotatably attached to the decorative body base 3151 above the worm gear 3160, and extends along the outer peripheral surface of the main body 3161a, and meshes with the worm gear 3160. Is projecting forward from the distal end of the extended piece 3161c and the extended piece 3161c extending from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 3161a opposite to the gear portion 3161b to the rear of the auxiliary decorative body slider 3156. It is slidably inserted into the guide slit 3156a of the sub decorative body slider 3156. Columnar slide pin 3161D, a gear member 3161 that has a, and a.

  In the backside decorative body unit 3150, the two openings 3152a of the backside decorative body 3152 form the outer periphery of the eyes of a predetermined character, and the backside decorative body 3157 is the sub-side of the backside top decorative body 3157 facing forward from the two openings 3152a. The decoration 3157a forms a pupil. The back upper decoration body 3152 and the back upper sub decoration body 3157 have translucency, and are decorated with light emission by the LEDs of the back upper decoration board 3153 and the back upper sub decoration board 3158 arranged at the rear of each. .

  As shown in the figure, the backside decorative body unit 3150 is in a state where the head of a predetermined character deceived by the backside decorative body 3152 is upside down. Further, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 can slide the back upper sub decorative body 3157 to the left and right with respect to the back upper decorative body 3152 by the rotational drive of the back upper sub drive motor 3159. Accordingly, a movable effect can be performed in which the pupil (sub-decoration 3157a) of the predetermined character being deceived by the backside decorative body 3152 crawls left and right.

  Next, the operation of the back movable production unit 3100 will be described in detail. First, the operation of the back upper decorative body 3157 in the back upper decorative body unit 3150 will be described. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), in a normal state, the extension piece 3161c of the gear member 3161 is attached in a state of extending vertically upward. In this state, the sub-decorative body slider 3156 is positioned substantially at the center of the slide range extending in the left-right direction, and the two sub-decorations of the back-side sub-decoration body 3157 attached to the front surface of the sub-decorative body slider 3156 are provided. The decoration 3157a is located at approximately the center in the two openings 3152a of the back upper decoration body 3152, respectively. That is, in a normal state, a predetermined character that is deceived by the back upper decorative body 3152 looks at the front.

  In this normal state, for example, when the worm gear 3160 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the right side by the back upper side drive motor 3159, the gear member 3161 is engaged with the worm gear 3160 by the gear portion 3161b. It rotates in the clockwise direction and revolves so that the sliding pin 3161d located above the center of rotation moves to the left. By the revolving movement of the sliding pin 3161d to the left, the sliding pin 3161d slides downward in the guide slit 3156a, and the sliding pin 3161d presses the inner surface of the guide slit 3156a to the left, and the auxiliary decoration The body slider 3156 slides to the left. As a result, the sub-decoration 3157a moves to the left, so that the predetermined character being deceived by the back upper decoration 3152 is looking left (see FIG. 107 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the worm gear 3160 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the right side by the back side auxiliary drive motor 3159, the gear member 3161 is rotated clockwise by the gear portion 3161b engaged with the worm gear 3160. Then, the sliding pin 3161d located above the rotation center revolves so as to move to the right. By the revolving movement of the sliding pin 3161d to the right, the sliding pin 3161d slides downward in the guide slit 3156a, and the sliding pin 3161d presses the inner surface of the guide slit 3156a to the right, and the auxiliary decoration The body slider 3156 slides to the right. As a result, the sub-decoration 3157a moves to the right, so that the predetermined character being deceived by the backside decoration 3152 is looking right (see FIG. 107 (c)).

  In this way, the sub decoration 3157a can be moved to the left and right by the rotational drive of the back upper sub drive motor 3159. Therefore, depending on the gaming state, the predetermined character being deceived by the back upper decoration body 3152 can be seen. It is possible to perform a movable effect that changes the direction in which the user is. In addition, by moving the sub-decoration 3157a back and forth to the left and right, it is possible to perform a movable effect that makes the eyes of the predetermined character obscured by the backside decorative body 3152 scrambled, and presents a variety of movable effects to the player. can do.

  Then, the raising / lowering operation | movement of the back top ornament body unit 3150 in the back top movable production | presentation unit 3100 is demonstrated in detail. The back movable production unit 3100 of the present embodiment can raise and lower the back decorative body unit 3150 and can rotate the back decorative body unit 3150 by 180 degrees.

  First, the internal mechanism of the back movable effect unit 3100 for raising and lowering the back decorative body unit 3150 will be described. As shown in FIG. 108, FIG. 111, and the like, a back drive motor 3103 having a rotation axis directed in the front-rear direction is disposed at the right end in front view. The rotation center of the first driven gear 3105 that meshes with the drive gear 3104 attached to the rotation shaft of the backside drive motor 3103 is arranged in the lower left of the front view with respect to the rotation center of the drive gear 3104. The rotation center of the second driven gear 3106 that meshes with the first driven gear 3105 is arranged at substantially the same height as the rotation center of the drive gear 3104 in the upper left of the front view with respect to the rotation center of the first driven gear 3105. Yes. Further, the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107 having the first transmission gear 3107a meshing with the second driven gear 3106 is lower left in front view with respect to the rotation center of the second driven gear 3106, and the rotation of the first driven gear 3105. It is arranged at almost the same height as the center. Furthermore, the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108 having the second transmission gear 3108a meshing with the first transmission gear 3107a of the first transmission member 3107 is the upper left in the front view with respect to the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107. The second driven gear 3106 is disposed at a position higher than the rotation center.

  The rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117 to which the rotation from the first transmission member 3106 is transmitted is coaxial with the second driven gear 3106 at the upper right in front view with respect to the rotation center of the first transmission member 3106. Placed in position. On the other hand, the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122 to which the rotation from the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted is slightly to the left of the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108 from directly under the front view. It is arranged at a position lower than the center of rotation. The rotation center of the second movable base drive member 3124 to which the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is transmitted is arranged on an axis extending vertically up and down passing through the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122.

  In the normal state, the backside decorative body unit 3150 is positioned at the rising end in the up and down range, and the top and bottom of a predetermined character that is deceived by the backside decorative body 3152 is reversed. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is mostly located behind the center accessory 2500, and only a small part is a frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be seen from the player side through the inside. That is, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is located at a retracted position that is hardly visible from the player side in a normal state.

  When the back decorative unit 3150 is in the retracted position, the first transmission pin 3107b of the first transmission member 3107 is in front of the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107 as shown in FIG. 108 and FIG. The second transmission pin 3108b of the second transmission member 3108 is located at the upper left of the second transmission member 3108 with respect to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108. It is located at a position inclined about 13 degrees to the right from the vertical line. Further, at this retracted position, the first action pin 3117b of the first transmitted member 3117 is a position inclining about 45 degrees to the upper left as viewed from the front with respect to the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117 (leftward from the vertical line). ) And the first transmission slit 3117d of the first transmitted member 3117 is smaller than the axis line connecting the first action pin 3117b from the center of rotation (about 72 with respect to the vertical line). The angle extends to the upper left of the front view.

  In the retracted position, the second transmission slit 3122c of the second transmitted member 3122 extends from the center of rotation toward the upper left of the front view (an angle of about 36 degrees from the vertical line to the left). The second movable base drive member 3124 has a rotation center located above the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122 and slightly below the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108, and has a second action. The pin 3124a is located at the upper right of the second movable base drive member 3124 in the front view (position inclined about 45 degrees to the right from the vertical line).

  Further, when in the retracted position, the first lock projection 3107c of the first transmission member 3107 is inserted into the first lock recess 3117e of one of the first transmitted members 3117 (the one closer to the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107). ing. Thereby, since the rotation of the first transmitted member 3117 is restricted (locked), the first movable base 3116 does not slide up and down. The second lock protrusion 3108c of the second transmission member 3108 is inserted into the second lock recess 3122d of one of the second transmitted members 3122 (the one closer to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108). Accordingly, since the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is restricted (locked), the second movable base drive member 3124 does not rotate, and the second movable base 3119 does not slide up and down.

  When the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is in the retracted position, the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111 on which the first movable base 3116 is slidably mounted up and down is detected by the back upper and lower detection sensor 3112.

  When the back top decorative body unit 3150 is in the retracted position and the back top drive motor 3103 rotates the drive gear 3104 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the back top movable production unit 3100 has the first driven gear 3105 and the first driven gear 3105. The first transmission member 3107 rotates in the clockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108 rotates in the counterclockwise direction through the two driven gears 3106 at the same speed. First, the first transmission pin 3107d of the first transmission member 3107 starts entering the first transmission slit 3117d of the first transmitted member 3117 (see FIG. 113 (b)).

  When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated counterclockwise and the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated clockwise, the first notch 3107d is rotated to the position of the first lock recess 3117e. The first lock protrusion 3107c is removed from the first lock recess 3117e, and the first transmission pin 3107b comes into contact with the inner surface of the first transmission slit 3117d to press the first transmission slit 3117d downward. Accordingly, the rotation of the first transmission member 3107 is transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117, and the first transmitted member 3117 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. At this time, the first notch 3107d is located at the first lock recess 3117e, and the first lock protrusion 3107c is removed from the first lock recess 3117e (unlocked). Therefore, the first transmitted member 3117 rotates without being blocked by the first lock protrusion 3107c (see FIG. 114 (c)).

  By rotating the first transmitted member 3117 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the first action pin 3117b revolves downward and the first action pin 3117b is slidably inserted. The first movable base 3116 slides downward through the single bearing slit 3118a. Since the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is attached to the first movable base 3116 via the second movable base 3119, the back upper decorative body unit 3105 also slides downward together with the first movable base 3116.

  When the first movable base 3116 slides downward, the second transmission guide portion 3123d of the rotary link member 3123 extends vertically, so that it is attached to the first movable base 3116 and the second transmission guide portion 3123d. The second movable base driving member 3214 having the second transmitted guide portion 3124c guided by the second movable base 3116 can move downward together with the first movable base 3116, and the first movable base 3116 slides smoothly.

  When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated counterclockwise and the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated clockwise, the first transmission pin 3107b is disengaged from the first transmission slit 3117d, and the first The lock protrusion 3107c enters the other first lock recess 3117e different from the first lock recess 3117e into which the first lock protrusion 3107c was originally inserted. Thereby, the rotation of the first transmitted member 3117 is stopped, and the downward sliding of the first movable base 3116 is stopped (see FIG. 109 and FIG. 114 (d)). This state is a state in which the first movable base 3116 is positioned at the lower end of the lifting range, and the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is positioned in the first appearance position. In the first transmission member 3107, the rotation range in which the first transmission pin 3107b is inserted into the first transmission slit 3117d of the first transmitted member 3117 is the first specific rotation range.

  When the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, the top and bottom decorative bodies 3152 are approximately half in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. , Facing the player from within the frame of the center bonus 2500. In the state of the first appearance position, the pair of openings 3152a of the backside decorative body 3152 and the sub-decoration 3157a facing the opening 3152a can be partially viewed from the player side. Accordingly, it is possible to present a movable effect such that a predetermined character that is deceived by the back upper decorative body 3152 is looking upside down from above.

  When the back decorative unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, the second transmission pin 3108b of the second transmission member 3108 rotating together with the first transmission member 3107 is transmitted to the second transmission member 3122 by the second transmission. It has not reached the slit 3122c. Further, the rotation center of the second movable base drive member 3124 attached to the first movable base 3116 is positioned below the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122 and the second rotation link member 3123 has a second rotation center. Only the upper part of the second transmitted guide part 3124c of the second movable base drive member 3124 is guided with respect to the transmission guide part 3123d.

  From the state in which the back decorative unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, the drive gear 3104 is further rotated counterclockwise, the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated clockwise, and the second transmission member 3108 is rotated. Is further rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front, the first transmission pin 3107b moves away from the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission pin 3108b enters the second transmission slit 3122c of the second transmitted member 3122. Is started (see FIG. 115 (e)).

  Then, when the drive gear 3104 is further rotated counterclockwise and the second transmission member 3108 is further rotated counterclockwise, the second notch 3108d is rotated to the position of the second lock recess 3122d. The second lock projection 3108c is disengaged from the second lock recess 3122d, and the second transmission pin 3108b comes into contact with the inner surface of the second transmission slit 3122c to press the second transmission slit 3122c to the right in front view. Accordingly, the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted to the second transmitted member 3122, and the second transmitted member 3122 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. At this time, the second notch 3108d is located at the site of the second lock recess 3122d, and the second lock protrusion 3108c is released from the inside of the second lock recess 3122d (the lock is released). Therefore, the second transmitted member 3122 rotates without being blocked by the second lock protrusion 3108c (see FIG. 115 (f)).

  When the second transmitted member 3122 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the first transmission guide portion 3122e formed on the front surface of the second transmitted member 3122 also rotates, so that the first transmission guide portion 3122e The rotary link member 3123 having the first transmitted guide portion 3123b guided so as to be slidable also tends to rotate in the same clockwise direction. On the other hand, the upper part of the second transmission guide portion 3124c of the second movable base drive member 3124 that is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116 slides on the second transmission guide portion 3123d on the front surface of the rotary link member 3123. Guided as possible. As a result, when the rotation link member 3123 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the first transmitted member 3122, the second transmission guide unit 3123d and the second transmitted guide are also rotated in an attempt to rotate the second transmission guide unit 3123d. An attempt is made to revolve the second movable base drive member 3124 around the rotary link member 3123 via the portion 3124c.

  However, since the second movable base drive member 3124 is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116 and cannot revolve around the rotary link member 3123, the force acting on the second transmitted guide portion 3124c. On the contrary, the rotary link member 3123 tries to revolve around the second movable base drive member 3124 by the reaction force. At this time, the rotation link member 3123 intersects the direction in which the first transmission guide portion 3122e extends (first direction) and the direction in which the second transmission guide portion 3123d extends (first direction). Second link extending in the direction), so that the rotary link member 3123 slides along the first direction and the second direction so that the force acting on the rotary link member 3123 is reduced. It becomes. Thereby, the rotation of the first transmitted member 3122 is transmitted to the second movable base drive member 3124 by the rotation of the rotary link member 3123 and the sliding in the first direction and the second direction, and the second movable base drive member. 3124 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 115 (f) to 116 (h)).

  In other words, the rotary link member 3123 is forcibly rotated by the second transmitted member 3122 by the first transmission guide portion 3122e and the first transmitted guide portion 3123b. When the rotary link member 3123 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the second transmission guide portion 3123d extending vertically in FIG. 115 (e) is inclined obliquely so that its upper end moves to the right. (See FIG. 115 (f)). When the second transmission guide portion 3123d rotates and tilts, the second movable base drive member 3124 attempts to revolve via the second transmitted guide portion 3124c guided by the second transmission guide portion 3123d. Since the base drive member 3124 is attached to the first movable base 3116 and cannot revolve, the rotary link member 3123 transmits the first transmission by the reaction force of the force acting on the second movable base drive member 3124 from the rotary link member 3123. Along the guide part 3122e, it slides largely to the open side (right side in the front view), and slightly slides to the rotation center side (downward) of the second movable base drive member 3124 along the second transmission guide part 3123d. Then, the second movable base drive member 3124 rotates at the same angle as the angle at which the second transmission guide portion 3123d is inclined.

  When the second movable base drive member 3124 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the second action pin 3124a revolves so as to move downward, so that the second action pin 3124a is slidably inserted. The second movable base 3119 slides downward via the second bearing slit 3119a. Since the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is attached to the second movable base 3119, the back upper decorative body unit 3105 slides further downward from the first appearance position together with the second movable base 3119. At this time, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is rotatably mounted by the shaft portion 3151a and the bearing hole 3119b of the second movable base 3119, and the decorative body rotation mounted on the rear end of the shaft portion 3151a. Since the gear 3120 meshes with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 attached to the first movable base 3116, when the second movable base 3119 slides downward, the back upper decorative body together with the decorative body rotating gear 3120 The unit 3150 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 115 (f) and the like).

  When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the second transmitted member 3122 is further rotated in the clockwise direction via the second transmission member 3108, the rotary link member 3123 is connected to the second transmitted member 3122. Rotate in the clockwise direction at the same angle, slide further toward the open side along the first transmission guide portion 3122e, and move the center of the rotary link member 3123 along the second transmission guide portion 3123d to the second movable position. The second movable base drive member 3124 is further rotated in the clockwise direction by sliding toward the rotation center of the base drive member 3124. As a result, the backside decorative body unit 3150 slides further downward together with the second movable base 3119, and the backside decorative body unit 3150 further rotates counterclockwise (see FIG. 116 (g)).

  When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated counterclockwise and the second transmission member 3108 is further rotated counterclockwise, the second transmission pin 3108b is disengaged from the second transmission slit 3122c and the second lock The protrusion 3108c enters into another second lock recess 3122d different from the second lock recess 3122d in which the second lock protrusion 3108c was originally inserted. Accordingly, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is stopped, the downward sliding of the second movable base 3199 is stopped, and the top and bottom decorative body unit 3150 is 180 degrees above the first appearance position. Stop in the rotated state (see FIG. 110 and FIG. 116 (h)). This state is a state where the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 are positioned at the lower end of the lifting range, and the back decorative body unit 3150 is positioned at the second appearance position. . In the second transmission member 3108, the rotation range in which the second transmission pin 3108b is inserted into the second transmission slit 3122c of the second transmitted member 3122 is the second specific rotation range.

  In the state in which the back decorative body unit 3150 (back decorative body 3152) is in the second appearance position, the second lock protrusion 3108c of the second transmission member 3108 is in the second lock recess 3122d of the second transmitted member 3122. Since it is inserted, the second transmitted member 3122 is prevented from rotating, and the second movable base 3119 does not slide downward any further. In the state where the backside decorative body unit 3150 is in the second appearance position, as shown in FIG. 148, the top and bottom of a predetermined character being deceived by the backside decorative body 3152 is in a normal state, and the backside decorative body unit 3150 is in the normal state. The upper decorative body 3152 is positioned substantially at the center in the frame of the center accessory 2500 so that the substantially entire back upper decorative body 3152 can be viewed from the player side.

  When the backside decorative body unit 3150 is lowered from the first appearance position to the second appearance position, the backside movable effect unit 3100 descends while rotating 180 degrees while the backside decorative body 3152 having been reversed in the upside down position is lowered. Then, the player can be presented with a movable effect located substantially in the center of the center object 2500 (front surface of the central liquid crystal display device 1500) with the top and bottom in a normal state, which greatly surprises the player. Can do.

  When the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is in the second appearance position and the drive gear 3104 is rotated in the range direction (clockwise in front view) by the back upper drive motor 3103, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is rotated. Moves up to the retracted position through the first appearance position while performing the reverse operation, and when the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111 is detected by the back up / down detection sensor 3112, the drive gear by the back drive motor 3103 The rotation of 3104 stops and the back decorative unit 3150 returns to the retracted position.

  The back movable movable unit 3100 can lift and lower the back decorative unit 3150 from the retracted position to the first appearance position and from the first appearance position to the second appearance position in two stages. Apart from that, the back upper decorative body 3157 (sub decoration 3157a) can be slid to the left and right relative to the back upper decorative body 3152 (perpendicular to the vertical direction of the back upper decorative body 3152). By appropriately combining, various movable effects can be presented.

[5-9f. Front-bottom front movable production unit]
Next, the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 (a) is a perspective view of the back unit before the back bottom movable effect unit of the back unit, and FIG. 117 (b) is a perspective view of the back unit of the back unit before the back direction movable effect unit. FIG. 118 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the front lower back first decorative body and the back lower front second decorative body from the front in the normal retracted position of the front back front movable effect unit, and FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the front lower front first decorative body and the rear lower front second decorative body from the front in the state of appearance.

  The back lower front movable effect unit 3200 is disposed below the opening 3101a near the front end in the back box 3010. This back-under-front movable effect unit 3200 is attached to a flat unit base 3201 attached to the front surface of the back-under-behind movable effect unit 3500 and the upper left corner of the unit base 3201 in the front view when viewed from the front. The front lower back drive motor 3202 that protrudes forward through 3201, the drive gear 3203 attached to the rotation shaft of the lower back front drive motor 3202, and the drive gear 3203 are meshed from the lower right when viewed from the front. A transmission gear 3204 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3201 and a pinion gear 3205 that meshes with the transmission gear 3204 from the lower right as viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3201.

  In addition, the lower back front movable effect unit 3200 has a rack gear 3206a that meshes with the pinion gear 3205 from the right in the front view and extends vertically, and a flat detection piece 3206b that protrudes to the right in the front view. The rack member 3206 is slidably attached to the unit base 3201 so as to be slidable up and down, and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3201. The drive gear 3203, the transmission gear 3204, the pinion gear 3205, and the rack member 3206 are A unit cover 3207 that covers from the front, and a front-back movable detection sensor 3208 that is attached to the unit cover 3207 and can detect the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206 are provided.

  Furthermore, the front back movable movable effect unit 3200 has a link pin 3209a protruding in a columnar shape from the position between the center in the left-right direction in the front view and the left end, and the left end in the front view is the upper end of the rack member 3206. The front back front first decorative body 3209 having a three-dimensional decoration is attached to the unit base 3201 so that the right end of the front view is slidable up and down. A back-bottom front first decorative board 3210 attached to the rear surface of one decorative body 3209 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, a strip-like base end portion of the back bottom front first decorative body 3209, and a unit base The unit base 3201 is attached to the unit base 3201 and the unit cover 3207 so as to be rotatable in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction between the unit base 3201 and the link pin 32. A link member 3211 having a link slit 3211a extending in an arc shape into which 9a is slidably inserted, and a front under back imitating the hand of a predetermined character attached to the tip of the link member 3211 It has a second decorative body 3212 and a back-under-front second decorative board 3213 attached to the rear surface of the back-under-front front second decorative body 3212 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  Next, the operation of the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 in the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the back-under-front movable production unit 3200 is lowered with respect to the rack member 3206 to which the back-under-front front first decorative body 3209 is attached in the normal state, and the vertical sliding direction. The link member 3211 which is located at the end and to which the back lower front second decorative body 3212 is attached extends obliquely so that the tip is located slightly upward with respect to the horizontal.

  In this state, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and cannot be viewed from the player side (see FIG. 83). That is, in the normal state, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are in a retracted position that cannot be visually recognized by the player. In the state where the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are in the retracted position, the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206 is detected by the back lower front movable detection sensor 3208.

  In the normal state, when the drive gear 3203 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the pinion gear 3205 rotates counterclockwise in the normal state. The rack member 3206 is raised by the rack gear 3206a meshing with the pinion gear 3205. Since the back lower front first decorative body 3209 is attached to the upper end of the rack member 3206, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 also rises together with the rack member 3206.

  When the back lower front first decorative body 3209 is lifted, the link pin 3209a inserted into the link slit 3211a of the link member 3211 is also lifted. The inside of the slit 3211a slides, and the link member 3211 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front centering on the base end. And since the back bottom front 2nd decoration body 3212 is attached to the front-end | tip of the link member 3211, the back bottom front 2nd decoration body 3212 moves upward with the raise of the back back front 1st decoration body 3209. As shown in FIG. Rotate to move.

  Thereafter, when the rack member 3206 reaches the ascending end, the rotation of the front lower back drive motor 3202 stops, the front lower front first decorative body 3209 stops rising, and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 rotates. Stops. In this state, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), the link member 3211 is in an upright state, and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 is positioned above the lower back front first decorative body 3209. .

  In the state where the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are raised, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are as shown in FIG. It is located in the front view frame of the center accessory 2500 and can be sufficiently visually recognized from the player side (front). That is, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are in an appearance position that can be visually recognized from the player side. As shown in FIG. 148, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are positioned in front of the back upper decorative body 3152 of the back movable movable effect unit 3100 in the appearance position. The back upper decorative body 3152 does not come into contact. In addition, the back lower front second decorative body 3212 is formed so as to partially overlap the back upper decorative body 3152 at the second appearance position by being moved to the appearance position.

  In addition, with the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 in the appearance position, the back lower front drive motor 3102 causes the drive gear 3103 to move in the opposite direction (clockwise as viewed from the front). ), The back lower front first decorative body 3209 descends and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 rotates so as to move to the left in the front view. When the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206 is detected by the lower back front movable detection sensor 3208, the rotational driving of the lower back front drive motor 3102 stops, and the lowering of the lower back front first decorative body 3209 stops. The rotation of the second lower front decorative body 3212 stops, and the first lower front decorative body 3209 and the second lower front decorative body 3212 return to the retracted position.

  In this way, the lower back front movable effect unit 3200 allows the lower back front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 to be outside the frame (retracted position) and within the frame (appearance position) of the center accessory 2500. Therefore, the player can be surprised by appearing in the frame of the center accessory 2500. Further, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 is raised so that the back lower front second decorative body 3212 appears to rotate, and the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body. Since 3212 appears in a different motion, the illusion that the motion of the movable performance is a complex motion can be provided, and the player can be entertained.

[5-9g. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119A is a perspective view of the back right movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 119B is a perspective view of the back right movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 120 (a) is a front view of the back-right movable effect unit with the first decorative surface of the back-right rotating decorative body facing the front, and (b) is the back-right rotating decorative body in (a). It is a front view of the back right movable production | presentation unit shown in the state which opened this shutter, (c) is a front view of the back right movable production | presentation unit shown in the state which orient | assigned the 2nd decoration surface of the back right rotation decoration body to the front. (D) is a front view of the back right movable effect unit showing the third decorative surface of the back right rotating decorative body facing the front.

  The back right movable effect unit 3300 is attached in the back box 3010 to the right of the opening 3010a in front view. This back-right movable effect unit 3300 includes a back-right sheet metal base 3301 that is mounted in the back box 3010 and extends vertically in a front view, and a back-right upper base that is mounted on the upper front of the back-right sheet metal base 3301. 3302, a back right lower base 3303 attached to the lower front surface of the back right sheet metal base 3301, a back right drive motor 3304 attached to the lower surface of the back right lower base 3303, and rotationally driven by the back right drive motor 3304 And a columnar back right rotating decorative body 3310 that is rotatably attached by a back upper right base 3302 and a back right lower base 3303.

  The back right sheet metal base 3301 is formed of a metal plate. The back upper right base 3302 includes a cylindrical cover portion 3302a having a low height that covers the upper portion of the back right rotating decorative body 3310, and a cutout portion 3302b in which a predetermined range in the circumferential direction of the cover portion 3302a is cut out. . The lower right base 3303 has a discharge port 3303a penetrating vertically. The notch 3302b of the back upper right base 3302 is located immediately after the rear discharge port 2554 in the center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. Further, the discharge port 3303 a of the back lower right base 3303 is located immediately above the second advancement entrance 3042 of the lower right ball passage unit 3040.

  The back right rotating decorative body 3310 has a first decorative surface 3310a, a second decorative surface 3310b, and a third decorative surface 3310c that divide the outer peripheral surface into three in the circumferential direction. The back-right rotating decorative body 3310 has an opening 3311 extending upward and downward on the first decorative surface 3310a and a pair of openings 3311 that are closed from the center of rotation and are slidably attached to each other. The shutter 3312, the inner decorative body 3313 attached to the center in the vertical direction of the opening 3311 on the rotational center side of the pair of shutters 3312, and the inner decorative body 3313 attached to the rotational center side and facing outward. The back right first decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is attached to the rotation center side of the back right first decorative board, and the pair of shutters 3312 approach or separate from each other. And a back right shutter solenoid (not shown).

  On the first decorative surface 3310a of the back-right rotating decorative body 3310, usually, a pair of shutters 3312 are in close contact with each other (see FIG. 120 (a)). Then, when the pair of shutters 3312 are separated by driving the back right shutter solenoid according to the gaming state, the inner decorative body 3313 faces the outside from between the pair of shutters 3312. In this state, the back right first decoration The player can show the player the inner decorative body 3313 that has been decorated with light emission by causing the LED on the board to emit light.

  The second decorative surface 3310b of the back-right rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with a back-right character decoration 3318 having a translucent shape in which a predetermined character is formed in a relief shape, although detailed illustration is omitted. Have. A back-right second decorative board (not shown) in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface facing outward is attached to the rotation center side of the second decorative surface 3310b. The second decorative surface 3310b (back right character decoration 3318) can be illuminated and decorated by the decorative substrate.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 120 (d), the third decoration surface 3310 c of the back-right rotation decoration body 3310 is opened so that a game ball can enter a portion having the same height as the cover portion 3302 a of the back-upper base 3302. The back right sphere entrance 3320 and the back right sphere entrance 3320 are communicated with the discharge port 3303a of the back lower right base 3303 and are arranged closer to the center of rotation than the outer peripheral surface. , A ball guiding member 3322 that is installed in the back right effect space 3321 and spirally moves the game ball that has entered the back right ball entrance 3320 downward, A back right third decorative substrate 3323 extending vertically adjacent to the right effect space 3321 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  Next, the operation of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 will be described. The back-right movable effect unit 3300 can rotate the back-right rotating decorative body 3310 in any direction around the axis extending in the vertical direction by the rotational drive of the back-right drive motor 3304. In the normal state (first decoration state), the back right movable effect unit 3300 has the first decoration surface 3310a facing forward, as shown in FIG. 120 (a). On the first decorative surface 3310a, a pair of shutters 3312 disposed closer to the center of rotation than the opening 3311 is normally in contact with each other to close the opening 3311.

  Further, in the first decorative state, the notch 3302b of the cover portion 3302a in the back upper right base 3302 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310a. Therefore, when the back right movable effect unit 3300 is in the first decorative state, the rear discharge port 2554 of the center accessory 2500 that coincides with the notch 3302b is also closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310a. As a result, when a game ball is received in the top prize winning port 2006 of the center accessory 2500 in the first decoration state, the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guide path 2553 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decoration surface 3310a. Therefore, the game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 enters the escape passage 2555 branched near the rear end of the rear guiding path 2553, passes through the escape passage 2555, and passes from the discharge port 2556 to the back right ball passage. It is delivered to the third entrance 3043 of the unit 3040 and discharged downward through the back right sphere passage unit 3040.

  When this back right movable effect unit 3300 is energized to a back right shutter solenoid (not shown) in the first decoration state, the pair of shutters 3312 are separated in the vertical direction, and the inner decoration body 3313 is moved between the pair of shutters 3312. It will be in the state which faces outside (refer FIG.120 (b)). Then, an LED (high-intensity LED) of a back right first decorative board (not shown) arranged closer to the rotation center than the inner decorative body 3313 is caused to emit light, and the inner decorative body 3313 facing between the pair of shutters 3312 is emitted. Decorate. Thereby, the arrival of an opportunity etc. can be suggested to a player.

  Further, the back right movable effect unit 3300 may be in a state (second decoration state) in which the second decoration surface 3310b of the back right rotation decoration body 3310 is stopped forward by the rotation drive of the back right drive motor 3304. (See FIG. 120 (c)). In this second decoration state, the back right character decoration 3318 made up of a predetermined character formed on the second decoration surface 3310b can be illuminated and illuminated by causing the LED of the back right second decoration board (not shown) to emit light. It is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player. In the second decorative state, the notch 3302b of the cover portion 3302a is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the second decorative surface 3310b, as in the first decorative state.

  Further, the back right movable effect unit 3300 may be in a state (third decoration state) in which the third decoration surface 3310c of the back right rotation decoration body 3310 is stopped forward by the rotation drive of the back right drive motor 3304. (See FIG. 120 (d)). In the third decoration state, as shown in the drawing, the back right effect space 3321 in which the game ball can be distributed can be visually recognized from the player side. Further, in the third decoration state, the back right sphere entrance 3320 is located at a portion of the cutout portion 3302b of the cover portion 3302a. Therefore, in the third decoration state, the rear outlet 2554 of the center accessory 2500 and the back right sphere inlet 3320 are aligned, and the game balls are in communication with each other.

  Then, in the third decoration state, the game ball received in the top prize winning port 2006 of the center accessory 2500 enters the back right ball entrance 3320 from the back discharge port 2554 of the back guide path 2553, and the back right effect space 3321. The ball guiding member 3322 arranged in the position flows down while rotating around the axis extending vertically in the back right effect space 3321 a plurality of times (here, 8 times) (see FIG. 175 (a)). . As a result, the game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 can be spiraled down in the back right effect space 3321, so that the player can surely see the game ball accepted in the upper prize winning opening 2006. It is possible to increase the expectation for paying out the game ball by accepting the game ball at the upper prize opening 2006, and to entertain the player with the game ball flowing down in a spiral shape. Can be suppressed. Also, the game balls received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 are caused to flow down while spirally rotating, so that a larger number than the number actually entered the upper prize winning opening 2006 has entered. There is also an effect that the player can have an illusion.

  Thereafter, the game ball that has flowed down in the back right effect space 3321 is discharged from the discharge port 3303a of the back right lower base 3303 and enters the second entrance 3042 of the right lower ball guide unit 3040 that opens directly below. Then, it passes through the lower right ball passage unit 3040 and is discharged into the lower substrate holder 1200.

  Thus, according to the back right movable effect unit 3300, various movable effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained.

[5-9h. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 123. FIG. 121A is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121B is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 122 (a) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit with the first decorative surface of the back left rotating decorative body facing forward, and (b) is the second decoration of the back left rotating decorative body. It is a front view of the back left movable production | presentation unit shown in the state which faced the front, (c) is a front view of the back left movable production | presentation unit shown in the state which orient | assigned the 3rd decoration surface of the back left rotation decoration body to the front. (D) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit showing a state where the back left protruding decorative body of the back left rotating decorative body is set as the appearance position in the state of (a). FIG. 123 is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 122 (a).

  The back left movable effect unit 3400 is attached in the back box 3010 to the left of the opening 3010a in front view. This back left movable production unit 3400 is mounted in the back box 3010 and has a back left sheet metal base 3401 extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and a back left upper base attached to the front upper part of the back left sheet metal base 3401. 3402, a back left lower base 3403 attached to the lower front portion of the back left sheet metal base 3401, a back left drive motor 3404 attached to the bottom surface of the back left bottom base 3403, and a back left drive motor 3404. And a columnar back left rotating decorative body 3410 that is rotatably attached to the back left upper base 3402 and the back left lower base 3403. The back left sheet metal base 3401 is formed of a metal plate.

  The back left rotating decorative body 3410 has a first decorative surface 3410a, a second decorative surface 3410b, and a third decorative surface 3410c that divide the outer peripheral surface into three in the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 122 (a), the back left rotating decorative body 3410 has a door decoration 3411 with a door on the first decorative surface 3410a. The back left rotating decorative body 3410 is disposed closer to the center of rotation than the first decorative surface, and has a back left first decorative substrate 3412 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface facing outward. . The first decorative surface 3410a can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light from the LED on the back left first decorative substrate 3412.

  Further, on the second decorative surface 3410b of the back left rotating decorative body 3410, although not shown in detail, characters different from the back right character decoration 3318 of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 are formed in a relief shape. A back left character decoration 3413 having translucency is provided. A back left second decorative board 3414 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface facing the outside is attached to the rotation center side of the second decorative face 3410b. The second decorative surface 3410b (back left character decoration 3413) can be illuminated.

  Further, on the third decorative surface 3410c of the back left rotating decorative body 3410, a back left projecting portion 3415 forming an outer peripheral surface, and a rotation center side with respect to the back left projecting portion 3415 are disposed, so that translucency is achieved. And a back left third decorative board 3417 on which a plurality of color LEDs are mounted on a surface that is disposed closer to the rotation center than the projection film 3416 and faces outward. Although not shown, the projection film 3416 has a red design projected in red and a blue design projected in blue, which are represented by a single color and are different from each other. A portion where the design and the blue design overlap is milky white or transparent, and a portion other than the red design and the blue design is black or opaque. In the third decorative surface 3410c, when the red light is emitted on the back left third decorative substrate 3417, the red design can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415, and when the blue light is emitted, the blue design is backed. The image can be projected on the left projection unit 3415.

  In addition, the third decorative surface 3410c has a pair of door members 3420 that are vertically arranged at the end portion of the back left projection portion 3415 near the first decorative surface 3410a and that can be opened and closed, and more than each door member 3420. A pair of rear left protrusions that are arranged on the rotation center side and are slidably attached between a retracted position inside the outer peripheral surface of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and an appearance position protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface. A decorative body 3421 and a pair of back-left decorative body solenoids 3422 that are attached in the back-left rotating decorative body 3410 and slide-drive each back-left protruding decorative body 3421 are provided.

  As illustrated, the door member 3420 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. Although not shown in the figure, the door member 3420 is rotatably attached at both ends of the side extending up and down on the side far from the first decorative surface 3410a, and the side side extending up and down on the opposite side is third. It opens and closes to move outward from the decorative surface 3410c. Moreover, the door member 3420 has a hook-shaped closing claw 3420a that protrudes from the inner side surface in the vicinity of the vertically extending side that is rotatably attached.

  The back left protruding decorative body 3421 is attached so that the sliding direction is the left-right direction when the first decorative surface 3410a is directed forward (front). The back left protruding decorative body 3421 is formed in a shape that looks like a shuriken as shown in FIG. The back left protruding decorative body 3421 protrudes in the direction away from the first decorative surface 3410a from the vicinity of the tip, and has a closing piece 3421a that can be engaged with the closing claw 3420a of the door member 3420.

  Next, the operation of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 in the back left movable effect unit 3400 will be described. This back left movable effect unit 3400 can rotate the back left rotating decorative body 3410 in any direction around the axis extending in the vertical direction by the rotational drive of the back left drive motor 3404. In the normal state (first decoration state), the back left movable effect unit 3400 is stopped with the first decoration surface 3410a facing forward, as shown in FIG. 122 (a). In this first decorative state, the first decorative surface 3410a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the LEDs on the back left first decorative substrate 3412 to emit light. Since the first decorative surface 3410a is provided with a door decoration 3411 simulating a door, the first decorative surface 3410a is illuminated to make the player think that the door decoration 3411 opens. Can increase the player's expectation.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left projecting decorative body 3421 of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 is accommodated inside the back left rotating decorative body 3410 by a biasing force of a spring (not shown) in a normal state. Located in the retracted position. In the retracted position, the outer surface of the door member 3420 is in a closed state in which the outer surface of the door member 3420 is flush with the third decorative surface 3410c, and the closing piece 3421a of the back left protruding decorative body 3421 is the closing claw of the door member 3420. 3420a. As a result, even if centrifugal force acts on the back left protruding decorative body 3421 and the door member 3420 by rotating the back left rotating decorative body 3410, the back left protruding decorative body 3421 appears to the position where the back left protruding decorative body 3421 appears. The sliding member 3420 can be prevented from opening by the locking piece 3421a being locked to the closing claw 3420a.

  When the back left decoration body solenoid 3422 is driven (energized) in the first decoration state, the back left protrusion decoration body 3421 slides outward against the biasing force of a spring (not shown) and the back left protrusion protrudes. The door member 3420 is opened by being pushed by the tip of the decorative body 3421, and the back left protruding decorative body 3421 is in an appearance position where it protrudes outward from the third decorative surface 3410c. Thereby, the back left protrusion decoration body 3421 protrudes from the back left rotation decoration body 3410 which rotates in a cylindrical shape, and thus the player can be surprised. Further, since the pair of back left protruding decorative bodies 3421 can be independently protruded, various movable effects can be presented to the player.

  When the drive of the back left decorative body solenoid 3422 is stopped in the appearance position, the back left protruding decorative body 3421 slides to the retracted position by a spring (not shown). At this time, the closing piece 3421a is locked to the closing claw 3420a, and the door member 3420 can be rotated from the open state to the closed state, and automatically returns to the normal state.

  Further, the back left movable effect unit 3400 may be in a state (second decoration state) in which the second decoration surface 3410b of the back left rotation decoration body 3410 is stopped forward by the rotation drive of the back left drive motor 3404. Yes (see FIG. 122 (b)). In this second decoration state, the back left character decoration 3413 can be illuminated by appropriately emitting the LED on the back left second decoration board 3414, which suggests that the player has an opportunity, etc. Can do.

  Further, the back left movable effect unit 3400 may be in a state (third decoration state) in which the third decoration surface 3410c of the back left rotation decoration body 3410 is stopped forward by the rotation drive of the back left drive motor 3404. (See FIG. 122 (c)). In this third decoration state, the LED on the back left third decoration board 3417 can emit red light to project the red design on the back left projection unit 3415, and blue light can emit blue design. It can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415. Accordingly, the symbol projected on the back left projection unit 3415 can suggest the player that a chance has arrived, and the player can be entertained or expected.

  Thus, according to the back right movable effect unit 3300, various movable effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained.

[5-9i. Moveable directing unit behind the back]
Next, the back and rear movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 136. FIG. 124 (a) is a perspective view of the back and rear movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 124 (b) is a perspective view of the back and lower back of the moveable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the up / down moving unit of the rear rear movable production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the up / down unit of the lower rear movable production unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 127 is an explanatory view showing the state of the lifting unit when the back-bottom rear rotating decorative unit is in the lowered end position, and FIG. 128 is a diagram of the lifting unit when the back-bottom rear rotating decorative unit is in the raised end position. It is explanatory drawing which shows a state from the front.

  FIG. 129 (a) is a front view of the back-under-back movable effect unit, and FIG. 129 (b) is a perspective view of the back-under-rotation body decoration unit of the back-under-movable effect unit as viewed from the front. ) Is a perspective view of the back and bottom rotating decorative body unit of the back and bottom movable production unit as viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the rear lower rear rotary decoration unit as seen from the rear. 132 is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. 129 (a).

  Further, FIG. 133 (a) is a front view showing a state in which the back-bottom post-rotation decorative body of the back-bottom post-rotation decoration unit is stopped rotating, and (b) is a front view counterclockwise view of the back-bottom post-rotation decoration body. It is a front view which shows the state currently rotated to the rotation direction, (c) is a front view which shows the state just before a back lower back rotation decoration body opens and rotates to a clockwise direction of a front view, (d ) Is a front view showing a state in which the back and bottom rotating decorative body is rotating in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front. FIG. 134 (a) is an explanatory view showing the configuration of the drive mechanism relating to the back-under-rear rotation decoration motor in the back-under-rear rotation decoration body unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the differential mechanism which concerns, (c) is the connection which has connected the drive mechanism which concerns on a back lower back rotation drive motor, and the differential mechanism which concerns on a rotation damper in a back lower back rotation decoration body unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a mechanism.

  FIG. 135 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the connecting mechanism when the back-under-rear rotating decorative body is closed and stopped rotating, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the connection mechanism when rotating in the direction. FIG. 136 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the coupling mechanism when the back and bottom rotating decorative body is closed and stopped rotating, and FIG. 136 (b) is a diagram illustrating the coupling ring of the drive mechanism in the clockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when it rotates and the back bottom back rotation decoration body is opening, (c) is a back rotation back decoration by the connection ring of a drive mechanism rotating further in the clockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when a body opens completely, (d) When the back bottom back rotation decoration body of the open state is rotating clockwise with the connection mechanism of a drive mechanism It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of this connection mechanism.

  The rear back movable movable effect unit 3500 is attached below the opening 3010a near the rear end in the back box 3010. This rear back movable movable effect unit 3500 is mounted in the back box 3010 and has a lift unit 3510 in which the front back bottom movable effect unit 3200 is mounted on the front surface, and a back bottom rear rotating decorative body that is moved up and down by the lift unit 3510. A unit 3550.

  The raising / lowering unit 3510 of the rear back movable movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the rear surface of the lower left corner of the unit base 3511 when viewed from the front of the unit base 3511 and the unit base 3511 attached to the front surface of the rear wall below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A rear back / up / down drive motor 3512 having a rotary shaft protruding forward through the unit base 3511, and a spur gear-like lift / lower drive gear 3513 attached to the rotary shaft of the back / bottom back / up / down drive motor 3512. A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3514a meshing with the lifting drive gear 3513, and a second transmission gear 3514b that rotates integrally with the front surface of the first transmission gear 3514a and has a smaller diameter than the first transmission gear 3514a. A transmission gear member 3514 rotatably attached to the unit base 3511, and a transmission And A member second transmission gear 3514b engaged to and unit base 3511 lifting drive pinion gear 3515 rotatably mounted in and spur gear shape of 3514, and a.

  The elevating unit 3510 has a guide slit 3516a extending vertically in the center in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-like detection piece 3516b protruding leftward from the lower left end of the front view. A lifting base 3516 is mounted on the front surface of the lifting unit 3510 so as to be slidable up and down, and a back lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550 is slidably mounted on the rear surface by a guide slit 3516a. And a lift drive rack gear 3517 that is attached to the rear surface near the left end of the front view and extends vertically and meshes with the lift drive pinion gear 3515, and extends vertically and has an upper end that is the same height as the upper end of the unit base 3511. The fixed side rack gear 35 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3511 8 and a movable side rack gear 3551b that is engaged with the fixed side rack gear 3518 and that is attached to the rear surface of the rear back and rear rotating decorative body unit 3550, and is rotatably attached to the elevating base 3516. A spur gear-like acceleration gear 3519.

  Further, the elevating unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3511 so as to cover the front of the elevating drive gear 3513, the transmission gear member 3514, the elevating drive pinion gear 3515, and the fixed side rack gear 3518 on the left side of the elevating base 3516 in front view. The left and right gear cover left 3520, the back and bottom back elevation detection sensor 3521 that is attached to the front surface of the gear cover left 3520 and can detect the detection piece 3516b of the elevation base 3516, and the right side of the elevation base 3516 in the front view. A spur gear-shaped guide pinion gear 3522 that is rotatably attached to the front surface of the base 3511, meshes with the guide pinion gear 3522, extends vertically, and is attached to the rear surface on the right end side of the elevation base 3516 in front view. Of the guide rack gear 3523 and the guide rack gear 3523 The gear cover right 3524 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3511 and the lower end side are attached to the elevating base 3516, and the upper end side is attached to the gear cover left 3520 and the gear cover right 3524, respectively. And a pair of assist springs 3525 that urge upward.

  The lifting unit 3510 is mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3511 on the right end side when viewed from the front. The lifting / lowering unit 3510 is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate base 3526. Detection sensor 3521, back-under-rear rotation drive motor 3553, back-under-rear rotation detection sensor 3570, and back-under-rear relay board relaying the connection between the back-under-rear decoration board 3572, the motor drive board 3062, and the lamp drive board 3060 3527.

  Next, the operation of the lifting / lowering unit 3510 in the rear back movable movable effect unit 3500 will be described. This back-under-back movable effect unit 3500 is positioned at the lowered end position where the back-under-bottom post-rotation decorative body unit 3550 is most lowered in the normal state. In this lowered end position, as shown in FIG. 127, at the upper end of the lifting drive rack gear 3517 and the guide rack gear 3523 attached to the lifting base 3516, the lifting drive pinion gear 3515 and the guide attached to the unit base 3511. Pinion gears 3522 mesh with each other. Further, the acceleration gear 3519 attached to the lifting base 3516 is meshed with the lower end of the fixed side rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511 and is also movable to the back lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550. The side rack gear 3551b meshes with the upper end.

  Further, in the state of the lowered end position, the guide pin 3552b of the back and bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 inserted into the guide slit 3516a of the lifting base 3516 via the guide bush 3528 is positioned at the lower end of the guide slit 3516a. ing. Further, in the state of the lowered end position, the detection piece 3516b of the lift base 3516 is detected by the back and bottom lift detection sensor 3521, and the pair of assist springs 3525 extend to urge the lift base 3516 upward. doing.

  As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, when the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is in the lowered end position, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 has a lower rear rear rotating decoration body 3568 than the lower end of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. A part is visible from the player side above the stage 2530 in the frame of the center accessory 2500 below.

  When the rear back and rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is at the lower end position, the back and forth rear elevation drive motor 3512 rotates the elevation drive gear 3513 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, so that the elevation drive pinion gear 3515 rotates counterclockwise. The elevating base 3516 is raised by the elevating drive rack gear 3517 that rotates in the direction and meshes with the elevating drive pinion gear 3515. When the elevating base 3516 is raised, the acceleration gear 3519 rotatably attached to the elevating base 3516 is also raised together with the elevating base 3516. Since this acceleration gear 3519 meshes with a fixed rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511, when the elevating base 3516 (acceleration gear 3519) rises with respect to the unit base 3511, the acceleration gear 3519 is viewed from the front. It will rotate in the clockwise direction.

  This acceleration gear 3519 is on the opposite side to the fixed side rack gear 3518 and is engaged with the movable side rack gear 3551b attached to the rear back and rear rotating decorative body unit 3550, so that the acceleration gear 3519 is counterclockwise. When rotating, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 rises relative to the lifting base 3516 via the movable rack gear 3551b. At this time, the rear back and rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is raised at twice the speed of the lifting base 3516 by the acceleration gear 3519 meshing with the fixed side rack gear 3518 of the unit base 3511.

  In the lifting unit 3510, the guide rack gear 3523 on the opposite side to the lifting drive rack gear 3517 in the lifting base 3516 meshes with the guide pinion gear 3522 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3511. The elevating base 3516 can rise straight without the right end side of the base 3516 being twisted. Further, in the lifting unit 3510, the lifting base 3516 is biased upward by the pair of assist springs 3525, so that the load on the back and bottom rear lifting drive motor 3512 is reduced. In the pair of assist springs 3525, the assist spring 3525 on the right side as viewed from the front, which is far from the lifting drive rack gear 3517, is extended longer than the left assist spring 3525, and the urging force is strengthened. doing.

  Then, when the back-under-rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is located at the most elevated position, the back-under-rear lifting drive motor 3512 stops. In the state of the raised end position, as shown in FIG. 128, the guide pin 3552b of the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is located at the upper end of the guide slit 3516a of the lifting base 3516. In the state of the rising end position, the lift drive pinion gear 3515 and the guide pinion gear 3522 attached to the unit base 3511 at the lower ends of the lift drive rack gear 3517 and the guide rack gear 3523 attached to the lift base 3516, respectively. Meshed. Further, the acceleration gear 3519 attached to the lifting base 3516 is meshed with the upper end of the fixed side rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511 and is movable to the back lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550. The side rack gear 3551b meshes with the lower end.

  When the back lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550 is in the ascending end position, as shown in FIG. 152, the back lower back rotating decorative body 3568 is in the frame of the center accessory 2500 in front view (the front surface of the central liquid crystal display device 1500). ). In addition, when the back and bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is in the raised end position and the back and bottom back lifting drive motor 3512 rotates the lifting drive gear 3513 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the reverse operation is performed. Then, the rotating decorative body unit 3550 is lowered and returned to the lowered end position.

  Next, the back bottom post-rotation decorative body unit 3550 of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3500 will be described. The rear back rotating decorative body unit 3550 has a cylindrical shaft portion 3551a extending forward from the upper portion, and a movable rack gear 3551b extending vertically on the rear surface of the lower portion and meshing with the acceleration gear 3159. A shallow container-like decorative body base 3551 that extends vertically and is open at the front, and has a diameter larger than that of the shaft cylinder portion 3551a of the decoration body base 3551 and penetrates the shaft cylinder portion 3551a in the front-rear direction. Has a through hole 3552a inserted through a concentric circle, and a guide pin 3552b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the lower part to the front and is inserted into the guide slit 3516a of the elevating unit 3510, and the rear part is open. And a base cover 3552 attached to the front surface of the decorative body base 3551 in a shallow box shape.

  Further, the rear back rotation decorative body unit 3550 has a back gear rear rotation drive motor 3553 attached to the lower rear surface of the base cover 3552 and a spur gear shape attached to the rotation shaft of the back bottom rear rotation drive motor 3553. , A spur gear-shaped first driven gear 3555 that meshes with the rotational drive gear 3554 and is rotatably mounted between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and the first driven gear. 3555, a spur gear-like second driven gear 3556 that is rotatably mounted between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and a second driven gear 3556 that is engaged with the decorative body base 3551. A spur gear-shaped third driven gear 3557 and a third driven gear 3557 that are rotatably attached to the base cover 3552. A spur gear-shaped fourth driven gear 3558 rotatably mounted between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and an annular drive ring gear 3559a meshing with the fourth driven gear 3558. , A plurality of (three in this case) engaging protrusions 3559b protruding in the circumferential direction from the front end of the drive ring gear 3559a, and a flange shape protruding outward from the rear end of the drive ring gear 3559a. A drive gear member 3559 having a drive detection piece 3559c in which a part in the circumferential direction is cut off, four mounting holes 3560a formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and from the rear end toward the front The drive gear member 3559 has a plurality of engagement recesses 3560b that are recessed and into which the plurality of engagement projections 3559b of the drive gear member 3559 are inserted and engaged. It has substantially the same size as the outer diameter and coupling ring of the ring-shaped formed on the inner diameter 3560, the.

  The outer diameter and inner diameter of the drive ring gear 3559 a and the connecting ring 3560 are smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 3552 a of the base cover 3552 and larger than the outer diameter of the shaft cylinder portion 3551 a of the decorative body base 3551. Further, the drive ring gear 3559a and the connection ring 3560 have the same inner shape. In the rear back rotation decorative body unit 3550, the back bottom rear rotation drive motor 3553, the rotation drive gear 3554, the first driven gear 3555, the second driven gear 3556, the third driven gear 3557, the fourth driven gear 3558, and the drive gear member. 3559 and the connecting ring 3560 constitute a drive mechanism 3550A that is directly driven to rotate by the rear back rotation drive motor 3553 (see FIG. 134A, etc.).

  Further, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 penetrates the through hole 3552a, the connection ring 3560, and the drive gear member 3559 of the base cover 3552 from the front, and the shaft tube portion 3551a of the decorative body base 3551 is inserted. A cylindrical outer tube portion 3561a, a plurality of connecting recesses 3561b that are recessed forward from the rear end of the outer tube portion 3561a and formed at intervals in the circumferential direction, and an outer tube portion 3561a in front of the base cover 3552 Plate-shaped base portion 3561c extending outward from the front end of the base plate, and four guide slits 3561d penetrating back and forth through the base portion 3561c and extending radially about the axis of the outer cylinder portion. The rotating decorative body base 3561, and the rotating decorative body base 3561 are inserted into the outer cylinder portion 3561a and the decorative body base is inserted. A cylindrical inner tube portion 3562a through which the shaft tube portion 3551a of 3551 is inserted, a ring-shaped differential ring gear 3562b formed on the outer periphery of the rear end of the inner tube portion 3562a behind the drive gear member 3559, a differential ring A plurality of connection convex portions 3562c projecting from the front surface of the gear 3562b in the circumferential direction at intervals and inserted into the connection concave portions 3561b of the rotating decorative body base 3561, and flanges outward from the rear ends of the differential ring gear 3562b. A differential gear member 3562 having a differential detection piece 3562d that protrudes like a ring and is partially cut off in the circumferential direction, and meshes with a differential ring gear 3562b of the differential gear member 3562. A spur gear-shaped differential transmission gear 3 that is rotatably mounted coaxially with the fourth driven gear 3558 between the body base 3551 and the base cover 3552. 63, a spur gear-shaped damper gear 3564 meshing with the differential transmission gear 3563, and a damper gear 3564 that is rotatably attached to the damper gear 3564 in a state of imparting rotational resistance, and is attached to the rear surface of the decorative body base 3551. Rotating damper member 3565.

  The outer diameter of the outer cylinder portion 3561a in the rotating decorative body base 3561 is slightly smaller than the inner diameters of the drive gear member 3559 and the connection ring 3560, and the drive gear member 3559 and the connection ring 3560 can be rotated by the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 3561a. It is installed. Further, the inner diameter of the outer cylindrical portion 3561a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 3562a in the differential gear member 3562. The base portion 3561c is formed larger than the through hole 3552a of the base cover 3552. The guide slits 3561d are formed at an interval of 90 degrees with respect to the circumferential direction of the outer cylindrical portion 3561a.

  The inner cylinder portion 3562a of the differential gear member 3562 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft cylinder portion 3551a of the decorative body base 3551, and is rotatably attached by the shaft cylinder portion 3551a. Although not shown in detail, the rotary damper member 3565 gives rotational resistance to the rotary shaft to which the damper gear 3564 is attached by the viscous resistance of the viscous fluid sealed inside. In the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550, the rotating decorative body base 3561, the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, the damper gear 3564, and the rotating damper member 3565 are directly given rotational resistance by the rotating damper member 3565. The differential mechanism 3550B is configured (see FIG. 134 (b) and the like).

  Further, the rear back rotating decorative body unit 3550 has a cylindrical slide pin 3566a that protrudes rearward through the guide slit 3561d, and each guide is provided on the front surface of the base portion 3561c of the rotating decorative body base 3561. There are four decorative body sliders 3566 that are slidably mounted by slits 3561d, and front end holes 3567a that penetrate the front and rear and are rotatably inserted into slide pins 3566a of the decorative body slider 3566 on the front end side. And has a base end pin 3567b that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape and is rotatably inserted into the mounting hole 3560a of the connection ring 3560, and has four strip-shaped connection arms 3567, Four back bottoms attached to the front surface of each decorative body slider 3566 and decorated on the front surface A rotary decoration member 3568, and a, and four rotation restricting member 3569 which regulates the range of rotation of the connecting arm 3567 is attached to the rear surface of the backing under the rotated decorative body 3568.

  The back rear rotating decorative body 3568 is formed in a substantially square shape in front view, one of the four vertices is formed at a right angle, and the opposite vertex on the diagonal passing through the right vertex. Is formed at an acute angle. The back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 has a right vertex directed to the rotation center axis side of the rotating decorative body base 3561, and a diagonal line passing through the right vertex corresponds to the sliding direction of the decorative body slider 3566 (the rotating decorative body base 3561 It is attached to the decorative body slider 3566 so as to extend in the direction in which the guide slit 3561d extends. The four back-bottom rear rotating decorative bodies 3568 can slide so as to approach and separate from each other by the guide slits 3561d of the rotating decorative body base 3561.

  In the rear back rotation decorative body unit 3550, the decorative body slider 3566, the connecting arm 3567, the back lower back rotation decoration body 3568, and the rotation restricting member 3569 connect the drive mechanism 3550A and the differential mechanism 3550B to rotate. A transmitting connection mechanism 3550C is configured (see FIG. 134 (c) and the like).

  Further, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is attached between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and the drive detection piece 3559c of the drive gear member 3559 and the differential detection piece 3562d of the differential ring gear 3562b. A backside rear rotation detection sensor 3570 for detecting the rotation position of the rotating ornament body base 3561, and a fixed ornament body base 3571 that passes through the center of the rotation ornament body base 3561 from the front and is attached to the shaft cylinder portion 3551a of the ornament body base 3551. A back lower back decorative board 3572 attached to the front surface of the fixed decorative body base 3571 in front of the rotating decorative body base 3561 and behind the back lower back rotating decorative body 3568, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; Attached to the front surface of the fixed decorative body base 3571 between the back lower back decorative board 3572 and the back lower back rotated decorative body 3568. And are decorated on the front is provided with a disk-shaped subplantar after fixing the decorative body 3573 having a light-transmitting property with are subjected.

  Next, the operation of the back-under-rear rotation decoration body 3568 of the back-under-rear rotation decoration body unit 3550 in the back-under-rear movable effect unit 3500 will be described. In the normal state, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 has four back-bottom rear rotating decorative bodies 35 that slide toward the rotation center side of the rotating decorative body base 3561 and are in contact with each other. In a normal state, the drive gear member 3559 is stopped so that the notched portion of the drive detection piece 3559c is directed leftward when viewed from the front (see FIG. 134 (a)). Further, the differential gear member 3562 is stopped with the cutout portion of the differential detection piece 3562d facing rightward in front view (see FIG. 134 (b)). Further, the four connecting arms 3567 have an axis line connecting the center of the base end pin 3567b rotatably attached to the attachment hole 3560a of the connection ring 3560 and the center of the distal end hole 3567a of the connection ring 3560. A slide pin 3566a of a decorative body slider 3566 that extends so as to contact a circle centered on the rotational center and is rotatably attached to the tip hole 3567a is located on the rotational center side of the guide slit 3561d in the rotational decorative body base 3561. Located at the end. Further, in the normal state, the four connecting arms 3567 have distal end holes 3567a that are away from the proximal end pin 3567b in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 134C, etc.).

  In this normal state (see FIG. 135 (a) and the like), when the rotation drive gear 3554 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the rear back rotation drive motor 3553, the connection ring 3560 together with the drive gear member 3559 is obtained. Will rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the connection ring 3560 is to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the connection arm 3567 is connected via the proximal pin 3567b attached to the attachment hole 3560a, and the distal end hole 3567a of the connection arm 3567 is the decorative body slider. Since it tries to move away from the guide slit 3561d of the rotating decorative body base 3561 attached via the slide pin 3566a of 3566, the slide pin 3566a attached to the tip hole 3560a is within the guide slit 3561d. Try to slide to the center of rotation.

  However, in this normal state, the slide pin 3566a is located at the end of the guide slit 3561d on the rotation center side and cannot slide to the rotation center side any more. Accordingly, the connecting arm 3567 pulls the rotating decorative body base 3561 so as to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front via the guide slit 3561d. The rotational decoration body base 3561 is subjected to rotational resistance of the rotational damper member 3565 via the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, and the damper gear 3564. As a result, the rotating ornament base 3561 rotates counterclockwise.

  When the rotating decorative body base 3561 rotates counterclockwise in the front direction, the slide pin 3566a of the decorative body slider 3566 is positioned at the end of the guide slit 3561d on the rotation center side, and each decorative body slider The back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 attached to 3566 rotates in a state of being in contact with each other positioned toward the center of rotation (see FIG. 135 (b)). Further, during the rotation of the four back-under-rear rotating decoration bodies 3568 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the connecting arm 3567 is attached to the decoration body slider 3566 to which the back-under-rear rotation decoration body 3568 is attached. Since the force that slides to the back acts, the back and bottom rotating decorative body 3568 does not slide outward due to the centrifugal force.

  On the other hand, when the rotation drive gear 3554 is rotated counterclockwise by the front rear rotation drive motor 3553 in the normal state (see FIG. 136A, etc.), the drive gear member 3559 is connected together. The ring 3560 will rotate in the clockwise direction. When the connection ring 3560 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the connection arm 3567 is connected to the attachment hole 3560b via the base end pin 3567b, and the distal end hole 3567a of the connection arm 3567 is slid on the decorative body slider 3566. The slide pin 3566a attached to the distal end hole 3560a is moved via the guide slit 3561d because it tends to move toward the guide slit 3561d of the rotating decorative body base 3561 attached via the pin 3666a. An attempt is made to rotate the rotating ornament base 3561 in the clockwise direction.

  However, the rotational decoration body base 3561 is rotated clockwise by the rotational resistance of the rotational damper member 3565 acting on the rotational decoration body base 3561 via the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, and the damper gear 3564. The slide pin 3566a moves from the center of rotation to the outside direction along the guide slit 3561d (see FIG. 136 (b)). As a result, each slide pin 3566a (decorative body slider 3566) slides outward, so that each back-bottom rear rotating ornament 3568 slides outward so as to be separated from each other.

  When the connection ring 3560 further rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the attachment hole 3560a reaches the axis of the guide slit 3561d in the rotating decorative body base 3561, the connection arm 3567 extends along the guide slit 3561d. At the same time, the side surface of the connecting arm 3567 comes into contact with the rotation restricting member 3569, and further rotation of the connecting arm 3567 is prevented. In this state, the decoration body slider 3566 is slid to the outermost side via the connecting arm 3567, and the respective back lower back rotation decoration bodies 3568 are in the most separated state (see FIG. 136 (c)). ). In addition, in the state in which the back bottom back rotating decorative body 3568 is opened, the back bottom back fixed decorative body 3573 disposed behind the back bottom back rotating decorative body 3568 is visually recognized from between the back bottom back rotating decorative body 3568. (See FIGS. 133 (c) and 133 (d)).

  When the connecting ring 3560 further rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view with the back and rear rotating decorative body 3568 opened, the rotation of the connecting arm 3567 is restricted by the rotation restricting member 3569, and thus the rotating decorative body The base 3561 rotates in the clockwise direction against the rotational resistance of the rotary damper member 3565, and rotates in the clockwise direction in the state where the back and bottom rotating decorative body 3568 is opened (FIG. 136 ( see d)). When the rotating decoration body 3568 is opened after the back, it becomes larger and more conspicuous, and the player can be surprised.

  In addition, when closing the back and bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 in the open state, each of the back and bottom rear rotating drive motor 3553 is rotated by rotating the connecting ring 3560 in the counterclockwise direction in front view opposite to the above. The back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 slides toward the center of rotation and is in a closed state.

  In this way, the back-under-back movable effect unit 3500 moves the back-under-bottom post-rotation decorative body unit 3550 to the rising end position so that the back-under-bottom post-rotation decoration body 3568 is moved within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (the game area 5a). ), And the rotating decorative body 3568 can be made conspicuous. In this state, when the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the player can be surprised by rotating at the center of the game area 5a. Further, when the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 rotates in an open and enlarged state, which can further surprise the player. A variety of movable effects can be presented to the player.

[5-9j. Back four corner movable production unit]
Next, the back four-corner movable effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 145. FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the back four-corner movable effect unit of the back unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the back four-corner movable effect unit of the back unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back four-corner first production unit in the back four-corner movable production unit, as viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corners second unit in the back four corners movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corners second unit in the back four corners move effect unit from the rear. FIG.

  FIG. 143 (a) is a front view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable effect unit in the normal retreat position state, and FIG. 143 (b) is a state in which the back four corner first decorative body is in the appearance position. It is a front view of a back four corner first unit, (c) is a front view of a back four corner first unit in the state where a back four corner second decoration object appears. Further, FIG. 144 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the drive mechanism from the left side when the back four corner first decorative body is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit, and FIG. 144 (b) is in the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism in the middle of a back 4 corner 1st decoration body from an evacuation position to an appearance position, (c) is a back 4 corner 1st unit in an appearance position in a back 4 corner 1 unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism at the time from the left side. FIG. 145 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the drive mechanism from the left side when the back four corner second decorative body is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit, and FIG. 145 (b) is in the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism in the middle of a back four corner 2nd decoration body from an evacuation position to an appearance position, (c) is a back 4 corner 2nd decoration body of an appearance position in a back 4 corner 1 unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism at the time from the left side.

  The back four corner movable effect unit 3600 is attached to the four corners outside the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back four corner movable production unit 3600 is a back four corner first unit 3610 attached to the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the four corners in the back box 3010, and a back four corner second unit attached to the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the four corners in the back box 3010. 3650. The back four corner first unit 3610B attached to the lower left corner is attached to the back four corner first unit 3610A attached to the upper right corner in a state of being rotated 180 degrees around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. Further, the back four corner second unit 3650B attached to the lower right corner is attached to the back four corner second unit 3650A attached to the upper left corner in a state of being rotated 180 degrees around the axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  Hereinafter, the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610A) attached to the upper right corner and the back four corner second unit 3650 (3650A) attached to the upper left corner will be described, and the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610B) attached to the lower left corner. ) And the back four-corner second unit 3650 (3650B) attached to the lower right corner are only rotated 180 degrees with respect to those attached to the upper right corner and the upper left corner, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, as shown in FIG. 139, FIG. 140, etc., the back four corner first unit 3610 includes a shallow box-shaped unit base 3611 attached in the back box 3010 and open at the rear and lower sides, and a front surface of the unit base 3611. Is attached to the left side surface of the motor base 3612 and a shallow box-shaped motor base 3612 which is attached to substantially the center in the left-right direction and whose left side (facing the center in the left-right direction of the back box 3010) is open. The motor base cover 3613 covers the front side of the left side of the left side of the motor base 3612 that is open, and is attached to the left side of the motor base 3612 behind the front 3613 of the motor base cover. A box-shaped motor base cover rear 3614 whose right side and front side are open, and a right side surface of the motor base 3612 It is attached to the front four corner drive motor 3615 with the rotation shaft projecting into the motor base 3612 and the rotation shaft of the back four corner drive motor 3615 so that the left side is covered with the motor base cover front 3613. And a transmission member 3616 accommodated in the motor base 3612.

  The transmission member 3616 includes a cylindrical attachment shaft portion 3616a attached to the rotation shaft of the back four corner drive motor 3615, a disk-like base portion 3616b extending from the tip of the attachment shaft portion 3616a in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and a base A detection piece 3616c protruding in a plate shape to the right from a surface facing right in the portion 3616b, a first transmission portion 3617 provided on a surface facing left of the base portion 3616b, and a base portion And a second transmission portion 3618 provided on a surface facing the right side of 3616b.

  The first transmission portion 3617 of the transmission member 3616 includes a cylindrical first transmission pin 3617a projecting leftward from the vicinity of the periphery of the base portion 3616b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b, and the revolution of the first transmission pin 3617a. Between the first lock protrusion 3617b and the first lock protrusion 3617b and the first transmission pin 3617a, which protrude to the left concentrically from the left surface of the base portion 3616b with a radius smaller than the radius, A fan-shaped cutout from a uniform range to both sides from the axis connecting the center of the base portion 3616b and the center of the first transmission pin 3617a on the outer peripheral surface of the one lock projection 3617b toward the center of the first lock projection 3617b A first notch 3617c.

  The second transmission portion 3618 of the transmission member 3616 includes a columnar second transmission pin 3618a that protrudes rightward from the vicinity of the periphery of the base portion 3616b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b, and the revolution of the second transmission pin 3618a. A cylindrical second lock projection 3618b that protrudes rightward from the right surface of the base portion 3616b with a radius smaller than the radius, and between the second lock projection 3618b and the second transmission pin 3618a, A fan-shaped cutout from the equal range to both sides from the axis connecting the center of the base portion 3616b and the center of the second transmission pin 3618a on the outer peripheral surface of the two lock projections 3618b toward the center of the second lock projection 3618b A second cutout portion 3618c.

  In the transmission member 3616, the revolution radius of the first transmission pin 3617a and the second transmission pin 3618a is the same. Further, the second transmission pin 3618a protrudes from the position rotated 180 degrees around the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b with respect to the first transmission pin 3617a. Furthermore, the diameters of the first lock protrusion 3617b and the second lock protrusion 3618b are the same. Further, in the transmission member 3616, the first notch 3617c of the first transmission part 3617 and the second notch 3618c of the second transmission part 3618 are arranged on the circumference of the first lock projection 3617b and the second lock projection 3618b. On the other hand, it is formed in a fan shape within an angle range of 72 degrees.

  Further, the back four corner first unit 3610 includes a cylindrical transmission shaft member 3619 having both ends attached to the motor base 3612 and the motor base cover rear 3614 at positions rearward of the transmission member 3616, and a transmission shaft. The working member 3619 has a working arm 3620 a that is rotatably attached by passing through the member 3619 and is rotated by being transmitted by the rotation of the transmission member 3616 from the first transmission portion 3617 and extending in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a link shaft member 3621 whose both ends are attached to the motor base 3612 and the motor base cover rear 3614 below the first transmitted member 3620 directly below the transmitted shaft member 3619. The link shaft member 3621 is rotatably mounted by passing through the proximal end side. A link arm 3622 extending in the direction perpendicular to the working arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620 and an upper end rotatably attached to the tip of the working arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620. Further, the distal end of the link arm 3622 is rotatably attached so that the link arm 3622 extends in parallel with the action arm 3620a below the upper end, and a link member 3623 extending downward, and a lower end of the link member 3623 A back four corner first decorative body 3624 attached to the front and dressed as a shuriken, and a back four corner first decorative board 3625 attached to the rear surface of the back four corner first decorative body 3624 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front. And.

  The first transmitted member 3620 has a working arm 3620a extending from the left end and a shaft portion 3620b through which the transmitted shaft member 3619 passes, and a right end of the shaft portion 3620b extending in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A disc-shaped first transmitted body 3620c, a first transmission slit 3620d that is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted body 3620c toward the center and into which the first transmission pin 3617a is slidably inserted; On both sides of the first transmission slit 3620d on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body 3620c, there is a pair of first lock recesses 3620e that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  In the first transmission slit 3620d, the direction in which the first transmission slit 3620d opens in the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted body 3620c is substantially the same as the direction in which the action arm 3620a extends. The first lock recess 3620e is recessed with an arc having a slightly larger diameter than the diameter of the first lock protrusion 3617b of the first transmission portion 3617. Further, the pair of first lock recesses 3620e are formed so that the lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3620 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In the state where the back four corner first unit 3610 (the back four corner movable production unit 3600) is assembled, the first transmitted member 3620 includes the first transmitted body 3620c and the first transmission pin 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617. The first lock protrusion 3617b and the position in the left-right direction are the same. Accordingly, the first transmission pin 3617a can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3620d, and the rotation can be transmitted through the first transmission pin 3617a and the first transmission slit 3620d. Further, a part of the first lock protrusion 3617b can be inserted into the first lock recess 3620e, and a part of the first lock protrusion 3617b is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e, thereby The rotation of the transmitted member 3620 can be restricted (locked).

  The link member 3623 is rotatably attached to the distal end of the action arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620 and the distal end of the link arm 3622 by link pins 3626, respectively. In addition, a link cover 3627 is attached to the upper front portion of the link member 3623. The back four corner first unit 3610 forms a parallel link with the motor base 3612, the action arm 3620 a of the first transmitted member 3620, the link arm 3622, and the link member 3623, and the first transmitted member 3620. , The back four corners first decorative body 3624 can be moved up and down via the link member 3623.

  Further, the back four corners first unit 3610 closes the rear end opening of the unit base 3611 and has a flat base cover 3628 attached to the unit base 3611 and a columnar transmitted shaft member extending left and right. It has a second action pin 3629a that revolves around 3619, and is attached rotatably by a transmission shaft member 3619 passing between the motor base 3612 and the first transmission member 3620. Revolving around the axis extending in the front-rear direction due to the revolution of the second transmitted member 3629 that rotates when the rotation from the second transmitting portion 3618 in the transmitting member 3616 is transmitted and the second action pin 3629a of the second transmitted member 3629. The first connecting pin 3630a extends rearward in a columnar shape, and the unit base is positioned behind the transmission shaft member 3619. Rotation coupling member 3630 rotatably attached by a base 3611 and a base cover 3628, and a unit base 3611 and a base cover 3628 below the rotation coupling member 3630 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. And a back four-corner second decorative body base 3631 having a second connecting pin 3631a projecting in a columnar shape rearward at a position eccentric from the rotation center.

  Further, the back four corner first unit 3610 has one end side rotatably attached to the first connecting pin 3630a of the rotary connecting member 3630 and the opposite end side of the back four corner second decorative body base 3631. A belt-like connecting arm 3632 rotatably attached to the second connecting pin 3631a, and a back four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the front surface of the back four corner second decorative body base 3631 and extending in an arc shape. The back four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the rear surface of the back four corner second decorative body 3633 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the rear four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the rear surface near the front end. And a substrate cover 3635 that covers a part of the rear four corners second decorative substrate 3634 and a detection piece 36 of the transmission member 3616 that is attached to the motor base 3612. A back corner lift detection sensor 3636 that can detect 6c, and a.

  In the second transmitted member 3629, a second action pin 3629a protrudes from the periphery to the right, a disk-shaped second transmitted body portion 3629b centered on the transmitted shaft member 3619, and a second transmitted body portion 3629b. On both sides of the second transmission slit 3629c that is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the second transmission slit 3629c into which the second transmission pin 3618a is slidably inserted, and the second transmission slit 3629c on the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted body 3629b. And a pair of second lock recesses 3629d that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The direction of the second transmission slit 3629c of the second transmitted member 3629 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted body 3629b is opposite to the second action pin 3629a across the transmitted shaft member 3619. It is suitable. The second lock recess 3629d is recessed with an arc having a slightly larger diameter than the diameter of the second lock protrusion 3618b of the second transmission portion 3618. The pair of second lock recesses 3629d is formed so that the lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3629 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In the state where the back four-corner first unit 3610 (back four-corner movable production unit 3600) is assembled, the second transmitted member 3629 includes the second transmitted body 3629b and the second transmitting pin 3618a and the second transmitting pin 3618a. The position in the left-right direction is the same as that of the second lock protrusion 3618b. Accordingly, the second transmission pin 3618a can be inserted into the second transmission slit 3629c, and rotation can be transmitted through the second transmission pin 3618a and the second transmission slit 3629c. Further, a part of the second lock protrusion 3618b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3629d, and a part of the second lock protrusion 3618b is inserted into the second lock recess 3629d, so that the second The rotation of the transmitted member 3629 can be restricted (locked).

  The rotation connecting member 3630 extends in a fan shape from the center of rotation in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and has a plate-like main body portion 3630b in which the first connection pin 3630a protrudes rearward from the peripheral edge of the rear surface, and a plate from the periphery of the main body portion 3630b to the front. The projecting piece 3630c projecting in a shape and a part of the projecting piece 3630c are notched so that the second action pin 3629a of the second transmitted member 3629 is slidably inserted from the front end toward the rear. Two actuated portions 3630d.

  The rotation connecting member 3630 is attached with the rotation center at the same height as the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3629. In the rotation connecting member 3630, the second acting member 3629 rotates and the second acting pin 3629a revolves, whereby the second acting portion 3630d is pressed by the second acting pin 3629a and rotates.

  The back four-corner second decorative body 3633 is formed in a shape in which the edge of a blade such as a shuriken or a sword is trapped, and the side with the narrowed blade edge is attached to the back four-corner second decorative body base 3631.

  The back four corner first unit 3610 forms a rotation link with the base cover 3628, the rotation connecting member 3630, the back four corner second decorative body base 3631, and the connection arm 3632, and when the rotation connecting member 3630 rotates. The back four corner second decorative body base 3631 rotates in the same direction via the connecting arm 3632. Accordingly, the back four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3631 can be rotated (turned) so that the front end side thereof is directed downward.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 141 and FIG. 142, the back four corner second unit 3650 includes a shallow box-shaped unit base 3651 mounted in the back box 3010 and opened rearward and downward, and a unit base 3651 A shallow box-shaped motor base 3652 that is attached to the front surface at substantially the center in the left-right direction and that opens to the right (the one that faces the center in the left-right direction of the back box 3010), and is attached to the right side surface of the motor base 3652. The motor base cover front 3653 covering the front side of the front side in the front-rear direction of the right side surface of the motor base 3652 that is open, and attached to the right side of the motor base 3652 behind the motor base cover front 3653. A box-shaped motor base cover rear 3654 that is open on the left side and the front side, and the left side of the motor base 3652 The back four corner drive motor 3655 with the rotation shaft protruding into the motor base 3652 and the rotation shaft of the back four corner drive motor 3655 and the right side is covered with the motor base cover front 3653. The transmission member 3656 accommodated in the motor base 3652 is provided.

  The transmission member 3656 includes a cylindrical attachment shaft portion 3656a attached to the rotation shaft of the back four corner drive motor 3655, a disk-like base portion 3656b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the tip of the attachment shaft portion 3656a, and a base A detection piece 3656c protruding in a plate shape to the right from a surface facing right in the portion 3656b, a first transmission portion 3657 provided on a surface facing right of the base portion 3656b, and a base portion A second transmission portion 3658 provided on a surface facing the left side of 3656b.

  The first transmission portion 3657 of the transmission member 3656 includes a columnar first transmission pin 3657a projecting rightward from the vicinity of the periphery of the base portion 3656b and parallel to the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b, and the revolution of the first transmission pin 3657a. A cylindrical first lock protrusion 3657b that protrudes rightward from the right surface of the base portion 3656b with a radius smaller than the radius, and between the first lock protrusion 3657b and the first transmission pin 3657a, A fan-shaped cutout from the equal range to both sides from the axis line connecting the center of the base portion 3656b and the center of the first transmission pin 3657a on the outer peripheral surface of the one lock projection 3657b toward the center of the first lock projection 3657b. A first notch 3657c.

  The second transmission portion 3658 of the transmission member 3656 includes a cylindrical second transmission pin 3658a projecting leftward from the vicinity of the periphery of the base portion 3656b and parallel to the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b, and the revolution of the second transmission pin 3658a. A cylindrical second lock projection 3658b projecting leftward from the left surface of the base portion 3656b with a radius smaller than the radius, and between the second lock projection 3658b and the second transmission pin 3658a, A fan-shaped cutout from the equal range on both sides to the center of the second lock projection 3658b from the axis connecting the center of the base portion 3656b and the center of the second transmission pin 3658a on the outer peripheral surface of the two lock projection 3658b A second notch 3658c.

  In the transmission member 3656, the revolution radius of the first transmission pin 3657a and the second transmission pin 3658a is the same. The second transmission pin 3658a protrudes from the first transmission pin 3657a from a position rotated 180 degrees around the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b. Furthermore, the diameters of the first lock protrusion 3657b and the second lock protrusion 3658b are the same. Further, the transmission member 3656 includes a first notch portion 3657c of the first transmission portion 3657 and a second notch portion 3658c of the second transmission portion 3658 arranged on the circumference of the first lock protrusion 3657b and the second lock protrusion 3658b. On the other hand, it is formed in a fan shape within an angle range of 72 degrees.

  The back four corner second unit 3650 includes a cylindrical transmission shaft member 3659 having both ends attached to the motor base 3652 and the motor base cover rear 3654 at positions rearward of the transmission member 3656, and a transmission shaft. The member 3659 is rotatably attached by penetrating the member 3659 and has a working arm 3660a extending in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis by transmitting the rotation of the transmission member 3656 from the first transmission portion 3657. And a link shaft member 3661 having both ends attached to the motor base 3652 and the motor base cover rear 3654 below the first transmitted member 3660 directly below the transmitted shaft member 3659. The link shaft member 3661 is rotatably mounted by passing through the proximal end side. A link arm 3662 extending in the direction perpendicular to the working arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660 in the direction perpendicular thereto, and an upper end rotatably attached to the tip of the working arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660. Further, the distal end of the link arm 3661 is rotatably attached so that the link arm 3661 extends in parallel with the action arm 3660a below the upper end, and a link member 3663 extending downward, and a lower end of the link member 3663 The back four corners first decorative body 3664 attached to the front and dressed as a shuriken, and the back four corners first decorative board 3665 attached to the rear surface of the back four corners first decorative body 3664 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front. And.

  The first transmitted member 3660 has a working arm 3660a extending from the left end and a shaft portion 3660b through which the transmitted shaft member 3659 passes, and a right end of the shaft portion 3660b extending in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A disc-shaped first transmitted body 3660c, a first transmission slit 3660d that is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted body 3660c toward the center and into which the first transmission pin 3657a is slidably inserted; On both sides of the first transmission slit 3660d on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body 3660c, there is a pair of first lock recesses 3660e that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  In the first transmission slit 3660d, the direction of opening in the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted body 3660c is substantially the same as the direction in which the action arm 3660a extends. The first lock recess 3660e is recessed with an arc having a slightly larger diameter than the diameter of the first lock protrusion 3657b of the first transmission portion 3657. The pair of first lock recesses 3660e are formed so that the lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3660 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In the state where the back four corners second unit 3650 (back four corners movable production unit 3600) is assembled, the first transmitted member 3660 includes the first transmitted body 3660c and the first transmission pin 3657a of the first transmission unit 3657 and The position in the left-right direction is the same as that of the first lock protrusion 3657b. Accordingly, the first transmission pin 3657a can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3660d, and the rotation can be transmitted via the first transmission pin 3657a and the first transmission slit 3660d. Further, a part of the first lock projection 3657b can be inserted into the first lock recess 3660e, and a part of the first lock projection 3657b is inserted into the first lock recess 3660e. The rotation of the transmitted member 3660 can be restricted (locked).

  To the link member 3663, the tip of the action arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660 and the tip of the link arm 3661 are rotatably attached by link pins 3666, respectively. Further, a link cover 3667 is attached to the upper front portion of the link member 3663. The back four-corner second unit 3650 forms a parallel link with the motor base 3652, the action arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660, the link arm 3661, and the link member 3663, and the first transmitted member 3660. , The back four corners first decorative body 3664 can be moved up and down via the link member 3663.

  Further, the back four corners second unit 3650 closes the rear end opening of the unit base 3651, has a flat base cover 3668 attached to the unit base 3651, and a columnar transmitted shaft member extending left and right. The second action pin 3669a revolves around the center 3659, and the transmission shaft member 3659 passes between the motor base 3652 and the first transmission member 3660 so as to be rotatable. Revolving around the axis extending in the front-rear direction due to the revolution of the second transmitted member 3669 rotated by the rotation from the second transmitting portion 3658 in the transmitting member 3656 and the second action pin 3669a of the second transmitted member 3669. The first connecting pin 3670a extends in a columnar shape to the rear, and the unit base is located behind the transmitted shaft member 3659. Rotation coupling member 3670 rotatably attached by the base 3651 and the base cover 3668, and the unit base 3651 and the base cover 3668 below the rotation coupling member 3670 so as to be rotatable around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. And a back four-corner second decorative body base 3671 having a second connecting pin 3671a protruding rearward in a columnar shape at a position eccentric from the center of rotation.

  Further, the back four corner second unit 3650 has one end side rotatably attached to the first connecting pin 3670a of the rotary connecting member 3670, and the opposite end side of the back four corner second decorative body base 3671. A band-plate-like connecting arm 3672 rotatably attached to the second connecting pin 3671a and a back-four corner second decorative body 3673 attached to the front surface of the back four-corner second decorative body base 3671 and extending in an arc shape. And a back four corner second decorative board 3684 which is attached to the rear surface of the back four corner second decorative body 3673 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear surface near the tip of the back four corner second decorative body 3673. And a board cover 3675 that covers a part of the rear four corners second decorative board 3684 and a detection piece 36 of a transmission member 3656 that is attached to the motor base 3652. A back corner lift detection sensor 3676 that can detect 6c, and a.

  In the second transmitted member 3669, a second action pin 3669a protrudes from the periphery to the left, a disk-shaped second transmitted body portion 3669b centering on the transmitted shaft member 3659, and a second transmitted body portion 3669b. On the both sides of the second transmission slit 3669c on the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted body 3669b and the second transmission slit 3669c in which the second transmission pin 3658a is slidably inserted. And a pair of second lock recesses 3669d that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The direction of the second transmission slit 3669c of the second transmitted member 3669 that opens to the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted body 3669b is opposite to the second action pin 3669a across the transmitted shaft member 3659. It is suitable. The second lock recess 3669d is recessed with an arc having a slightly larger diameter than the diameter of the second lock protrusion 3658b of the second transmission portion 3658. The pair of second lock recesses 3669d are formed so that the lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3669 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In the state where the back four-corner second unit 3650 (back four-corner movable production unit 3600) is assembled, the second transmitted member 3669 includes the second transmitted body 3669b and the second transmitting pin 3658a of the second transmitting unit 3658. The position in the left-right direction is the same as that of the second lock protrusion 3658b. Accordingly, the second transmission pin 3658a can be inserted into the second transmission slit 3669c, and the rotation can be transmitted via the second transmission pin 3658a and the second transmission slit 3669c. Further, a part of the second lock protrusion 3658b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3669d, and a part of the second lock protrusion 3658b is inserted into the second lock recess 3669d, so that the second The rotation of the transmitted member 3669 can be restricted (locked).

  The rotary connecting member 3670 extends in a fan shape from the center of rotation in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a plate-like main body portion 3670b in which a first connecting pin 3670a protrudes rearward from the peripheral edge of the rear surface, and a plate from the periphery of the main body portion 3670b to the front. A protruding piece 3670c protruding in a shape and a part of the protruding piece 3670c are notched so that the second action pin 3669a of the second transmitted member 3669 is slidably inserted from the front end toward the rear. Two actuated portions 3670d.

  The rotation connecting member 3670 has a rotation center attached at the same height as the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3669. In the rotation connecting member 3670, when the second transmitted member 3669 rotates and the second action pin 3669a revolves, the second acting part 3670d is pressed by the second action pin 3669a and rotates.

  The back four corner second decorative body 3673 is formed in the shape of the blade edge of a knife such as a shuriken or a sword, and the narrowed side of the blade edge is attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3671.

  The back four corner second unit 3650 forms a rotation link with the base cover 3668, the rotation connecting member 3670, the back four corner second decorative body base 3671, and the connecting arm 3672, and when the rotation connecting member 3670 rotates. The back four corner second decorative body base 3671 rotates in the same direction via the connecting arm 3672. Thus, the back four corner second decorative body 3673 attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3671 can be rotated (turned) so that the tip side thereof is directed downward.

  Subsequently, operations of the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 in the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. The back four-corner movable production unit 3600 includes a back four-corner first unit 3610 and a back four-corner second unit 3650. The back four-corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673, the back four-corner second decorative boards 3634 and 3675, and the board covers 3635 and 3675. The back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673, the back four corner second decorative substrates 3634 and 3675, and the substrate covers 3635 and 3675 are formed point symmetrical. Accordingly, here, only the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610A) in the upper right corner when viewed from the front will be described, and description of the other back four corner first unit 3610B and the back four corner second unit 3650 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (a) and the like, the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 (back four corner first unit 3610) is in a state in which the back four corner first decorative body 3624 moving up and down approaches the unit base 3611. In addition, the rotating back four corner second decorative body 3633 is in a state of extending horizontally. In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the back four corners first decorative body 3624 and the back four corners second decorative body 3633 are located at a retracted position that is hardly visible from the player side.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIGS. 144 (a) and 145 (a), in the transmission member 3616, the first transmission pin 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617 is located immediately above the rotation center, and The second transmission pin 3618a of the second transmission portion 3618 is located immediately below the rotation center. In a normal state, the action arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620 extends obliquely upward and forward, and the first transmission slit 3620d opens obliquely upward and forward, and the first transmission slit 3620d. The first lock projection 3617b of the first transmission portion 3617 is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e below the first lock recess 3620e. Thus, the back four corners first decorative body 3624 is positioned at the rising end via the link member 3623, and the first transmitted member 3620 is locked so as not to rotate.

  In a normal state, in the second transmitted member 3629, the second action pin 3629a is positioned obliquely upward and rearward with respect to the rotation center, and the second transmission slit 3629c opens obliquely downward and forward. The second lock projection 3618b of the second transmission portion 3618 is inserted into the second lock recess 3629d above the second transmission slit 3629c. As a result, the back four corner second decorative body 3633 extends substantially horizontally via the rotary connecting member 3630, the connecting arm 3632, and the back four corner second decorative body base 3631, and the second transmitted member 3629 cannot be rotated. Locked. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corner elevation detection sensor 3636.

  In this normal state, when the transmission member 3616 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view so that the first transmission pin 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617 moves rearward by the back four corner drive motor 3615, the first The transmission pin 3617a revolves so as to move rearward and enters the first transmission slit 3620d of the first transmitted member 3620, and at the same time, the first lock protrusion 3617b is released from the first lock recess 3620e and locked. The first transmitted member 3620 is rotated and released. Further, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 revolves, and the back four corner elevation detection sensor 3636 is in a non-detected state. When the first transmission pin 3617a further revolves counterclockwise, the first transmission pin 3617a presses the inner surface of the first transmission slit 3620d downward, and the first transmitted member 3620 pushes the transmitted shaft member 3619. It will rotate in the clockwise direction around the center.

  When the first transmitted member 3620 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the left side, the tip of the action arm 3620a extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis rotates so that the action arm 3620a moves downward. The back four corner first decorative body 3624 moves downward through the link member 3623 attached to the tip (see FIG. 144 (b)). At this time, since the link member 3623 is attached by a parallel link by the action arm 3620a and the link arm 3622, the back four corners first decorative body 3624 moves downward in the same posture.

  On the other hand, in the second transmission portion 3618 of the transmission member 3616, the second transmission pin 3618a revolves away from the second transmitted member 3629, and the second lock projection 3618b is inserted into the second lock recess 3629d. In addition, the second transmitted member 3629 does not rotate, and the back four corners second decorative body 3633 does not rotate from the retracted position.

  When the first transmission pin 3617a further revolves counterclockwise in the left side view and is disengaged from the first transmission slit 3620d, the rotation of the first transmitted member 3620 stops, and the first four corners of the first decoration The downward movement of the body 3624 stops (see FIGS. 143 (b) and 144 (c)). When the first transmission pin 3617a is disengaged from the first transmission slit 3620d, the first lock projection 3617b enters the first lock recess 3620e above the first transmission slit 3620d, and the first lock projection 3617b The rotation of one transmission member 3620 is locked. Therefore, the first transmitted member 3620 does not rotate further in the clockwise direction, and the back four corners first decorative body 3624 is maintained in a stopped state. In this state, as shown in FIG. 154, the back four corners first decorative body 3624 is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 and can be viewed from the player side. That is, the back four corner first decorative body 3624 is in the state of the appearance position.

  When the back four corner first decorative body 3624 is in the appearance position, the back four corner drive motor 3615 rotates the transmission member 3616 in the opposite direction (clockwise in the left side view), the reverse of the above. By operating, the first transmitted member 3620 rotates counterclockwise, the back four corner first decorative body 3624 rises via the action arm 3620a, and returns to the normal state (retracted position state). Then, when the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corner elevation detection sensor 3636, the rotation (drive) of the back four corner drive motor 3615 stops. In the present embodiment, in the transmission member 3616 (first transmission portion 3617), the rotation range in which the first transmission pin 3617a is inserted into the first transmission slit 3620d is the first specific rotation range.

  The back four corner first unit 3610 is in a normal state (the state shown in FIG. 145 (a)), and the transmission member 3616 is moved so that the second transmission pin 3618a of the second transmission portion 3618 is moved rearward by the back four corner drive motor 3615. Is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the left side, the second transmission pin 3618a revolves so as to move rearward and enters the second transmission slit 3629c of the second transmitted member 3629, and at the same time, the second The lock projection 3618b is released from the second lock recess 3629d and the lock is released, and the second transmitted member 3629 becomes rotatable. Further, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 revolves, and the back four corner elevation detection sensor 3636 is in a non-detected state. When the second transmission pin 3618a further revolves in the clockwise direction, the second transmission pin 3618a presses the inner surface of the second transmission slit 3629c upward, and the second transmitted member 3629 centers on the transmitted shaft member 3619. Will rotate counterclockwise.

  When the second transmitted member 3629 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the second action pin 3629a of the second received member 3629 revolves so as to move downward, and below the second action pin 3629a. , The rotation coupling member 3630 rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front) so that the second operated portion 3630d of the rotation coupling member 3630 moves downward. When the rotating connecting member 3630 rotates, the back four corner second decorative body base 3631 connected by the connecting arm 3632 rotates in the same direction as the rotating connecting member 3630 and is attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3631. The back four-corner second decorative body 3633 is also rotated in the same direction (the direction in which the tip side moves downward, that is, the direction around the anti-emetic blood in front view) (see FIG. 145 (d)).

  On the other hand, in the first transmission portion 3617 of the transmission member 3616, the first transmission pin 3617a revolves away from the first transmitted member 3620, and the first lock protrusion 3617b is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e. The first transmitted member 3620 does not rotate, and the back four corners first decorative body 3624 does not move from the retracted position.

  Then, when the second transmission pin 3618a further revolves in the clockwise direction in the left side view and is disengaged from the second transmission slit 3629c, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3629 stops, and the back four corners second decorative body The rotation of the tip of 3633 toward the lower side stops (see FIGS. 143 (c) and 145 (c)). When the second transmission pin 3618a is disengaged from the second transmission slit 3629c, the second lock projection 3618b enters the second lock recess 3629d above the second transmission slit 3629c, and the second lock projection 3618b The rotation of the two transmitted members 3629 is locked. Therefore, the second transmitted member 3629 is not further rotated counterclockwise, and the back four corner second decorative body 3633 is maintained in a state where the rotation is stopped. In this state, as shown in FIG. 143 (c), the back four corner second decorative body 3633 is inclined by about 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and as shown in FIG. 153, the back four corner second decorative body 3633 is centered. It can be visually recognized from the player side through the frame of the accessory 2500. That is, the back four corner second decorative body 3633 is in the appearance position.

  When the transmission member 3616 is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the left side) by the back four corner drive motor 3615 with the back corner second decorative body 3633 in the appearance position, the above is reversed. As a result, the second transmitted member 3629 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the back four-corner second decorative body 3633 rotates through the rotary connecting member 3630, the connecting arm 3632, and the like so that the tip end side thereof is raised. The normal state (retracted position state) is restored. Then, when the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corner elevation detection sensor 3636, the rotation (drive) of the back four corner drive motor 3615 stops. In the present embodiment, in the transmission member 3616 (second transmission portion 3618), the rotation range in which the second transmission pin 3618a is inserted into the second transmission slit 3629c is the second specific rotation range.

  As described above, the back four-corner movable production unit 3600 causes the back four-corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 to appear or the back four-corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 to appear by the rotation of one back four-corner drive motor 3615 and 3655. And a back four corner first unit 3610A in the upper right corner, a back four corner first unit 3610B in the lower left corner, a back four corner second unit 3650A in the upper left corner, and a back four corner second unit 3650B in the lower right corner. Since each of them can be operated independently, more various movable effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[5-10. Movable production on game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 to 154. FIG. 146 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the upper movable decoration body of the upper movable effect unit in the center role. FIG. 147 is a front view of the game board showing a state where the back upper decoration body of the back movable movable unit in the back unit is in the first appearance position, and FIG. 148 is a back decoration of the back movable movable unit in the back unit. It is a front view of the game board in which the body is in the second appearance position, and the back bottom front first decorative body and the back bottom front second decorative body of the back bottom front movable effect unit are in the appearance position.

  In addition, FIG. 149 shows that the pair of shutters is open with the first decorative surface of the back right rotation decoration body of the back right movable effect unit in the back unit facing forward, and the back left rotation effect unit of the back left movable effect unit is rotated to the left. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of the appearance position of the back left protrusion decoration object in the state where the first decoration surface of the decoration object was directed forward. Further, FIG. 150 is a game board showing the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable effect unit and the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable effect unit in the back unit with their second decorative surfaces facing forward. FIG. FIG. 151 is a game board showing the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable effect unit and the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable effect unit in the back unit with their third decorative surfaces facing forward. FIG.

  Further, FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-under-rear rotating decorative body of the back-under-back movable effect unit in the back unit is rotated counterclockwise at the rising end position. Further, FIG. 153 shows the rear back and rear rotating decorative body of the rear back movable movable unit in the back unit rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front at the rising end position, and the back four corner second of the back four corner movable directivity unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of a decoration body appearance position. FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing the back four corner first decorative body of the back four corner movable effect unit in the back unit in the appearance position.

  As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, in the game board 5, in a normal state, the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 disposed rearwardly through the frame of the center accessory 2500 is well visible from the player side. can do. In the normal state, the upper movable ornament 2561 of the upper movable effect unit 2560 in the center accessory 2500 is raised, and the first rotary ornament 2572 and the second rotary ornament of the lower movable effect unit 2570. The body 2573 and the third rotating decorative body 2574 are stopped from rotating. Furthermore, in a normal state, the back upper decoration body 3152 of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is positioned at a retreat position on the upper rear side from the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a state where the top and bottom are reversed, and a part thereof It is in a state where it protrudes downward from the upper side in the frame of the center accessory 2500 and can be visually recognized from the player side.

  Further, in a normal state, the back bottom front first decorative body 3209 and the back bottom front second decorative body 3212 of the front back front movable effect production unit 3200 are visible from the player side behind the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It is located in a difficult retreat position. Further, in a normal state, the back right rotating decorative body 3310 and the back left rotating decorative body 3410 of the back right movable effect unit 3300 and the back left movable effect unit 3400 are respectively forward (front) of the first decorative surfaces 3310a and 3410a. Further, the pair of shutters 3312 of the back-right rotation decoration body 3310 are closed, and the two back-left protruding decoration bodies 3421 of the back-left rotation decoration body 3410 are the back-left rotation decoration. The body 3410 is located at a retracted position that is invisible.

  Furthermore, in a normal state, the back bottom back rotating decoration body 3568 of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3500 is located at the lower end position, and a part can be seen from the lower side of the center accessory 2500 so that it can be seen from the player side. It faces the frame. Further, in a normal state, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 of the back four corner movable effect production unit 3600 are from within the frame of the center accessory 2500 that is difficult to see from the player side. Is also located in the outward retracted position.

  This game board 5 is displayed on the table according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by accepting game balls from the normal state at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Movable production unit 2560, front and lower movable production unit 2570, back upper movable production unit 3100, back lower front movable production unit 3200, back right movable production unit 3300, back left movable production unit 3400, back lower rear movable production unit 3500, and The back four corner movable effect unit 3600 performs a predetermined movable effect.

  Specifically, for example, in the upper movable effect unit 2560 of the center accessory 2500, the upper movable decorative body 2561 is lowered from the normal position by the rotational drive of the upper drive motor 2563, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is moved. It is located at the upper front (see FIG. 146). As a result, the upper part of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is covered with the upper movable decorative body 2561, so that the player can think that the gaming state will change, and the expectation for the game will be enhanced. be able to.

  Also, in the lower movable production unit 2570 of the center accessory 2500, the lower rotary motor 2575 causes the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 to rotate ( See FIG. 96 (b)). Thereby, it can be made to think that there is something good for a player, and the expectation with respect to a game can be raised.

  Further, in the back movable production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back top decorative body 3152 is lowered from the retracted position to the first appearance position by the rotational drive of the back top drive motor 3103 with the top and bottom reversed ( (See FIG. 147). In this state, the pair of openings 3152a of the backside decorative body 3152 and the sub-decoration 3157a facing the opening 3152a are partially visible from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. it can. As a result, the predetermined character deceived by the back decorative body 3152 looks upside down from above, so that the player can be surprised and entertained by the appearance of the character. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games. In this state, when the back upper auxiliary decoration body 3157 is reciprocated left and right by the rotational drive of the upper back auxiliary drive motor 3159, the pupil (sub decoration 3157a) of a predetermined character being deceived by the upper upper decoration body 3152 ) Will sway left and right, which can surprise the player and entertain the movable performance.

  Further, in the backside movable effect unit 3100, the backside decorative body 3152 is further moved to the lower second appearance position by the rotational driving of the backside drive motor 3103 while the backside decorative body 3152 is in the first appearance position. (See FIG. 148). When the backside decorative body 3152 descends from the first appearance position to the second appearance position, the top and bottom of the predetermined character being deceived by the backtop decorative body 3152 is reversed, and the top and bottom is in a normal state. Since it descends while rotating, the movement of the back upper decoration body 3152 becomes a dynamic movement, which can attract the player's interest strongly and can greatly surprise the player.

  In the state where the back decorative body 3152 is in the second appearance position, as shown in the drawing, the top and bottom of the predetermined character being deceived by the back top decorative body 3152 is in a normal state, and the back decorative body 3152 is It is located approximately in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500. Thereby, the back decorative body 3152 becomes conspicuous in the game area 5a, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and it can be greatly anticipated that an advantageous gaming state will occur to the player. . Even in the state of the second appearance position, the rotation of the back side auxiliary drive motor 3159 can turn the eyes of the predetermined character that is being deceived by the back side decoration body 3152 to the left and right, making the player more enjoyable. Can do.

  In this back movable production unit 3100, the back top decorative body 3152 is moved up and down between the retracted position and the first appearance position, moved up and down between the first appearance position and the second appearance position, Can be moved up and down between the first appearance position and the second appearance position, and at the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the pupil can be prevented from jerking. By combining them, it is possible to perform a variety of movable effects and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  Further, in the lower back front movable effect unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, when the rear upper decorative body 3152 of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is in the second appearance position, the rear lower front drive motor 3202 is rotated to drive the back of the retracted position. The lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are moved to the appearance position located in the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 148). Thus, as shown in the figure, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 with a hand is positioned in front of the back upper decorative body 3152 with a head (face), so that a predetermined character casts a spell. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the pair of shutters 3312 are separated by a back right shutter solenoid (not shown) in a normal state (a state where the first decorative surface 3310a is stopped to rotate forward). Thus, the inner decorative body 3313 is caused to face forward from between the shutters 3312 (see FIG. 149), and the inner decorative body 3313 is decorated with light emission. Thereby, the arrival of an opportunity etc. can be suggested to a player.

  Further, in the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right rotation decoration body 3310 is rotated by the back right drive motor 3304. Thereby, it is possible to make the player feel a sign that the gaming state is changed, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right drive motor 3304 rotates the back right rotating decorative body 3310 to stop the second decorative surface 3310b forward (front) (see FIG. 150). As a result, the back right character decoration 3318 of the second decorative surface 3310b can be visually recognized from the player side, so that the player can foresee the arrival of the chance by the recognition of the back right character decoration 3318.

  Further, in the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right drive motor 3304 rotates the back right rotating decorative body 3310 to stop the third decorative surface 3310c toward the front (front) (see FIG. 151). As a result, the ball guiding member 3322 that spirals up and down in the back right effect space 3321 can be viewed from the player side, so that the game ball is supplied to the player in the back right effect space 3321. It is possible to make it seem that the timing of the game being played, that is, the upper prize winning opening 2006 will be opened, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game.

  Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the back left rotation is performed by driving the back left decoration body solenoid 3422 in a normal state (a state where the first decorative surface 3410a is stopped to rotate forward). A back left protruding decorative body 3421 protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the decorative body 3410 (see FIG. 149). As a result, the back left projecting decorative body 3421 projects from the back left rotating decorative body 3410 that rotates in a cylindrical shape, which can surprise the player and suggest that there may be something good. Can increase the expectation of the game.

  Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotating decorative body 3410 is rotated by the rotational drive of the back left drive motor 3404. Thereby, it is possible to make the player feel a sign that the gaming state is changed, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotation motor 3410 is rotated by the back left drive motor 3404 to stop the first decorative surface 3410a forward (front) (see FIG. 83 and the like). Since this first decorative surface 3410a is provided with a door decoration 3411 simulating a door, the shutter 3312 of the first decorative surface 3310a of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 for the player. Similarly to the above, the door decoration 3411 can be thought to be opened, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left drive motor 3404 rotates the back left rotating decorative body 3410 to stop the second decorative surface 3410b forward (front) (see FIG. 150). As a result, the back left character decoration 3413 of the second decorative surface 3410b can be visually recognized from the player side, so that the player can foresee the arrival of the chance by the recognition of the back left character decoration 3413.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left drive motor 3404 rotates the back left rotating decorative body 3410 to stop the third decorative surface 3410c forward (front) (see FIG. 151). And although illustration is omitted, in this state, when red light is emitted by the LED of the back left third decorative board 3417, a red pattern can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415, and blue light is emitted. Then, the blue symbol can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415. Accordingly, the symbol projected on the back left projection unit 3415 can suggest the player that a chance has arrived, and the player can be entertained or expected.

  The back-right movable effect unit 3300 and the back-left moveable effect unit 3400 rotate the back-right rotation decoration body 3310 and the back-left rotation decoration body 3410 at the same time with the left and right ends (in the frame of the center accessory 2500). A movable effect can be performed on both the left and right outer sides of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the rotating back-right rotating decorative body 3310 and the back-left rotating decorative body 3410 enhance the player's expectation and suppress a decrease in interest. be able to. In addition, by appropriately selecting the decorative surface for stopping the rotation of the back-right rotation decoration body 3310 and the back-left rotation decoration body 3410, it is possible to diversify the patterns of movable effects and make it difficult for the player to get bored. .

  Further, in the back-under-back movable production unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back-under-bottom post-rotation decoration body 3568 is moved to a rising end position that is substantially the center within the frame of the center accessory 2500 by the rotational drive of the back-bottom back-up / down drive motor 3512. To rise. Then, when the back lower back rotating decorative body 3568 is at the rising end position, the back lower back rotating decorative body 3568 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the back lower back rotating drive motor 3553 (see FIG. 152). ). As a result, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 that is slightly desired to the player side above the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 rises and is positioned at the center in the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player You can be surprised and think that there is something good, and you can raise the expectation for the game. In addition, since the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation for the game.

  Also, in the back-under-back movable production unit 3500, when the back-under-rear rotation decoration body 3568 is at the rising end position, the back-under-rear rotation rotation motor 3553 rotates the back-under-rear rotation decoration body 3568 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the four back and bottom rear rotating decorative bodies 3568 are opened and rotated so as to be separated from each other (see FIG. 153). Thereby, since the diameter of the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 becomes larger than when rotating counterclockwise, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation for the game.

  Further, in the back four corner movable production unit 3600 of the back unit 3000, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 are positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 from the retracted position by the rotational driving of the back four corner drive motors 3615 and 3655. It moves up and down to the appearance position (see FIG. 154). Thus, the appearance of the four back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 can surprise the player and suggest the arrival of a chance or the like.

  Further, in the back four-corner movable production unit 3600, the back four-corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 are rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 by the rotational driving of the back four-corner drive motors 3615 and 3655. Move (see FIG. 153). As a result, the appearance of the four back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 extending radially from the center of the center of the center object 2500 can surprise the player and something good. It can be thought that there is, and it can raise the expectation for the game. The back four-corner movable effect unit 3600 rotates the back four-corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 to the appearance position when the back-bottom rear-rotate decorative body 3568 of the back-bottom rear-movable effect unit 3500 is at the rising end position. It can appear as if a large shuriken has appeared in the frame of the accessory 2500 (see FIG. 153). Thereby, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous gaming state has occurred, to increase the sense of expectation for the game as much as possible, and to enhance the interest in the game.

[6. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board (particularly the main control MPU mounted on the main control board) will be described. FIG. 155 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), the main control board according to this embodiment first performs various registers and main control as a process of step S1 on the condition that a RAM clear switch (not shown) is operated. Data stored in the internal RAM is initialized. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed since the power is turned on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize data stored in various registers and main control built-in RAM.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is stored in the main control built-in RAM. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to by the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). A recovery process for recovering the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board according to this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display are stopped. Special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for lottery processing for display mode, variable random numbers used for lottery processing for a predetermined time (variable time) required for variable display control of the special symbol The reach random number used in the lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the reach effect as the game effect executed in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and a big hit based on the special random number If determined, the symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) used for the lottery process for determining the type of jackpot, Etc. random number is subjected to such a lottery process to drop (usually random), and a random number counter for storing random numbers such.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first start opening 2002 is won, the second start opening 2004 is won. Even in this case, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number. The reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number may correspond to the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach determination table. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms.

  FIG. 155 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (b), in this interrupt control, a register saving process is first performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, the gate sensor 2305, the first starting port sensor 2107, the second starting port sensor 2325, the upper large winning port sensor 2552, the lower large winning port sensor 2354, and the general winning port sensor 3050. For example, detection signals from various sensors are input. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, the random number counter of the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random number (special random number, normal random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display of the special symbol and the normal symbol is stopped is updated. The operation is performed.

  After the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process relating to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable symbol variable display as the process of step S14. Run. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second symbol) indicating the progress of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM. The corresponding process is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board executes a normal symbol process including a lottery process related to a win as an operation trigger of the second start door member 2323 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board is configured so that the drive frequency of the second start door member 2323 is higher during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state (excluding some big hits). A lottery process is executed (so-called short-time state). In this embodiment, such a short time state is realized by shortening the time required for the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  Specifically, in the time-short state control (referred to as time-shortening control), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 1 (per 100%), and the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is not set. When it is shortened to a predetermined time (for example, 0.08 seconds) shorter than the short-time state and the lottery result of the normal symbol is successful, the second start port door member 2323 of the second start port 2004 is, for example, It is moved forward for 5.5 seconds to allow the game ball to be received at the second start port 2004 and then retracted again to disable the game ball from being received at the second start port 2004.

  On the other hand, in the non-time-short control, the second start is performed by setting the normal symbol winning probability to 0% and setting the time required for the normal symbol variation display control to a predetermined variation time (for example, 5 seconds). The game ball cannot be received in the mouth 2004. In the non-short-time state, the normal symbol winning probability may be 0% or more. In this case, the winning probability is lower than that of the short-time state (for example, 50%), and the normal symbol lottery result is a win. Then, the second start port door member 2323 of the second start port 2004 is advanced for a time shorter than the time-short state, for example, 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second start port 2004 again. You may make it reverse | omit and accept the game ball to the 2nd starting port 2004.

  That is, in the non-time-short state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 0%. In this case, even if the player hits the right, it is impossible to win a game ball at the second starting port 2004. Therefore, in the non-time-short state, the game ball is fired aiming at the left side of the center object 2500 (so-called “left” so that many game balls win the first start port 2002 instead of the second start port 2004. It is preferable to hit “)”.

  On the other hand, in the short time state, the normal symbol winning probability is 100%, and the second start port door member 2323 of the second start port 2004 is advanced for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). In this case, it is easy to win a game ball to the second starting port 2004 by hitting right. Therefore, in the non-time-short state, the game ball is fired aiming at the right side of the center object 2500 so that many game balls win the second start port 2004 instead of the first start port 2002 (so-called “right” It is preferable to hit “)”.

  In addition, as the time reduction control, the control for increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol than the non-time reduction state, the control for shortening the time required for the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol than the non-time reduction state, Control for extending the time period for advancing the two start port door members 2323 from the non-temporal state, control for increasing the number of times the second start port door member 2323 of the second start port 2004 is advanced than for the non-time state, Of the control for shortening the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol in the special symbol display or the second special symbol display (the time required for the variable display control of the decorative symbol in the central liquid crystal display device 1500) from the non-short-time state. Any one or any combination (or all) may be executed.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board then performs the special symbol process in step S16. Processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board or the like is performed. Next, as a process in step S17, a process is performed in which the command set in the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is transmitted to, for example, the peripheral control board in the normal symbol process.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board performs an information output process of outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as a process of step S18.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board performs the process of step S19 as the first start port sensor 2107, the second start port sensor 2325, the upper big prize port sensor 2552, and the lower big prize port sensor 2354. When a detection signal from the general winning a prize opening sensor 3050 or the like is in an ON state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board so that a prize ball corresponding to the signal is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 834 and pays out a prize ball to the player. In this example, when the game ball wins the first start port 2002 and the first start port sensor 2107 is turned on, “3 balls”, the game ball wins the second start port 2004 and the second start. When the mouth sensor 2325 is turned on, “1 ball”, a game ball wins a prize at the above-mentioned winning prize opening (upper winning prize opening 2006, lower winning prize opening 2005) and an upper winning prize sensor 2552 or a lower winning prize sensor 2354. Is turned “14 balls”, a game ball is won in the general prize opening 2001, and when the general prize opening sensor 3050 is turned on, “10 balls” are paid out to the player. ing.

  Further, the main control MPU of the same main control board executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of holdings as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is finished when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used in various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 156, the main control MPU of the main control board is first detected by the first start port sensor 2107. On condition that the signal is on (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is stored in the main control built-in RAM. The first start port passing process such as storing in the first special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S32). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2325 is in the ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start-pass passage process such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit execution flag indicating that control is in the big hit gaming state is set (step S35). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. A big hit control process (step S40) is executed. In the jackpot control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped are “4R normal jackpot”. , “4R latent chance big hit”, or “4R chance variation big hit” is suggested, after the lower big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or lower big prize winning opening 4R big hit gaming state (4R big hit gaming state simply open for a long time) that repeats the open / close pattern (round) to be closed four times when the lower big prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won in 2005 The result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R sudden hit big hit". In addition, the opening / closing pattern in which the lower big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then closed is controlled 16 times repeatedly in a 16R big hit gaming state (sometimes referred to as a 16R big hit gaming state that is opened for a short time). Then, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests “8R probability variation big hit”, the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5). Seconds) or after closing the opening / closing pattern to be closed when the lower great prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won in the lower big prize opening 2005, the lower big prize opening 2005 is shortened. Open / close pattern that is closed after opening for a time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is controlled to 8R jackpot gaming state that repeats 8 times (sometimes referred to as 8R jackpot gaming state that is open for a long time). When the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode at the time when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R probability variation big hit", the upper prize winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5). 16R big hit gaming state (simply open for a long time) that repeats the opening / closing pattern to be closed 16 times when the above-mentioned top prize winning hole sensor 2552 detects that nine game balls have been won at the top prize winning opening 2006. (Sometimes referred to as a 16R big hit gaming state). In addition, the lower big prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won after the lower big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) in the 4R big hit gaming state or at the lower big prize opening 2005. In this example, the opening / closing pattern (round) that is closed when closed is repeated 4 times, but after that, the lower closing prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then the opening / closing pattern that is closed is repeated 12 times. By substantially executing the control of the 4R big hit gaming state, the opening / closing pattern for controlling the opening / closing of the lower big prize opening 2005 is always repeated 16 times regardless of the type of the big hit when the big hit gaming state is reached. Yes, after 8 hours of winning the 8R big win game state, after opening the Shimodai prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or having 9 game balls won in the Shimodai prize opening 2005 The opening / closing pattern that is closed when it is detected by the lower major prize opening sensor 2354 is repeated eight times, and then the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the opening / closing pattern to be closed is not performed. You may do it. That is, as long as the number of repetitions of the round in which the game ball can be received at the lower prize winning opening 2005 substantially matches, the number of times is not limited to the above.

  In the present embodiment, a left-handed state in which a game based on a winning of a game ball mainly at the first starting port 2002 is executed, and a game based on a winning of a game ball mainly at the second starting port 2004 is executed. The right-handed state is controlled. Specifically, the right-handed state is controlled when the time-shortening control is being executed, while the left-handed state is controlled when the time-shortening control is not being executed. In a left-handed state, a long-open big hit game state of up to 8 rounds is executed, and in a right-handed state, a long-open big hit game state of up to 16 rounds is executed. Can get more prize balls than left-handed.

  In the big hit control process, after performing the opening control of such a large winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006, lower large winning opening 2005), each set process of the high probability flag, the short time flag, and the short time counter is performed. Run. The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state, and is used until the next big hit occurs after being used in the big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 161 described later (the first shown in FIG. 166 described later). Special symbol stop process or second special symbol stop process (not shown)).

  The time reduction flag is a flag indicating that the time reduction control is being executed (low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state), and the big hit (high probability time reduction state, low probability time reduction state) after the big hit gaming state ends ( 1R special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 166 which will be described later when the big hit game state based on 4R probability variable big hit, 16R sudden big hit, 8R probability variable big hit, 16R big hit game state) is terminated. Or it resets by the 2nd special symbol stop process which is not illustrated.

  If the big hit execution flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “0”. (Step S37), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S38), and stored in the second special symbol holding storage area. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not “0” (step S37), a second special symbol including a lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 2107 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board obtains the counter value by the first special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the reserved number of the first special symbol is the maximum value (upper limit). It is determined whether the value is “4” (step S42). In the process of step S42, when it is determined that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the following steps are taken to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. The processing of S43 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S44, the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S41. And finish the process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S42 that the number of the first special symbol hold is the maximum value (when a so-called “blurred ball” occurs), the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. Control is not newly suspended. That is, without executing the processing of step S43 to step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol non-lottery storage area in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S41). S45) By ending the processing, the first special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

  If it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2325 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board obtains the counter value by the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value. It is determined whether or not “4” (step S52). In the process of step S52, if it is determined that the second special symbol hold count is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The processing of S53 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S54, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S51. And finish the process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S52 that the number of the second special symbol hold is the maximum value (when a so-called “blurred ball” occurs), the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Control is not newly suspended. That is, without executing the processing of step S53 to step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol non-lottery storage area in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S55) By ending the process, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  A command (first hold) that indicates the number of hold of the first special symbol in the storage process (step S20) when the number of hold of the first special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002 The number specifying command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board, and when the number of reserved special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the above storage process (step S20). ) Sets a command (second hold number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the number of hold of the second special symbol, and transmits it to the peripheral control board. In addition, when a random number is stored in the first special symbol non-lottery storage area based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002, a command (first blow ball designation command) for notifying the random number is also described above. It is set in the storage process, transmitted to the peripheral control board, and when a random number is stored in the second special symbol non-lottery storage area based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004, the random number is notified. A command to be performed (second play ball designation command) is also set by the above-described storage processing and transmitted to the peripheral control board. When the first and second ball commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board by the storage process, the stored contents of the first special symbol non-lottery storage area and the second special symbol non-lottery storage area are cleared.

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. First special symbol in which the first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol is performed based on the read first special random number Normal processing (step S80)

  2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop )

  3. Lottery processing for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process (step S82)

  4). First special symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is stopped (step S83).

  5. The first special symbol is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 155).

  FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 160, the main control MPU of the main control board first performs As a process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first design random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol, Read from. Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reserved storage area a to first special symbol reserved storage area d), and a start winning prize to the first start opening 2002 is shown. The random numbers extracted according to the generation are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become. Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), and according to the occurrence of the start winning at the second starting port 2004. The random numbers extracted in this manner are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol has occurred is stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that has occurred first). become.

  And after that, as a process of step S105, based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, a big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short-time state) (step S111), the main control MPU of the main control board is a big hit at the high probability shown in FIG. 162 (A). If a determination table is selected (step S112) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), the low probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 162 (A) is selected (step S113). The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 162 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the gaming state is low probability (low probability non-short time) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Jackpot judgment table at low probability used in the case of state and low probability short state) and jackpot judgment at high probability used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-short state, high probability short state) And a table. Then, in the jackpot determination table at the low probability referred to for comparison with the first special random number, it matches with the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of first special random number has won the jackpot, and 399 types of first jackpot determination values. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the special random numbers are coincident with the loss determination value indicating that the special random numbers are out of place (a jackpot probability at a low probability; 1/400). In this example, in the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, the first special random number is used in the low probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. In the same manner as the jackpot determination table at the low probability referred to for comparison with the jackpot determination value indicating that one kind of second special random number has won the jackpot, 399 kinds of second special random numbers are out of the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss judgment value indicating that it is (a big hit probability at a low probability; 1/400).

  Further, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, the ten types of first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value, and the 390 types of first special random numbers are lost determination values. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with each other (a jackpot probability at a high probability; 1/40). In this example, in the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, the first special random number is used in the high probability jackpot determination table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number. Similar to the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, which is referred to for comparison with the jackpot determination value indicating that the ten types of second special random numbers are won. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to be coincident with the loss judgment value indicating that (a big hit probability at a high probability; 1/40). Note that the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referred to compare with the first special random number and the jackpot determination table referred to compare with the second special random number (the number of jackpot determination values is the same number). The jackpot judgment value may be different (the jackpot probability is common), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)) may be different. In this case, at least one of the jackpot determination values of the low probability jackpot determination table and the high probability jackpot determination table may be made different (both may be made different).

  When the main control MPU of the main control board determines that the jackpot is determined as a result of the comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S115). Then, a big hit flag indicating that the change is won for the big hit is set (step S116), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

  Further, when it is determined in step S115 that a loss occurs, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in a high probability non-short-time state, and when the gaming state is in a high-probability short-time state. Reach determination table used in the case of high probability short-time state, and reach determination table in low-probability state used when the gaming state is low-probability state (low probability non-short-time state and low probability short-time state), It has. In the reach determination table in the high probability short-time state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number is reached matches with the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers are not reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other.

  Further, the reach determination table in the low probability state has one reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability short time state reach. Then, the reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 kinds of reach random numbers coincide with the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. Thus, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating the reach is increased compared to the high probability time short state.

  Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-short-time state, 6 types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high-probability short-time state and the low-probability state are reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 66 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach in the high probability non-short-time state is higher than that in the high-probability short-time state and the low-probability state (low-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state). Enhanced.

  The main control MPU of the main control board compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119). A reach flag indicating reach is set and the process is terminated (step S121).

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 163, the main control MPU of the main control board firstly The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of one special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 162 (B) and selects the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. The big hit symbol as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped is determined by comparing with the symbol determination table (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 162 (B), each symbol random number (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit, 4R positive big hit, 16R sudden big hit, 8R positive big hit, 16R right big big hit) The first symbol random number and the second symbol random number) are stored in association with each other. The main control MPU of the main control board determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the first symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the second symbol random number. ing.

In particular,
1. Open / close to close when the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the lower major prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won at the lower major prize opening 2005 By repeating the pattern four times, the game ball is controlled to a 4R big hit game state that can enter the lower big prize opening 2005 (easy), and then a low probability non-short state state (so-called normal state) until the next big hit game state occurs 4R normal big hit to control

  2. Open / close to close when the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the lower major prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won at the lower major prize opening 2005 By repeating the pattern four times, the game ball is controlled to a 4R big hit game state that can enter the lower big prize opening 2005 (easy), and then controlled to a high probability non-short time state until the big hit game state occurs. 4R latent probability big hit that performs an effect that is difficult to determine that it is controlled to a probability state

  3. Open / close to close when the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the lower major prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won at the lower major prize opening 2005 By repeating the pattern four times, the game ball is controlled to the 4R big hit gaming state that can enter the lower big prize opening 2005 (easy), and then controlled to the high probability time short state until the big hit gaming state is generated.

  4). The game ball is controlled to a 16R big hit game state in which it is difficult to enter the lower major prize opening 2005 by repeating the opening / closing pattern that is closed after the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds). 16R sudden big hit is executed to control to a high probability short-time state until a big hit gaming state occurs, and to suddenly shift to a high probability short-time state without occurrence of a big hit gaming state in the middle of the game

  5. Open / close to close when the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the lower major prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won at the lower major prize opening 2005 After repeating the pattern eight times, the game ball can enter the lower major prize opening 2005 by repeating the opening / closing pattern that closes after closing the lower major prize opening 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (easily) ) 8R big hit game state is controlled, and until the next big hit gaming state occurs, it is controlled to a short state with high probability.

  6). Opening / closing to be closed when the upper prize winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when nine gaming balls are won in the upper prize winning opening 2006 by the upper prize winning opening sensor 2552. By repeating the pattern 16 times, the game ball is controlled to a 16R big hit gaming state in which the game ball can enter the upper prize winning opening 2006 (easy), and then controlled to a high probability time-short state until the big hit gaming state occurs.

  In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the second start door member 2323 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a holding ball of the second special symbol Except for the case, only the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is executed, and the big hits related to the first special symbol (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit, 4R positive big hit, 16R sudden big hit, 8R positive big change Big hit) will occur. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball is not won at the first start port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 2004 occurs, and the change of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display except when there is a holding ball of the first special symbol. Only the display is executed, and a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent positive hit, 4R positive change big hit, 16R positive change big hit) related to the second special symbol is generated.

  In addition, the jackpot related to the first special symbol can be repeatedly opened and closed eight times at the maximum lower prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), whereas it is related to the second special symbol. In the case of a big hit, the opening / closing pattern that opens the upper prize winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) can be repeated 16 times, and the lower prize winning opening 2005 related to the first special symbol is opened for a long time ( For example, 28.5 seconds), the upper prize winning opening 2006 related to the second special symbol is opened for a longer time (for example, 28.5 seconds) than the ratio (31%) determined for the 8R probability variation big hit that repeats the opening / closing pattern of 8 times. In order to set the ratio (63%) determined for the 16R probability variation jackpot that repeats the opening / closing pattern 16 times to about twice, mainly based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 Technique it is possible to obtain a large amount of prize balls mainly compared to the left-handed state a player based on the winning of the game balls to the first start hole 2002 is executed in a right-handed state which is executed.

  When the 4R normal jackpot is determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 4R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 4R latent probability jackpot is determined, the 4R latent jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. When the 4R probability variation big hit is decided, the 4R probability variation big hit symbol is decided as the big hit symbol, when the 16R sudden variation big hit is decided, the 16R sudden variation big hit symbol is decided as the big hit symbol, and when the 8R probability variable big hit is decided The 8R probability variable big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol. Although not shown, when the 4R normal big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 4R normal big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the 4R latent big hit symbol is determined, the 4R latent big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol. When the big hit symbol is determined, the 4R probability variable big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, the 4R probability variable big hit symbol is determined, and when the 16R probability variable big hit symbol is determined, the 16R probability variable big hit symbol is determined.

  In addition, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the main control MPU of the main control board determines that the first special symbol is not used as a variation stop mode (step S136), and then counts the number of big hits. The counter is incremented by 1 (step S135b), and the process proceeds to step S137.

  After the stop symbol determination process is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board instructs the lottery result (the type of jackpot, reach or disengagement as the process of step S137 (first A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that a special symbol stop pattern mode may be transmitted to the peripheral control board. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S138, the process is terminated.

  The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board controls the display of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left decoration, the left decoration, and the left decoration are displayed in a variable manner). Stop display in the order of symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol (Note that the left, middle and right decorative symbols may be variably displayed in synchronization with the same symbol and may be stopped at the same time). Specifically, the peripheral control MPU specifies 4R normal big hit out of big hits from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbols displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are stopped. Is determined to be a 4R normal jackpot symbol (the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols from “0” to “9” being the same even symbol), and the 4R latent big jackpot is specified among the big jackpots Is determined to be a 4R latency big hit symbol (a combination of the same left and middle decorative symbols of “0” to “9”, which is the same even symbol as the 4R normal big hit symbol). If 4R probability variation big hit is specified, 4R probability variation big hit symbol is determined (combination where the left, middle and right decorative symbols are all “1” or “9”), and 16R sudden big hit is identified among the big hits 16R sudden hit big hit When the design (the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative designs including all the designs of “1”, “3”, and “5”) is determined, and 8R probability variation big hit is specified among the big hits, 8R probability variation big hit When the symbol (the combination where the left, middle and right decorative symbols are all “5”) is determined, and the 16R probable big hit is specified among the big wins, the 16R probable big hit symbol (the left, middle and right decorative symbols are all The combination is “7”. In addition, when a reach loss is specified, a design with a reach (a combination of symbols having the same left and right decorative designs of “0” to “9” but having a different middle decorative design; reach lose If it is determined to be a symbol, and it is determined that it is out of place, it is determined to be a symbol that does not have reach (a combination of at least the left, right, and right decorative symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols). When the variation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect ends), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500.

  FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 164, the main control MPU of the main control board has the big hit flag set. If so (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the big hit according to the type of big hit determined at step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If so (step S145), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, a normal deviation (reach effect). If it is an error that does not execute, select a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of error. (Step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU sets the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S150). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), this processing is terminated. As a result, the first special symbol display is subjected to variable display control by the first special symbol display for the variation time determined in this manner, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500 performs effect control in synchronization with the variable symbol variable display. Will be done.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  Further, the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. . For example, 164 kinds of random numbers among 241 kinds of random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 kinds of random numbers are super reach with a low expectation degree of jackpot Determination values (223 to 240) are set as determination values (164 to 222) indicating that any one of the effects is to be executed, and 18 kinds of variable random numbers are to execute any one of the super reach effects having a high expectation degree of jackpot. ) Is set. Super-reach production has a higher jackpot expectation than normal reach production, and when a player who wants to generate a big hit gaming state has a player's expectation for the big hit gaming state when the super reach production is executed. It is getting higher.

  In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the first special random number and the first symbol random number and used to determine the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, it is common to the non-short-time state and the short-time state. 12 seconds variation time is set. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the second special random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time of 0.3 seconds is set as the short time state. Is set, and the variation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-time-short state. In this way, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same in the short-time state and in the non-short-time state, prompting the game ball to win the second starting port 2004 during the short-time state, and the player starting the second time A time for winning a game ball in the mouth 2004 is secured.

  Further, as described above, in the right-handed state, only an interval through which one game ball can pass is provided to restrict the rolling of the game ball, and guide to the gate unit 2003 and the second start port 2004 with a very high probability. Is done. That is, in the right-handed state, the game ball is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a very high probability, and the normal symbol is a hit, and the second start port door member 2323 of the second start port 2004 is advanced. Then, the game balls are configured to be received at the second starting port 2004 with a very high probability (substantially all of the game balls that have been thrown to the right side of the center accessory 2500). In the short time state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to be about 100%. When the normal symbol is hit, the second start port door member 2323 of the second start port 2004 is set for a long period (5.5 in this example). For 2 seconds), and the game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004. In this example, when the player operates the handle lever 504, game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Then, when the launched game ball is driven to the right side of the center object 2500, the game ball is accepted to the second start port 2004 with a very high probability, and therefore the second start port door of the second start port 2004 in a short time state. In a state in which the member 2323 moves forward and the game ball can be received in the second start port 2004, a game ball wins in the second start port 2004 occurs at intervals of about 0.6 seconds. In this example, as described above, in the variation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol losing based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, the very short variation time is set to 0.3 seconds. . Further, the interval time from when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped to when the variable display is started again is set to about 0.6 seconds. That is, in the short time state, the execution interval of the variable display of the second special symbol is extremely shortened compared to the non-short time state (variation time 12 seconds, interval time 0.6 seconds), and the game ball to the second start port 2004 is reduced. Since the difference between the winning interval and the execution interval of the variation display of the second special symbol is narrowed in the short time state, even if a large amount of game balls win the second starting port 2004 in a very short time, The variable display is executed in a very short time to prevent the number of second special symbols from being retained, and in the short time state, the number of variable displays per unit time is extremely increased compared to the non-short time state. This makes it possible to win the next big hit in a very short time compared to the previous gaming machine in the high probability short-time state that is controlled to shift to the right-handed state, and a large amount of prize balls can be obtained in a short time , Can improve the game entertainment.

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 165, the main control MPU of the main control board first performs step S171. As a process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 166, the main control MPU of the main control board first performs step S181. As a process, display control for causing the first special symbol display to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500 receives the first special symbol. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board (step S182).

  When the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S187). The waiting time until the start of time (time for performing display or the like to start the big hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the short time flag is set, The time reduction flag is reset (step S189), and when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S194), this process is terminated. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a big hit start command (4R normal big hit start command, 4R latent big hit per 4R normal big hit, 4R positive big hit, 4R positive big hit, 16R sudden big hit, 8R positive big hit, 16R positive big hit) Start command, 4R probability variation jackpot start command, 16R sudden variation jackpot start command, 8R probability variation jackpot start command, 16R probability variation jackpot start command). Thereby, the effect of the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the lamp / LED and the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like.

[RTC control unit]
The main control MPU of the embodiment includes an external real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) that can acquire time information as time information acquisition means. Although not shown, the RTC includes a register circuit, a clock input circuit, a clock output circuit, an interrupt output circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a control circuit.

  The RTC has a clock / calendar function. The clock / calendar function is a function that counts the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second. Moreover, you may use what counts to a day of the week as needed. The RTC control unit is provided with an RTC and a battery for driving the RTC. By providing the battery, even when the power supply of the power supply board is cut off, the RTC does not interrupt the timekeeping and calendar function.

  The battery may be a primary battery (for example, a button battery), or a rechargeable secondary battery. This eliminates the need for a backup power source and avoids complicated main control board configuration. . The battery is also used as a backup power source for the main control built-in RAM.

  The main control MPU has a function of specifying year, month, date, hour, minute, and second (calendar information and time information) by providing an RTC. The main control MPU of the main control board acquires time information (hour / minute / second) from the RTC when the gaming machine is powered on.

[7. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 167, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing a RAM built in the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 mS and executes a 2 mS steady process. In the 2 mS steady process, a process of counting up the 16 mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 mS progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 mS has elapsed. While the flag T is set, processing for resetting (setting 0) the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 mS elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 mS steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 mS steady process, a process of controlling the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board. When the 16 mS steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS, the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, if the 16 mS elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 mS steady process executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. In the 16 mS steady process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the center is based on the fact that the variation pattern command transmitted by setting in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, the second variation pattern setting process) is received. A control process related to the liquid crystal display device 1500 is executed.

  In the sound control process in step S603, control processes related to the speakers 130, 222, 262, the side speakers, the upper first speaker 354, the upper second speaker 355, and the upper third speaker 356 are executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process in step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving substrate 3060 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in a 16mS steady process is complete | finished within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady process to the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process is immediately started from the beginning when the 16 mS has passed since the start of the 16 mS steady process (command in step S601). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 mS elapses during execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 mS elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 mS steady process.

[8. Battle production]
Next, the winning shortening control will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. FIG. 169 and FIG. 173 show that the above command analysis shows that the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command indicating that the reach (reach out of reach, per reach) is received when the high probability time-short state is controlled. FIG. 171 to FIG. 173 are timing charts of battle effects executed by the central liquid crystal display device 1500 when specified in the process (step S601). FIG. 171 to FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a battle effect executed by the central liquid crystal display device 1500 when it is specified in the command analysis process (step S601) that a determination result notification command and a variation pattern command indicating that is there.

  In this example, during the high-probability time-short state, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 displays a manner in which the main character 1500a walks, and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are reduced in the lower left portion of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. To display the fluctuation. Then, when the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command indicating reach are received, the enemy character 1500b is displayed so as to confront the main character 1500a, and the main character 1500a and the enemy character 1500b are confronted. Perform battle production. And when the received determination result notification command shows a big hit, as a result of the battle effect, the mode in which the main character 1500a wins the enemy character 1500b is displayed, and when the received determination result notification command shows a loss, As a result of the battle effect, a mode in which the main character 1500a is defeated by the enemy character 1500b is displayed.

  Further, in the battle effect, after the main character 1500a and the enemy character 1500b are displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 so as to face each other, they are blacked out once (displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 by turning off the screen). Then, one of the main character 1500a and the enemy character 1500b is displayed. It is shown that a first strike is made by the character displayed after this blackout, and if the main character 1500a is displayed after the blackout, it will be a big hit. On the other hand, when the enemy character 1500b is displayed after the blackout, if the attack of the enemy character 1500b is avoided, it will be a big hit. As described above, the player can recognize that the main character 1500a is displayed after the blackout, and that the player can recognize that it is a big hit. It becomes possible to recognize that it is a big hit.

  In this way, even if it is determined that a big hit will be made in the middle of the battle production, if the battle production is continued and the variable display is executed for a long time, the special symbol per unit time will be displayed. Since the number of times of variable display is reduced, the number of wins of the big hit gaming state and the expected value of winning balls can be reduced, which may give a disadvantage to the player and lower the gaming interest. In this example, when it is determined that a big hit will be made in the middle of the battle performance, the big prize opening (upper big prize opening 2006 or lower big prize opening 2005) is controlled to be opened at that time to control the big hit gaming state. While starting, the direction of the battle is continued to be executed to the end. Details will be described below.

  In this example, battle production short and battle production long are provided as fluctuation patterns when reaching reach during a high probability short-time state, battle production short is executed only when it is a big hit, battle production long is a big hit It is executed in both the case where it becomes and the case where it becomes out of place. First, the battle effect executed based on the battle effect short fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 171 (A) to 172 (I). In the high-probability short-time state, a game in which a right ball is made to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004 is performed. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 171 (A), when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability short-time state, the peripheral control MPU displays the manner in which the main character 1500a is moving on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In this state, when the second special symbol process (step S39) is executed based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 2004, the main control MPU performs the second special symbol as shown in FIG. The display of the second special symbol is started on the display, and a judgment result notification command and a fluctuation pattern command (in this case, a judgment result notification command indicating a big hit and a battle effect short fluctuation pattern are displayed on the peripheral control board. Is transmitted). When the determination result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command are received from the main control MPU, the peripheral control MPU variably displays the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed on the lower left portion of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 and receives the received fluctuation. When the variation time designated by the pattern command has elapsed, all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, when reach is indicated by the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU (reach is out of reach, reach is a big hit), the main character 1500a stops to something. The noticed mode is displayed (FIG. 171 (B)).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU displays the enemy character 1500b on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 so as to confront the main character 1500a (FIG. 171 (C)), and then blacks out the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 ( FIG. 171 (D)). Then, the received judgment result notification command indicates that it is a big hit (in this example, 4R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) that continues the high probability time-short state, and instructs the execution of the variation pattern of the battle effect short by the variation pattern command. If this is the case, the peripheral control MPU gradually brightens the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 so that only the main character 1500a appears, and the left, middle, and right of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are reduced and displayed on the lower left portion of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a big-hit manner (hit-hit symbol), and a “hit-win!” Message is displayed to notify the player that a big-hit will be achieved (FIG. 171 (E)).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 169, the variation time of the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display by the main control MPU is substantially the same as the variation time of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The big special symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display at a timing in the middle of the battle effect that only the main character 1500a emerges after blacking out the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, The main control MPU starts opening control of the big prize opening (upper big prize opening 2006 or lower big prize opening 2005) based on the fact that the big special symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the main control MPU starts the opening control of the big winning opening (the upper winning opening 2006 or the lower winning opening 2005), the peripheral control MPU displays “big win!” To control the big win gaming state. The player can recognize that the control of the big hit gaming state is started, and the player suffers a disadvantage without noticing that the control of the big hit gaming state is started. Can be suppressed. Note that the player is not limited to the above example as long as the player can surely recognize that the control of the big hit gaming state is started, and the sound output of the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. (the big hit is started. Or a display notifying that a big hit is started (starting a big hit) may be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 169, the peripheral control MPU continues to execute the battle effect even after the control of the big hit gaming state is started by the main control MPU, and displays a mode in which the main character 1500a attacks the enemy character 1500b. (FIG. 172 (F)). Next, the peripheral control MPU displays “Press the button to stab the stop!” On the central liquid crystal display device 1500 and starts the timer to start measuring the effective period (FIG. 172 (G)). When the dish effect button 257 is operated and the detection signal from the effect button pressing sensor 258 is input to the peripheral control MPU, the back and bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is unrecognizable from the player side by the elevating unit 3510. From the position (rising end position), it slides downward in an arc shape and moves to the appearance position (falling end position) that is visible from the player side, and the rotating connecting member 3630 is rotated to rotate the back four corners second decorative body The back four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the base 3631 and the back four corner second decorative body base 3631 is rotated (rotated) (FIG. 172 (H)).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU displays a mode in which the main character 1500a has won (FIG. 172 (I)), and then performs a jackpot gaming state effect display (a jackpot effect; a round effect display, etc.) as shown in FIG. . Thus, even if the big hit gaming state is started before the effect of the battle effect short is completed, the peripheral control MPU continues to execute the effect of the battle effect short and responds to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257. Then, the rear decoration unit 3550 appears to advance in the direction in which the battle effect short effect is completed (FIG. 172 (H)). In other words, when the battle effect is executed, the player operates the upper plate effect button 257 to cause the back and bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 to appear in order to complete the effect of the battle effect short. In this way, since the effect of the battle effect short can be completed according to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 by the player, the player's intention can be reflected in the effect, and satisfaction and achievement can be obtained, A more attractive performance than conventional gaming machines can be executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 169, the effective period of the upper plate effect button 257 is continued until one round of the big hit gaming state is completed, but the upper plate effect button 257 is not operated within the effective period. However, the back-bottom post-rotation decorative body unit 3550 may be exposed after the expiration of the effective period. If the upper plate effect button 257 is not operated within the effective period, the back-bottom post-rotation decoration body You may make it display the aspect which the main character 1500a won, without making unit 3550 express.

  Also, in this example, the player is notified that the game will be a big hit in the middle of the battle production, and the control of the big hit gaming state is started. In this way, the start time of the big hit gaming state that would otherwise be started after executing all of the battle effects is advanced, and the variation time of the battle presentation that is executed before the start of the big hit gaming state is shortened. The reduction in the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is suppressed. Specifically, in this example, a period of 58 seconds to 87 seconds (depending on the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257) is set as a period required to execute all effects of the battle effect short. However, the variation time corresponding to the period of performing the effect executed before the start of the big hit gaming state is 12 seconds, and after the variation pattern of the battle effect short is selected and the second special symbol is variably displayed, When 12 seconds have elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, and the control of the big hit gaming state is started. And most of the effects of the battle effect short (in this example, 46 seconds to 75 seconds, but may be half or more of the whole period) are executed during the jackpot gaming state, The effect period of the battle effect short executed before the control is 12 seconds, whereas the effect period of the battle effect short executed during the big hit gaming state is 46 seconds to 75 seconds (operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 It depends on.

  As described above, the period executed during the jackpot gaming state (period executed as the jackpot effect) among all the period required for execution of the battle effect short is the period (fluctuation time) executed before the start of the jackpot gaming state. ) To reduce the time required for variable display, and it is possible to suppress the reduction in the number of times of variable display of special symbols per unit time. As described above, in the big hit gaming state, after the big prize opening (upper big prize opening 2006 or lower big prize opening 2005) is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the big prize opening (upper big prize opening 2006 or below) An open / close pattern (round) that is closed when the game player has detected nine game balls in the big prize opening 2005) is detected a plurality of times (in this example, four rounds). Therefore, a period of a certain period or more is necessarily required from the start of the big hit gaming state to the end thereof. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 synchronizes with the variable display effect (special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol)) in a variable display effect before the start of the big hit gaming state. And the remaining effect is executed as a jackpot effect after the start of the jackpot game state, and the battle effect short effect period that is executed as a variable display effect before the start of the jackpot game state is The variation time of the battle effect short is set so as to be relatively shorter than the effect period of the battle effect short executed as the jackpot effect after the start of the big hit gaming state. As a result, for the player, the battle lever 504 is operated, and the battle is executed during the execution period of the big hit gaming state in which only the game ball is won in the big winning opening (the upper winning hole 2006 or the lower winning hole 2005). Executing a part of the production of the production short and performing the production of the production of the short game without ending before the start of the big hit gaming state. Since the variation time of the battle production short can be shortened by 46 to 75 seconds compared with the case where the second special symbol is displayed during the variation display, the variation display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) is started. It is possible to shorten the period until the big hit gaming state is finished, and the variation time of special symbols per unit time is reduced by reducing the variation time. There for possible to prevent the reduction may increase the execution opportunities jackpot determination process. In addition, even if the time required for the variable display is reduced, the battle effect can be executed over a long period from the start of the variable display to the execution of the big hit gaming state, so the battle content is not simplified. It is possible to reduce the variation time by executing the production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to the simplification of the production content.

  Further, in the above-described example, an effect (button effect) that requires a button operation is executed after it has been determined that a big hit is achieved, and the back and bottom rear rotation decoration is performed based on the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 within the effective period. The body unit 3550 is moved from a retracted position that cannot be viewed from the player side to an appearing position where the body unit 3550 can be viewed. In other words, the player notifies the player that the big hit has been confirmed, and if the player operates the upper plate effect button 257 within the valid period, the player will preliminarily indicate that the back and bottom rotating decorative body unit 3550 appears. Button production is executed in the state of grasping. Normally, the button effect is executed before the result of the variable display is confirmed, and if the result of the variable display is off, the back effect is rotated even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the effective period. When the possibility that the decorative body unit 3550 will appear from the retracted position to the appearance position is set low, and the result of the variable display is a big hit, the back is displayed when the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the effective period. The lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is set to have a higher possibility of appearing from the retracted position to the appearance position.

  In addition, as described above, the jackpot probability at the low probability is set to 1/400, and the jackpot probability at the high probability is set to 1/40. Therefore, when the button effect is executed, even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, the possibility that the back / bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 appears from the retracted position to the appearance position is low. In this way, when the button effect is executed, even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, if the back / bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 does not appear at the appearance position from the retracted position, the player feels stress, Further, even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, there is a low possibility that the back / bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 will appear from the retreat position to the appearance position, so there is a possibility that the game entertainment will be lowered when the button effect is executed. It was.

  In this example, when the button effect is executed after the big hit is determined as described above and the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the effective period, the back and bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is always moved from the retracted position. In order to execute the button effect in a state where the player knows in advance that it will appear at the appearance position, the upper plate effect to dissipate the stress accumulated by the button effect that was executed before it was decided that it would be a big hit The button 257 can be operated. In addition, since it is determined that a big hit has been made, it is possible to cause the back and bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 to appear by operating the upper plate effect button 257 while attracting attention from surrounding players, so that a sense of superiority is obtained. Can increase the joy of having a big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 170 and FIG. 171 (A) to FIG. 171 (D), FIG. 171 (E ′), FIG. 172, and FIG. explain. The effect executed based on the variation pattern of the battle effect long includes the same effect as the effect executed based on the variation pattern of the battle effect short. Will be read as battle production long, and only the parts different from the battle production short production will be described below.

  171 (A) to 171 (D) by the peripheral control MPU based on the reception of the determination result command and the variation pattern command (in this case, the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the battle effect long) from the main control MPU. After executing the above, when only the enemy character 1500b emerges by gradually brightening the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 (FIG. 171 (E ′)), an attack by the enemy character 1500b is performed. As shown in FIG. 170, the attack by the enemy character 1500b is performed while the second special symbol is being displayed.

  The received judgment result notification command indicates a big hit (in this example, 4R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) that continues the high-probability time-short state, and the execution of the variation pattern of the battle effect long is instructed by the variation pattern command. In this case, the peripheral control MPU displays a mode in which the main character 1500a avoids the attack of the enemy character 1500b (FIG. 173 (F ′)), and the left and middle displayed in a reduced size in the lower left portion of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a big-hit manner (hit-hit symbol) and the message “Attack avoidance! Big-hit confirmed!” Is displayed to notify the player that a big hit will be made (FIG. 173 (G ′)). Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (F) to 172 (I) are executed. As shown in FIG. 170, the variation time of the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display by the main control MPU is almost the same as the variation time of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The big special symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display at a timing in the middle of the battle effect that the main character 1500a avoids the attack of the enemy character 1500b, and the big special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. Based on the stop display, the main control MPU starts the opening control of the big prize opening (upper big prize opening 2006 or lower big prize opening 2005).

  On the other hand, the received judgment result notification command indicates a big hit (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent probable big hit) that ends the failure or high-probability short-time state, and executes the variation pattern of the battle effect long by the variation pattern command. Is displayed, the peripheral control MPU displays a mode in which the main character 1500a receives the attack of the enemy character 1500b (FIG. 173 (F ″)), and if the received determination result notification command is out of place. The left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size in the lower left part of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are stopped and displayed in an off mode (in this case, out of reach symbols), and the received judgment result notification command is in a high-probability time-short state. If the big hit is to end (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit), the lower left of the central liquid crystal display 1500 Displaying the reduced left, middle, and right decorative symbols in a big-hit manner and displaying "defeat ..." informs the player that the shift or the high probability short-time state will end (Fig. 173 (G ″)). After that, if the received determination result notification command is out of order, the process returns to FIG. 171 (A) to display the manner in which the main character 1500a is moving on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. If the big hit to end the state (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit), the fact that the big hit gaming state is started and control of the big hit gaming state is executed, then returning to FIG. A mode in which the character 1500 a is moving is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500.

  It should be noted that a period of 78 seconds to 107 seconds (depending on the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257) is set as a period required to execute all the effects of the battle effect long executed in the case of a big hit. However, the variation time corresponding to the period of performing the effect executed before the start of the big hit gaming state is 32 seconds, and after the variation pattern of the battle effect long is selected and the second special symbol is variably displayed, When 32 seconds have elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, and control of the big hit gaming state is started. And most of the effects of the battle effect long (in this example, 46 seconds to 75 seconds, but may be half or more of the whole period) are executed during the jackpot gaming state, The battle effect long effect period executed before the control is 32 seconds, while the battle effect long effect period executed during the big hit gaming state is 46 seconds to 75 seconds (operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257). It depends on.

  As described above, even when a battle effect having a longer effect period than the battle effect short is executed, the period executed during the jackpot gaming state among all the effect periods required for executing the battle effect long (executed as a jackpot effect) The time required for variable display is reduced by making the period of time) longer than the period (variable time) executed before the start of the big hit gaming state, and the number of times of special symbol variable display per unit time is reduced. Can be deterred. That is, some of the effects of the battle effect long are displayed before the start of the big hit gaming state. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 is synchronized with the variable display effect (special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol)). And the remaining effect is executed as a jackpot effect after the start of the jackpot game state, and the battle effect long effect period that is executed as a variable display effect before the start of the jackpot game state is The variation time of the battle effect long is set so as to be relatively shorter than the effect period of the battle effect long executed as the jackpot effect after the start of the big hit game state. As a result, for the player, the battle lever 504 is operated, and the battle is executed during the execution period of the big hit gaming state in which only the game ball is won in the big winning opening (the upper winning hole 2006 or the lower winning hole 2005). The second special symbol changes as a variable display effect while all the effects of the battle effect long are executed to the end without executing all the effects of the battle effect long. Compared to the case where it is executed during the display, the battle effect long change time is shortened by 46 to 75 seconds, and the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) is started to be changed and then the big hit gaming state is ended. It is possible to shorten the period until the time is reached, and because the fluctuation time is shortened, it is possible to suppress the reduction in the number of fluctuation display times of special symbols per unit time. It can increase the sense of execution opportunities. In addition, even if the time required for the variable display is reduced, the battle effect can be executed over a long period from the start of the variable display to the execution of the big hit gaming state, so the battle content is not simplified. It is possible to reduce the variation time by executing the production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to the simplification of the production content.

  In addition, 65 seconds is required as a period required to execute all the effects of the battle effect long that is executed when it becomes a big hit (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit) that ends the off-state or high probability short-time state. Is set. In other words, the variation time of the battle effect long that is executed in the case of a big hit (in this example, a 4R normal big hit, a 4R latent big hit) that ends the loss or high probability short-time state is set to 65 seconds. In addition, after executing the battle effect long and displaying the mode that the main character 1500a receives without being able to avoid the attack of the enemy character 1500b, the main character 1500a is revived and the effect of defeating the enemy character 1500b is executed. In this case, when the main character 1500a is restored, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and the jackpot symbol of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. Then, after starting the control of the big hit gaming state, an effect of defeating the enemy character 1500b (for example, the effects of FIGS. 172 (F) to 172 (I)) may be executed. In this case, the period of the effect executed before the start of the jackpot gaming state may be longer than the period of the effect performed during the jackpot gaming state. Since the production period can be shortened compared to the case where the production is executed before the start of the big hit gaming state, it is possible to suppress the reduction in the number of times of display of the special symbol per unit time.

  As mentioned above, although the preferred embodiment was mentioned and demonstrated about the said battle production, this example is not limited to these embodiment, In the range which does not deviate from the summary of the said embodiment as shown below, various It is possible to improve and change the design.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

  In the above example, what is performed during the high probability short-time state is shown, but the effect period is shortened as compared with the case where all the effects executed in relation to the variable display are executed before the start of the big hit gaming state. As long as the control is executed, it is not limited to the high-probability time-short state, but the low-probability non-time-short state (so-called normal state), the low-probability time-short state (so-called time-short state), the high-probability non-time-short state, and the high-probability time-short state. It may be executed in any one of (so-called probability variation states) or in any combination (or all). In addition, when the control for shortening the effect period is executed even in a case other than the high-probability short-time state, the appearance frequency and jackpot expectation degree of the effect may be varied for each gaming state. For example, in the non-time-short state (high probability non-time-short state, low-probability non-time-short state), the appearance frequency is lower than the time-short state (high-probability time-short state, low-probability time-short state), and the jackpot expectation is lower than the time-short state. In the case of a big hit, you can increase the selection ratio of the long version (battle production long) of the battle production in the non-time-short state, and increase the selection ratio of the short version (battle production short) of the battle production in the time-short state In the short-time state, the effect of shortening the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) to the end of the big hit gaming state may be enhanced as compared to the non-time-short state.

  In addition, as described above, in the variation pattern that is a big hit that continues the high probability short-time state between the battle production short and the battle production long, the button production is executed during the big hit gaming state, but at the operation timing of the upper plate production button 257 Accordingly, the contents of the jackpot effect performed after the battle effect may be different. For example, when the button effect is executed, the effective period of the upper plate effect button 257 is set until a predetermined round (for example, 3 rounds) in the big hit gaming state ends, and the upper round is increased (for example, until 2 rounds are completed). When the dish effect button 257 is operated, a series of jackpot effects (video, etc.) that are completed before the remaining rounds in the jackpot game state are executed, and the upper dish effect is performed in a late round (for example, three rounds). When the button 257 is operated, a series of jackpot effects may be ended halfway when the remaining rounds in the jackpot gaming state are performed while performing the same effects. As described above, when the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is late, the big hit effect ends in the middle, and therefore the upper plate effect button 257 can be operated at an early timing.

  In addition, while executing the common jackpot effect regardless of the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 as described above, it is executed until the big hit effect is completed according to the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 or is terminated halfway. However, it is possible to execute different effects according to the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257. For example, when the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is early, On the other hand, when the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is late, the upper plate effect button 257 is operated at an early timing by displaying an effect that makes the player uncomfortable. The timing when the upper plate effect button 257 is operated (round, elapsed time, before operating the upper plate effect button 257 It is executed as a big hit effect by changing the type of the big hit effect that is executed after the end of the battle effect according to the winning opening (the number of game balls that have entered the upper big prize port 2006 or the lower big prize port 2005). The battle effect may be completed by operating the upper plate effect button 257 at the timing determined by the player himself while considering the type of the game. Thus, by changing the subsequent development according to the timing when the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, the player can think about the timing when the upper plate effect button 257 is operated and enjoy the game in the big hit game state. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect more attractive than the big hit effect that is executed in the conventional big hit game state.

  Further, the mode of the battle effect may be changed according to the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257. For example, the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 (round, elapsed time, until the upper plate effect button 257 is operated) The effect display (for example, the back side) is displayed when the back and bottom rotating decorative body unit 3550 appears earlier or later as the number of game balls that have entered the top prize opening (the top university prize opening 2006 or the bottom university prize opening 2005) is earlier or later. When displaying a flame around the lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550, the size and color of the flame may be flashy. As the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is earlier, the upper plate effect button 257 can be operated at an earlier timing by making the effect display when the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 appears more flashy. The slower the operation timing of the button 257, the more the effect display when the behind-the-bottom post-rotation decorative body unit 3550 is made to appear makes it possible to operate the upper plate effect button 257 at a later timing. Thus, by appropriately setting the effects, it is possible to guide the player to operate the upper plate effect button 257 at a predetermined timing.

  Further, as the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257, the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening (the upper large winning port 2006 or the lower large winning port 2005) before the upper plate directing button 257 is operated is changed. If the direction of the performance (one or both of the battle effect and the jackpot effect) is different, the big prize opening (upper prize) will be given in all the jackpot gaming states that have been executed since the start of the high probability short-time control. It may be changed according to the number of game balls that have entered the mouth 2006 or the lower prize opening 2005). In this case, since the aspect of the effect can be varied as the number of jackpot game states executed in the high probability short-time state increases, the player can be controlled according to the effect mode executed according to the number of jackpot game states. Can give a sense of superiority and satisfaction, and can further enhance the joy of being a big hit.

  Further, in the above example, when the button effect is executed and the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the effective period, the effective period ends at that time, and the back and rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is moved a predetermined number of times (this (In the example, it is configured to appear only once). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the back-bottom-rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 appears, the valid period is not ended. By operating the upper plate effect button 257 again after the rotating decorative body unit 3550 is retracted, the back and lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 may be caused to appear, or a predetermined round (all rounds in the big hit gaming state) Or if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated in a specific round (for example, until the end of the 10th round or an odd number of rounds), the back and bottom rotation decoration The unit 3550 may be caused to appear, thereby further enhancing the joy of being a big hit, and the big hit by the appearance of the back and bottom rotating decorative body unit 3550 by the operation of the upper plate effect button 257. You can appeal to others and give you a sense of superiority.

  Further, in the above example, the structure is such that a battle effect (battle effect short, battle effect long) can be executed not only in the case of a big hit, but also in the case of a loss, but it becomes a big hit during a high-probability time-short state. It is assumed that the variation pattern of the battle effect can be executed only in the case, and the battle effect may not be executed in the case of a deviation. By configuring in this way, when a battle effect is executed, it is always a big hit, so it is possible to pay attention to the effect with a margin and the timing at which the control of the big hit gaming state is started and the type of big hit (4R normal) The big hit, the 4R latent big hit, the 4R positive change big hit, and the 16R positive change big hit) can be noted.

  In addition, a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit) that ends the high-probability short-time state is instructed by the determination result notification command during the high-probability short-time state, and a battle effect (battle effect short, battle effect) by the variation pattern command When the variation pattern of “Long” is instructed, the control of the big hit gaming state is started after the end of the battle effect, but the 4R big hit gaming state executed in this case is compared with the 16R big hit gaming state. Since the period required from the start to the end of the big hit gaming state is short, even if the battle effect is executed as a variable display effect until the end, the special symbol (this In this case, the special symbol (in this case) is compared with the period from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol to the end of the 16 jackpot gaming state. It can shorten the period until the end of the 4 jackpot gaming state from the start of variable display of the second special symbol).

[9. Real-time production]
Next, real-time effects will be described. A real-time effect is a video in which the main character 1500a walks in the field regardless of whether or not the game ball has won a start, and is divided into a plurality of scenes and displayed in order, and the divided scenes are looped to the center. While being displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1500, the game ball is currently displayed when the game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the start port unit 2100 and starts variable display accordingly. This is an effect that is executed seamlessly from a loop video scene.

  In the real-time effect in the present embodiment, for example, a loop image in which the main character walks in the field (in this example, the train car) is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and a game ball is displayed while the image is displayed. When the start winning prize is given and the variable display is performed, the effect corresponding to the object displayed in the field of the loop image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is displayed according to the variable pattern output from the main control board. The peripheral control MPU selects according to the fluctuation time. For example, if the main character walks through the field and changes display is performed when a window is displayed, perform an effect using the window, for example, an enemy pops out through the window. As a result, the scene displayed before the variable display and the scene displayed during the variable display can be linked in real time, and a variety of effects can be enjoyed.

[Loop video]
The loop video in this example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 206 is a diagram showing a sketch of the field in which the main character 1500a walks in the loop video. FIG. 207 is a diagram showing a loop image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. FIG. 207A shows a main character 1500a displayed in the area of scene 1 (hereinafter simply referred to as scene 1) in FIG. (B) is a loop image displayed when the main character 1500 a is displayed in the area of the scene 2, and (C) is a main image 1500 a in the area of the scene 3. It is a loop image displayed when is displayed. FIG. 208 is a diagram showing a continuation of the loop video in FIG. 207, (D) is a loop video displayed when the main character 1500a is displayed in the area of scene 4, and (E) is a scene. 5 is a loop image displayed when the main character 1500 a is displayed in the area 5, and (F) is a loop image displayed when the main character 1500 a is displayed in the scene 6 area.

First, as shown in FIG. 206, the loop image is that the main character 1500a walks from the start point to the goal point in the field designated in advance, and when it reaches the goal point, it returns to the start point and again to the goal point. It shows an image that is repeatedly displayed cyclically, such as walking forward. In this field, a scene is set for each location, and is divided into 6 scenes 1 to 6 in total.
A loop video starts from scene 1, and walks forward with scenes 2 and 3, and scene 6 is the last scene. After proceeding to the scene 6, the process returns to the scene 1 again and loops thereafter. Further, the required time from the start point of scene 1 to the goal point of scene 6 is, for example, 60 seconds to 70 seconds.

  In addition, although the loop image from the scene 1 to the scene 6 displayed on the central liquid crystal display device in this example is displayed as if the camera is directed from the side of the main character 1500a, it is not limited to this. Instead, for example, a display mode may be adopted in which the camera is directed from behind the main character 1500a and the main character 1500a that is walking is followed.

[Type of real-time production]
FIG. 209 is a diagram illustrating an effect table storing effect patterns used for real-time effects.
As shown in FIG. 209, the real-time effects in this example are prepared in total of eight kinds of effect patterns from PTN1 to PTN8.

  When the PTN1 is displaying a loop video and a door is displayed in the loop video, the PTN 1 performs reach by the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU (reach out of reach, reach) This is an effect pattern that can be selected when a big hit is shown. This effect pattern is an effect using a door, which is a fixed object, and an effect in which a creature jumps out after the door has opened vigorously.

  When the PTN 2 is displaying a loop video and a window is displayed in the loop video, the PTN 2 performs reach by the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU (reach out of reach, reach) This is an effect pattern that can be selected when a big hit) is displayed or when the variation display variation time is 12 seconds or longer. This effect pattern is an effect that uses a window that is a fixed object, and an effect that a window is broken and a creature jumps in is executed.

  When PTN3 is displaying a loop video and a door is displayed in the loop video, the variation display variation time is less than 5 seconds due to the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU. This is a production pattern that can be selected. This effect pattern is an effect that uses a door that is a fixed object, and an effect that only opens the door vigorously is executed.

  PTN4 is an effect pattern that can be selected when a loop video is displayed and a window is displayed in the loop video. This effect pattern is an effect that uses a window that is a fixed object, and an effect that only breaks the window is executed.

  When the display of the effect patterns PTN1 to PTN4 is impossible (the door or window object is not displayed in the loop video), the PTN 5 receives the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU. This is an effect pattern that can be selected when reaching by means of (reach out of reach, reach and jackpot) is indicated. This effect pattern is an effect that uses an image and an action, and displays an image in which the camera is directed from behind the main character 1500a, the main character 1500a stops, looks back in the direction of the camera, and then the camera again returns to the main character 1500a. When turning around, an effect in which an enemy appears in front of the main character 1500a is executed.

  PTN6 is selected except when the display time of the effect patterns of PTN1 to PTN4 is impossible, except when the change time of the change display is less than 12 seconds by the determination result notification command and the change pattern command received from the main control MPU This is a possible production pattern. This effect pattern is an effect using an image and an action, and displays an image in which the camera is directed from behind the main character 1500a. An effect is performed in which an enemy does not appear in front of the main character 1500a, although it turns around behind.

  PTN7 is selected except when the display time of the effect patterns of PTN1 to PTN6 is impossible, except when the change display change time is less than 5 seconds based on the determination result notification command and the change pattern command received from the main control MPU. This is a possible production pattern. This effect pattern is an effect in which the main character 1500a performs an action, and an effect is performed in which the main character 1500a stops, takes out the wireless device, and utters a single word (for example, “This is Tom, over”). Thereafter, a replacement effect for changing the background is executed.

  PTN8 is selected except when the display time of the effect patterns of PTN1 to PTN6 is impossible, except when the change display change time is less than 5 seconds by the determination result notification command and the change pattern command received from the main control MPU This is a possible production pattern. This effect pattern is an effect in which the main character 1500a performs an action, and an effect is performed in which the main character 1500a stops and turns back toward the camera, and a thumb up pose is performed. Thereafter, a replacement effect for changing the background is executed.

  Also, when none of the above variation patterns of PTN1 to 8 can be executed, that is, when no door or window object is displayed in the loop image and the variation time or variation pattern conditions are not satisfied, the background is displayed. A replacement effect to be changed is executed.

  The period during which the object action using the door or window can be selected is predetermined for each scene. This will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 210 is a diagram showing a period during which an object action can be executed for each scene. L1 indicates an object action using a door, that is, PTN1 or PTN3, and L2 indicates an object action using a window, that is, PTN2 or PTN4. In scenes 1 to 6, when the period of L1 and L2 is displayed and the conditions for the variation time and the variation pattern described above are satisfied, each effect pattern is selected according to the condition. When the period is in a range where L1 and L2 are not displayed and the above-described variation time and variation pattern conditions are not satisfied, each effect pattern cannot be selected. In the case where the variation display is executed during a period in which both the L1 and L2 effect patterns can be selected, is the variation time specified based on the variation pattern command received from the main control board or a variation with reach? Depending on whether or not, the production pattern is determined.

[Real-time production execution opportunity]
When no start prize is generated on the game board surface, the above-described loop images from scene 1 to scene 6 are cyclically looped and displayed on the central liquid crystal display 1500. Then, during the display of the loop image in which the main character 1500a is walking in the field, for example, when the game ball wins a start when the main character 1500a is present in the area of the scene 2, the main control board changes from the main control board to the peripheral control board. A variation pattern command is output, the command received from the main control board by the peripheral control MPU is analyzed, and the variation time is specified. In response to this, real-time effect determination processing is executed.

  Next, a control process when it is determined by the peripheral control MPU to perform a real-time effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 211 is a flowchart for stepwise selecting which effect pattern to select when it is determined to perform a real-time effect by the peripheral control MPU. This process is a process executed in the effect control process in step S602 in the 16 mS steady process (see FIG. 167) by the peripheral control MPU.

When the real-time effect determination process is started, in step S700, when the variation time in the variation is the number of seconds in which PTN1 to PTN4 can be executed (YES in step S700), it is determined to execute the object action ( Step S704), the real-time effect determination process ends.
On the other hand, if the variation time in the variation is not the number of seconds in which PTN1 to PTN4 can be executed (NO in step S700), it is determined whether the variation time in the variation is the number of seconds in which PTN5 to PTN6 can be performed. This is performed (step S702).

Next, in step S702, when the variation time in the variation is the number of seconds in which PTN5 to PTN6 can be executed (YES in step S702), it is determined to execute the camera action (step S708), and the real-time effect determination is performed. The process ends.
On the other hand, if the variation time in the variation is not the number of seconds in which PTN5 to PTN6 can be executed (NO in step S702), it is determined whether the variation time in the variation is the number of seconds in which PTN7 to PTN8 can be performed. This is performed (step S706).

Next, in step S706, when the variation time in the variation is the number of seconds in which PTN7 to PTN8 can be executed (YES in step S706), it is determined to execute the main character action (step S712), and real-time effect determination is performed. The process ends.
On the other hand, when the variation time in the variation is not the number of seconds in which PTN7 to PTN8 can be executed (NO in step S706), it is determined to execute the replacement notice, and the real-time effect determination process is ended (step S710).

[Example 1 of production flow in real-time production]
Next, an example of the flow in the real-time effect of this example will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 212 is a diagram showing an example of a real-time effect that is executed when the main character 1500a is in the scene 1 area.

  As shown in FIG. 212 (A), when the loop video is displayed, the main character 1500a walks through the field. For example, when the main character 1500a is in the scene 1 area in the field, as shown in FIG. 212 (B). When a game ball wins a winning prize, a fluctuation pattern command is output from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and the command received from the main control board by the peripheral control MPU is analyzed to specify the fluctuation time. Next, when the specified variation time can execute the effect pattern of PTN1 to PTN1, it is determined to execute the object action.

  When it is determined to execute the object action, one of the effect patterns of PTN1 to PTN4 is selected. If the analyzed variation pattern command is one that does not involve reach, PTN1 is an effect pattern that can be selected only for the variation pattern that involves reach. In this case, one of PTN2 to PTN4 is selected. In the scene 1 area, as a fixed object, a door is disposed at the left corner and a window is disposed at the right corner (see FIG. 212A). In FIG. 212A, the door is visible as a whole. Since only a part of the window is visible, in this case, it is determined to execute the effect pattern of PTN3.

  When the effect pattern of PTN3 is executed, as shown in FIG. 212 (C), the scene is not switched from the displayed loop video, and a transition is made to an effect that opens the doors vigorously. At this time, the main character 1500a is surprised that the door has opened vigorously, and performs an action to pay attention to the door as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 212 (E), the main character 1500a seamlessly transitions again to a loop video as it walks through the field.

  In Example 1 described above, when the analyzed variation pattern command is accompanied by reach, one of PTN1 to PTN4 is selected. In Example 1, since the door can be visually recognized as a whole and only a part of the window can be visually recognized, one of the effect patterns of PTN1 or PTN3 is selected. In this case, the peripheral control MPU distributes one of the effect patterns in the random number lottery and the distribution table. For example, PTN1 that can be selected only in the case of a variation pattern with reach is selected at a rate of 10%, and PTN3 that can be selected even in a variation pattern other than reach is selected at a rate of 90%.

  Also, even if the window or door, which is a fixed object, is only partially visible or not visible at all, an effect pattern using the door or window may be selected. In order to convey a situation where the window is often opened or the window is torn, the presentation is expressed only with sound using the speaker unit 920. Thereby, it is possible to give the player a feeling of thrill and fear that the door is opened vigorously when the window is not visible, or the window is broken, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Example 2 of production flow in real-time production]
When the main character 1500a walks through the field while the loop video is displayed, for example, when the game ball starts and wins when the main character 1500a is in the scene 2 area in the field, the variation pattern from the main control board to the peripheral control board A command is output, the command received from the main control board by the peripheral control MPU is analyzed, and the variation time is specified. Next, when the specified variation time cannot execute the effect patterns with PTN1 to PTN4 and when the effect pattern with PTN5 to 6 can be executed, it is determined to perform the camera action.

  When it is decided to execute the camera action, one of the effect patterns of PTN5 to 6 is selected. When the analyzed variation pattern command is not accompanied by reach, it is determined to execute the effect pattern of PTN 6 that can be selected when the variation time is less than 12 seconds.

  When the effect pattern of PTN6 is executed, the main character 1500a stops without changing the scene from the displayed loop image, and the effect shifts to the effect of looking back toward the camera. Next, when the camera turns around behind the main character 1500a again, an enemy appears in front of the main character 1500a. Then, an action is taken to hold a weapon such as a gun possessed against the enemy. After that, the main character 1500a seamlessly transitions again to a loop video in which it walks through the field.

  In Example 2 above, if the analyzed variation pattern command is accompanied by reach, one of PTN5 to 6 is selected. In this case, the peripheral control MPU distributes one of the effect patterns in the random number lottery and the distribution table. For example, the selectable PTN5 is selected at a rate of 20% only in the case of the variation pattern with reach, and the selectable PTN6 is selected at a rate of 80% even in a variation pattern other than the reach.

[Example 3 of production flow in real-time production]
When the main character 1500a walks through the field while the loop video is displayed, for example, when the game ball starts and wins when the main character 1500a is in the area of the scene 5 in the field, the variation pattern from the main control board to the peripheral control board A command is output, the command received from the main control board by the peripheral control MPU is analyzed, and the variation time is specified. Next, when the specified variation time cannot execute the effect pattern of PTN1 to 6 and when the effect pattern of PTN7 to 8 can be executed, it is determined to perform the main character action.

  If it is decided to execute the hero action, one of the effect patterns of PTN 7 to 8 will be selected. If the analyzed variation pattern command has no reach, both variation patterns are selectable production patterns when the variation time is less than 5 seconds. In this case, the peripheral control MPU performs random lottery and vibration. The minute table is assigned to one of the production patterns. For example, PTN7 is selected at a rate of 95% and PTN8 at a rate of 5%.

  For example, when the effect pattern of PTN7 is executed, the main character 1500a stops without switching the scene from the displayed loop video, and the wireless device is taken out to shift to an effect that says a single word. Next, the main character 1500a performs an action of uttering a line “This is Tom, over.” Toward the radio. After that, the main character 1500a does not seamlessly shift to the loop video as it walks through the field, but displays the replacement image, displays the background, and performs non-seamless scene switching.

[Example 4 of production flow in real-time production]
When the main character 1500a walks through the field while the loop video is displayed, for example, when the game ball starts and wins when the main character 1500a is in the area of the scene 5 in the field, the variation pattern from the main control board to the peripheral control board A command is output, the command received from the main control board by the peripheral control MPU is analyzed, and the variation time is specified. Next, when no door or window object is displayed in the loop video and the specified variation time and variation pattern conditions are not satisfied, the effect patterns of PTN1 to PTN8 cannot be executed. , It is decided to give a replacement notice.

  When it is determined that the replacement notice is to be executed, the above-described various action effects are not performed, the replacement image for switching the background is displayed, and the replacement notice is performed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, unlike the conventional effect in which the relationship between the loop image and the variable display is weak, the scene displayed before the variable display and the variable display are displayed. Since the scenes can be linked to the scenes in real time and a seamless presentation can be performed, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented presentation mode and to improve the interest in the game.

[Return to loop video]
The effect executed when the effect patterns PTN7 to 8 and PTN1 to PTN8 cannot be selected among the effect patterns described above executes an effect (replacement notice) for displaying a replacement image for switching the screen from the loop video. Is. Therefore, in this example, after the replacement effect is completed, when returning to the loop video, the scene returns to the area where the main character 1500a existed before the replacement effect was executed. For example, when the main character 1500a is present in the scene 2 area, the above-described replacement effect is performed, and when returning to the loop video again, the scene 2 area is designated instead of returning to the start point of the scene 1 area. Returning to the return point, the loop video process is executed to display the loop video again from the scene area where the main character 1500a existed before the replacement effect was performed. Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the flow of the loop video processing to be described later and the selected effect pattern, and FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the flow of the loop effect.

  The process of executing the loop image and the selected effect pattern is executed in the effect control process of step S602 in the 16 mS steady process (see FIG. 167) by the peripheral control MPU.

  In order to return to the designated return point after performing the replacement effect, the value of the pointer indicates in which scene the main character 1500a existed immediately before the replacement image was displayed, which is a replacement effect in this example. Are identified. The default value of the pointer is “1” corresponding to the scene 1. When the main character 1500a walks through the field and moves to the next scene, the point value is incremented by 1 and the upper limit value is “6”. That is, the point value when the main character 1500 a exists in the scene 1 is “1”, and the point value when the main character 1500 a exists in the scene 6 is “6”.

  For example, when the replacement effect is performed when the main character 1500a is present in the scene 2 while the loop image is being displayed, the point value is “2”. Is configured such that the main character 1500 a returns to the start point of the scene 2 corresponding to the point value “2” and returns to the loop video.

When the loop video process is started, if the replacement effect is being executed in step S720 (YES in step S720), the loop video process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the replacement effect is not being executed (NO in step S720), the scene corresponding to the pointer value in the loop video (when the pointer value is “3”, the scene 3 is displayed) is displayed (step 720). S722).

Next, in step S724, it is determined whether or not one scene of the displayed loop video has ended (the main character 1500a that is walking straddled the scene). If one scene has not ended (NO in step S724). ) Ends the loop video processing.
On the other hand, when one scene is completed, it is determined whether or not the pointer value is the upper limit value (“6”) (step S726).

Next, in step S726, when the pointer value is not the upper limit value (NO in step S726), 1 is added to the pointer value, and the loop video processing is ended.
On the other hand, if the value of the pointer is the upper limit value (YES in step S726), the value of the pointer is returned to the default value “1”, and the loop video processing is terminated.

  According to the configuration described above, the pointer value is set corresponding to the scene in which the main character 1500a exists in the loop video, and any scene in the loop video is displayed according to the pointer value. It is decided whether to do it. In other words, after the replacement effect is executed, when returning to the loop image again, it does not simply return to the start point of the loop image, but starts the loop effect from the scene where the main character 1500a existed before the replacement effect was performed. For example, before the replacement effect is performed, the main character 1500a exists in the scene 4, but after the replacement effect ends, the area of the scene 4 It is possible to prevent an uncomfortable feeling caused by starting the loop video from a different position, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In the above-described process of returning to the loop video, the identification pointer value indicating which scene the main character 1500a was in is added every time the main character 1500a moves the scene. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the return point can be set more finely by increasing the upper limit value of the pointer value and providing points where the pointer value is added at a plurality of locations in each scene. it can. As a result, the loop effect can be restarted from a position close to the position where the main character 1500a existed before the replacement effect is executed, and the loop image can be naturally restored without causing a sense of incongruity. be able to.

[10. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176. FIG. 174 is a front view of the game board in which the front structural member and the front unit are cut at the approximate center in the front-rear direction in the game area. FIG. 175 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the right part in the game area in FIG. 174, and FIG. It is. Further, FIG. 176 is an explanatory view showing the vicinity of the top prize winning opening in FIG. 174 in an enlarged manner.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is obtained when the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side on the upper side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 that divides the game area 5a into left and right depending on the strength of the game. It should be noted that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the game ball can be driven harder as it is rotated clockwise.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions are implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). By abutting, the flow-down speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the ball launcher 680 hits the game ball with a driving strength less than a predetermined driving strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504, Of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, it enters the left side of the front view from the highest part. Then, the game ball that has entered the left side of the outermost peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the center accessory 2500 while the game ball abuts against a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). Will flow down. Then, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, the game ball passes through the warp passage 2521 and It is supplied to the left end of the stage 2530 from a warp outlet 2523 that opens in the frame.

  The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 roll back and forth on the stage 2530, and side guide grooves 2532 formed on both sides of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. If it is released from the front, it will flow down the area above the start port unit 2100 below the stage 2530 in the game area 5a. Thereby, a game ball may be received in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100.

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released forward from the central guide groove 2531 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5 a of the stage 2530, the start port unit 2100 that opens directly below the central guide groove 2531. The first starting port 2002 is accepted with high probability. When a game ball is received in the first start port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board and the payout control board.

  By the way, if the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, a game is played below the center accessory 2500 by a plurality of obstacle nails, the first shelf 2201a of the side unit 2200, and the like. There is a possibility that it will be guided to the center in the left-right direction in the area 5a and received by the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, etc. arranged on the downstream side. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board and the payout control board.

  Also, the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not flow down to the attacker unit 2300 side due to the lower side of the center accessory 2500 extending between the start port unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300. It will not be accepted into the general winning port 2001, the second starting port 2004, the lower large winning port 2005, etc. of the attacker unit 2300. The starting port unit 2100 is provided with a horizontally-rectangular fake portion 2105a that is similar to the lower large winning port door member 2352 that opens and closes the lower large winning port 2005 in the attacker unit 2300, below the first starting port 2002. Therefore, it is possible to make an illusion that there is a big winning opening below the first starting opening as in a conventional pachinko machine.

  On the other hand, the ball launcher 680 is driven with a driving strength not less than a predetermined driving strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504, so that it is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. The game ball enters (is struck) to the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. Then, the game ball that has entered to the right side of the highest peripheral portion of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 passes through the upper game space 2541 and the right passage 2542 from the upper right entrance to the lower right exit 2543. It is discharged directly above the gate portion 2003 in the attacker unit 2300. As a result, a game ball that has been thrown down (right-handed) so as to flow down the right side of the center accessory 2500 passes through the gate portion 2003 with a very high probability. Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 flows down to the shelf member 2303 through the front of the second start port 2004, rolls left on the shelf member 2303 in the front view, and then the front of the shelf member 2303. It is emitted downward from the left end of the view. The game balls released from the shelf member 2303 flow down to the lower right rail 1004 through the front of the lower grand prize opening 2005, roll on the lower right rail 1004 to the left in the front view, and play from the out port 1111. It is discharged out of the area 5a.

  When the game ball released from the lower right exit 2543 flows down the left side of the gate portion 2003 when viewed from the front, the second start port 2004 is provided via the general winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 and the guide portion 2302b of the start port front member 2302. Or, there is a possibility that it will be accepted in the Shimodai prize opening 2005. On the other hand, when a game ball flows down on the right side of the gate portion 2003 when viewed from the front, it flows down onto the lower right rail 1004 and is discharged from the out port 1111 without being received by the general winning port 2001, the second starting port 2004, or the like. The

  Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the left side of the gate part 2003 when the lower major prize opening 2005 is open, it is accepted into the lower major prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

  When the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2305, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board. Advances for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 3 seconds) to open the second start port 2004. Accordingly, when the game ball reaches the front of the second start port 2004 at the timing when the second start port door member 2323 is moved forward and opened, the second start port door member 2323 changes the flow direction to the rear. And will be received in the second starting port 2004. When a game ball is received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board and the payout control board.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain amount of time is set after the normal lottery is started until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0). 1 to 10 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5.

  In addition, if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and before the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the result of the previous normal lottery ends. In addition, the number of holdings of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without holding even if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, an advantageous game state (for example, “big hit”, “ A lottery of a special lottery result that generates “winning”, “small hit”, “per probability variation”, “per time reduction”, etc.) is performed. Then, the player draws a special lottery result that has been drawn out to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 5 to 360 seconds). Note that the special lottery results that are drawn when the game balls are received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “15R big hit”, “ There are “per probability change (probability change)”, “per time reduction (time reduction)”, “short per probability change time”, “no per short time change probability”, and so on.

  When the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state Any one of the lower prize opening door member 2352 of the attacker unit 2300 or the upper prize opening door member 2550 of the center accessory 2500 opens and closes in an opening / closing pattern corresponding to the lottery special lottery result. A game ball can be received at the winning prize opening 2005 or the upper university winning prize opening 2006. When a game ball is received in the lower university winning opening 2005 or the upper university winning opening 2006 when the lower university winning opening 2005 or the upper university winning opening 2006 is in an open state, a predetermined number of pieces are received from the payout device 830 by the main control board and the payout board. (For example, 10 or 13) game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the lower prize winning door member 2352 or the upper prize winning opening door member 2550 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, the lower prize winning opening 2005 or the upper prize winning opening 2006 accepts a game ball. The game ball can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the lower large prize opening door member 2352 or the upper large prize opening door member 2550 is opened for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that closes in a state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the lower big prize opening door member 2352 or the upper big prize opening door member 2550 is opened, or If any of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls into the big prize opening 2005 or the upper big prize opening 2006 is satisfied, the lower big prize opening door member 2352 or the upper big prize opening door member 2550 is satisfied. An opening / closing pattern (a single opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that is closed is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, the “2R big hit” is repeated for two rounds, and the “15R big hit” is repeated for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

[Reserved memory for accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004]
In the present embodiment, random numbers are acquired to execute a special lottery by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and variation display based on the acquired random number values is started. In the meantime, if a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the change cannot be started, so the random number value is held until the previously executed change display is completed. . The number of reserved random numbers to be held is limited to up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for those exceeding that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if a game ball is received in the mouth 2004, it is discarded without acquiring a random value.

[Send hold number specification command to peripheral control board]
As described above, the main control MPU changes the number of first special symbols on hold based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002, that is, the first start port shown in FIG. When the value of the first special reserved number counter in step S43 of the passing process is incremented by 1 and when the first special symbol reserved memory is digested, that is, in the first special symbol normal process shown in FIG. When the value of the first special reservation number counter in step S103 is decremented by 1, in the storage process (step S20) of FIG. 155 (b), a command (first reservation number designation command) that indicates the number of reservations of the first special symbol 0-4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board.

  Further, when the number of the second special symbol held changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, that is, when 1 is added in step S53 of FIG. 158, and the second special symbol is held. When one memory is digested, that is, in the second special symbol normal processing which is not shown and described because it is the same algorithm as the first special symbol normal processing, the value of the second special pending number counter is decremented by one. In this case, in the storage process (step S20), a command (second hold number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the hold number of the second special symbol is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board.

[Reception of commands at the peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU controls the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like based on the command received from the main control board in the 16 mS steady process (see FIG. 167). Execute the process.

[Command analysis processing]
That is, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606 shown as an example of the 16 mS steady process of FIG. 168 every 16 mS. For example, in the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board is analyzed.

[Production control processing]
In addition, in the effect control process in step S602, based on the analysis result of the command, as an example, as the process in step S137, the lottery result (a type of jackpot, reach losing or losing is indicated (stop of the first special symbol) A design pattern notification process command or a variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process) may be transmitted in accordance with each lottery result so that the pattern form may be transmitted to the peripheral control board A control process related to the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in step S149, the second variation pattern setting process).

  The peripheral control MPU controls the display of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle Stop display in the order of the decorative symbols (Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be synchronized and displayed in the same symbol, and may be stopped and displayed simultaneously).

  Furthermore, also in the case where it is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601) that the first hold number designation commands 0 to 4 and the second hold number designation commands 0 to 4 are received, in the effect control process in step S602, In the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, a control process for displaying the first reserved number related to the first special symbol and the second reserved number related to the second special symbol is executed.

[Display of decorative design in central liquid crystal display device 1500]
Next, an example regarding a display mode in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 will be described. FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating an example of the hold number display on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 according to the embodiment. Here, an example of the display mode of the reserved memory during the progress of the effect of one variation of the decorative symbol drawn on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 by the player sitting directly facing the gaming machine 1 will be described. .

  Note that “1 variation” means that a first special symbol display (not shown) of the function display unit 1400 shown in the front view of the game board 5 in FIG. The first special lottery result selected by lottery is changed from the start of the change to the first special symbol until the stop display is performed. Until the second special lottery result lottered by accepting the game balls is started as a second special symbol and stopped and displayed, and the effect drawn on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display 1500 is also the first special symbol or It is done in accordance with the time when the second special symbol is displayed.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present example, in the normal gaming state, that is, in the left-handed state, the gaming ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the second start port door member 2323 is driven. I will not. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, and only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs. However, except for the case where there is a holding ball of the second special symbol, only the variation display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display, and the big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit pertinent to the first special symbol is executed. 4R probability variation big hit, 16R sudden variation big hit, and 8R certainty big hit). For this reason, hereinafter, the case where there is a reserved storage of the first special symbol will be mainly described.

  The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 is controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board based on the command from the main control board. ), At the upper part of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, a variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a on the left side, the decorative symbol 1600b on the center, and the decorative symbol 1600c on the right side is started, and a predetermined time has elapsed. Later, the variation display of the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c is stopped, and the player can recognize the first special lottery result (winning determination result).

  In FIG. 177 (A), as an example of the decorative design being changed, the left decorative design 1600a and the right decorative design 1600c are stopped and displayed in the same design on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and only the middle decorative design 1600b is changed. An example is shown in which the reach state is generated by a decorative design by adopting the display mode. In FIG. 177 (A), as an example, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed as the symbol “7”, and only the middle decorative symbol 1600b is changed.

[Display of reserved memory in central liquid crystal display device 1500]
As shown in FIG. 177 (A), a first reserved number display area 1510 (first start port) related to the first special symbol is displayed on the lower left side of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 that can be visually recognized by the player. 2002) is set, and a second reserved number display area 1580 (related to the second start port 2004) related to the second special symbol is set on the lower right side of the display panel.

  In FIG. 177 (A), in the first hold number display area 1510, two hold images 1521 and 1522 indicating that the first special symbol is held in correspondence with the number of holds in the lottery result are displayed. It is indicated that the first number of holds of the lottery result for the special symbol is “2”. In addition, in the second number-of-holds display area 1580, the hold image indicating that the second special symbol is held in correspondence with the second number of holds of the lottery result is not displayed, and the lottery is drawn for the second special symbol. It is shown that there are no pending results.

  In addition, the display of the 1st reservation number in the 1st reservation number display area 1510 about the 1st special symbol is the 1st reservation memory, the 2nd reservation memory, the 3rd reservation memory from the left toward the center, The hold images 1521 to 1524 are displayed as in the fourth hold storage. In addition, the second hold number in the second hold number display area 1580 for the second special symbol is displayed in the first hold memory, the second hold memory, the third hold from the center toward the right. The hold image is displayed like the hold storage and the fourth hold storage.

  Moreover, in this example, the hold images 1521 to 1524 representing the hold storage can take a plurality of types of display modes. For example, a plurality of types of display modes may be used, in which the image shape is the same and the display color is different, the image display color is the same and the shape is different, and both the image shape and the display color are different. obtain.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved images 1521 to 1524 indicating that the first special symbols are reserved and stored are displayed in a circular shape, and the display colors of the reserved images 1521 to 1524 are changed to a plurality of colors. I am going to do it.

  In FIG. 177 (A), the reserved image 1521 and the reserved image 1522 for the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory for the first special symbol are displayed in the normal display mode of the reserved memory, for example, in a circular shape. It is displayed in “blue” (first reserved image) and is visible to the player.

  Next, in FIG. 177 (B), the middle decoration symbol 1600b which is being changed is displayed in response to the symbol “ "5" is stopped and displayed. As a result, the left decorative symbol is "7", the middle decorative symbol is "5" and the right decorative symbol is "7", and the decorative symbol variation stop result is "reach off" "Indicates that the player has been notified.

  Next, in FIG. 177 (C), the peripheral control MPU specifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board in the command analysis processing in step S601. In the display panel of the display device 1500, it is shown that the symbol variation of the left decorative symbol 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c has started. Hereinafter, this is called digestion of reserved memory.

  The peripheral control MPU specifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board in the command analysis processing in step S601. 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c are started.

  Then, thereafter, the peripheral control MPU analyzes that the first hold number designation command “1” transmitted from the main control board is received in the command analysis process (step S601), and in response to this, The first reserved memory for the first special symbol is digested, the reserved image 1521 displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and the second special memory for the first special symbol in FIG. The displayed hold image 1522 is moved and displayed as the hold image 1521 (circular and display color “blue”) as the new first hold memory, and the first hold number of the lottery result is displayed for the first special symbol. “1”.

[Hold change effect]
FIG. 178 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hold change effect using the hold number display on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In FIG. 178 (A), it is analyzed by the command analysis process (step S601) that the first hold number designation command “2” transmitted from the main control board is received during the variation of the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c. Thereafter, the fact that the first hold number designation command “3” transmitted from the main control board has been received is analyzed by the command analysis processing (step S601).

  In response to this, in the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in FIG. 178 (A), a second second hold is newly added to the right side of the hold image 1521 displayed as the first hold memory for the first special symbol. The stored image 1522 (circular and display color “blue”) is displayed as memory, and the third reserved memory is newly stored on the right side of the stored image 1522 displayed as the second reserved memory. An image 1523 (circular and display color “blue”) is displayed, which indicates that the first reserved number of lottery results for the first special symbol is “3”.

  Next, in FIG. 178 (B), it is analyzed by command analysis processing (step S601) that the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board is received during the variation of the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c. In response to this, for the first special symbol, the reserved image 1524 (circular display color is newly displayed on the right side of the reserved image 1523 displayed as the third reserved memory on the right side. “Blue”) is displayed, indicating that the first number of holds of the lottery result for the first special symbol is “4”, and that the number of reserved memories for the first special symbol has reached the upper limit. In the following description, the first hold number display area 1510 is simply referred to as a hold number display area 1510.

[Holding change effect using the upper plate effect button 257 and the hold image representing the hold memory]
In a conventional gaming machine configured to perform a hold notice effect, the probability of a big hit is kept low in a normal gaming state and the probability of reaching is not so high. For this reason, the player had a low chance to see the hold notice effect. In other words, it can be said that there is a low probability that the hold notice effect will be performed.

  In addition, there is a case where a hold notice is made on condition that the operation button is operated. Hereinafter, since the content of the effect changes when the player operates such an effect form, it is referred to as “participatory effect”. However, because there is a low probability that a hold notice effect will be performed, some players do not have the opportunity to operate the operation buttons provided for the effect as effective, and are dissatisfied, reducing the interest of the game There was a risk of it.

  Therefore, the embodiment described below relates to an invention relating to a gaming machine that makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of a game by expanding opportunities for participation in a participatory effect.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU that controls the production control may have a predetermined number (for example, “4” as the upper limit, or a smaller number) of the first reserved number of lottery results for the first special symbol. For example, it may be “3” or “2”), and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform the hold change effect. That is, in this example, whether or not to perform a hold change effect on the condition that the command analysis processing (step S601) has analyzed that the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board has been received. A lottery (referred to as a lottery for holding change effect) is performed.

  When it is determined to perform the hold change effect in the lottery of the hold change effect, the player can make an operation to the upper plate effect button 257 (FIGS. 22 and 31) effective, and the operation to the upper plate effect button 257 can be performed. Each time it is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 (FIG. 38), a hold change effect of changing the display color of the hold image representing the hold memory is performed.

[Hold change effect screen]
In the hold change effect of this example, the display color (referred to as the final display color) of the hold image to be finally displayed is determined based on the start winning timing. FIG. 178 (C) shows an example of the hold change effect screen displayed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 when it is determined to perform the hold change effect.

  As shown in FIG. 178 (C), the left, middle and right decorative symbols are reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In addition, the characters “The color of the hold changes when the button is pressed!” Is displayed in the approximate center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. It is suggested that it is effective and prompts the player to operate the button.

  In addition, although it can set arbitrarily how long the effective period which validates operation to the above-mentioned top plate production | presentation button 257 (FIG. 22, FIG. 31) is transmitted, it transmits from a main control board as an example. Until the command control process (step S601) analyzes that the received next control command has been received.

  As the control command, for example, any one of a stop display command, a jackpot start command, a determination result notification command, a first hold number designation command, or a combination selected from a plurality of these control commands is used. Can do. In this example, for easy understanding of the explanation, it is assumed that the next stop display command transmitted from the main control board is received until it is analyzed in the command analysis processing (step S601).

  FIG. 179 is a diagram showing an example of a hold change effect using the hold number display on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 performed subsequent to FIG. 178 (C). In FIG. 179 (A), as a result of the player performing an operation (first time) on the upper plate effect button 257 in response to the suggestion of the button operation to the player, the fourth hold in FIG. 179 (C). It is shown that the display color of the reserved image 1524 (circular and display color “blue”) that has been stored and displayed in the normal display mode has changed to “green”.

  Although not explicitly shown in FIG. 178 (C) and FIG. 179, during the hold change effect, the display color of the hold image in the hold storage that is the target for the button operation by the player changes each time. The final display color of the hold image stored in the hold memory is determined in advance when it is determined to perform the hold change effect. In the specific example shown in the figure, it is assumed that the final display color of the target hold image in the hold storage is determined to be “red”. As a result, the display color of the target hold image in the hold storage is displayed in the hold number display area 1510 in the final display color determined as a result.

  In FIG. 179 (A), the characters “When the button is pressed, the color of the hold changes!” Is displayed in the approximate center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. It is suggested that the operation to the button is effective, and the player is prompted to operate the button.

  Next, in FIG. 179 (B), as a result of the player operating the upper plate effect button 257 (second time) in response to the button operation suggestion to the player, in FIG. 179 (A), It is shown that the display color of the hold image 1524 displayed as the hold image 1524 (circular display color “green”) as the fourth hold storage has changed to “yellow”.

  Here, among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size in the upper right part of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the left decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the symbol “3”. The decorative pattern on the right continues to display variation.

  In FIG. 179 (B), the letters “the color of the hold changes when the button is pressed!” Are displayed in the approximate center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. It is suggested that the operation of the button is effective, and the player is prompted to operate the button.

  Next, in FIG. 179 (C), as a result of the player operating the upper plate effect button 257 (third time) in response to the button operation suggestion to the player, in FIG. 179 (B), It is shown that the display color of the hold image 1524 displayed as the hold image 1524 (circular display color “yellow”) as the fourth hold memory has changed to “rainbow”.

  Here, among the left, middle and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size in the upper right part of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the symbol “3”. Only the decorative symbols in the decorative symbols continue to display the variation. In addition, the stop symbol “3” of the left and right decorative symbols indicates that reach has occurred.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an example of a hold change effect using a hold number display on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 performed subsequent to FIG. 179 (C). In FIG. 180 (A), in response to the fact that the stop display command received from the main control board is specified by the peripheral control MPU in the command analysis processing in step S601, the changing medium decoration symbol 1600b is symbol “4”. And the reduced display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols in the upper right part of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is eliminated, and the original position and size of the center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are eliminated. As a result, the left decorative symbol is “3”, the middle decorative symbol is “4” and the right decorative symbol is “3”, and the decorative symbol variation stop result is “reach off”. This indicates that the player has been notified.

  In FIG. 180 (A), in response to the stop display command being specified in the command analysis process of step S601, the display mode of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 indicates that “the color of the hold when the button is pressed”. Is disappearing, suggesting that the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is no longer effective (the validity period for enabling the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 has ended). It has been shown.

  In this way, the hold change effect is performed on the condition that the number of holds indicated by the control command (first hold number designation command “4”) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4). It has become. For this reason, the player is widely given an opportunity to perform the hold change effect. In addition, during the execution of the hold change effect, every time an operation is performed on the operation input device (the upper plate effect button 257), the hold memory (4 in this example) that is the target displayed in the hold number display area 1510 is displayed. The display color of the hold image 1524 in the (th hold storage) changes. Therefore, during the hold change effect, an opportunity for the player to operate the operation input device is given not only once but multiple times. Moreover, each time the operation input device is operated, the display color of the reserved image in the target stored storage changes each time. Therefore, since the opportunity which can participate in a hold production participation type production is expanded, the fall of game entertainment can be suppressed.

[Relationship between reserved memory digestion and reserved images]
180 (B) to 180 (C) show how the reserved memory is being digested. First, FIG. 180 (B) shows that after the four reserved memories in FIG. 180 (A), two reserved memories have been digested.

  The peripheral control MPU specifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board in the command analysis processing in step S601. 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c are started.

  Then, thereafter, the peripheral control MPU analyzes that the first hold number designation command “3” transmitted from the main control board is received by the command analysis processing (step S601), and in response to this, The first reserved memory for the first special symbol is digested, and the reserved image 1521 displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and the second to fourth for the first special symbol in FIG. 180 (A). On-hold images 1522 (display color “blue”), 1523 (display color “blue”), and 1524 display color “rainbow” displayed as the on-hold storage become the new first to third on-hold memories. 1521 (circular and display color “blue”), reserved image 1522 (circular and display color “blue”), and reserved image 1523 (circular and display color “rainbow”) are moved and displayed. The first pending the number of lottery result is "3".

  Next, in response to the fact that the stop display command received from the main control board is specified by the peripheral control MPU in the command analysis processing in step S601, the changing middle decoration symbol 1600b is “omitted, but out of place”. As a result, the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol were stopped and displayed as a combination of disjoint symbols, and the player was informed that the result of the decorative symbol fluctuation stoppage was “displaced”. And

  Next, the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board are specified by the peripheral control MPU in the command analysis processing in step S601, and in response to this, in the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 The symbol variation of the left decorative symbol 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c is started.

  Then, thereafter, the peripheral control MPU analyzes that the first hold number designation command “2” transmitted from the main control board is received in the command analysis processing (step S601), and in response to this, , The first reserved memory for the first special symbol is digested, the reserved image 1521 (display color “blue”) displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and the first special symbol in FIG. 180 (A). 1523 (display color “blue”) and 1524 (display color “rainbow”) that were displayed as the second to third reserved memories for the first and second reserved memories are the reserved images 1521 ( The circle-shaped display color “blue”) is moved and displayed as a reserved image 1522 (the circle-shaped display color “rainbow”), and the first number of reserved lottery results is “2” for the first special symbol. FIG. 180B shows the result of the above process.

  Thereafter, in response to the fact that the stop display command received from the main control board is specified by the peripheral control MPU in the command analysis processing in step S601, the changing middle decoration symbol 1600b is omitted from the symbol. As a result, the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed as a combination of out-of-order symbols, and the player is informed that the result of the decorative symbol variation stoppage is “out-of-range”. I will do it.

  Next, the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board are specified by the peripheral control MPU in the command analysis processing in step S601, and in response to this, in the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 The symbol variation of the left decorative symbol 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c is started.

  Then, thereafter, the peripheral control MPU analyzes that the first hold number designation command “1” transmitted from the main control board is received in the command analysis process (step S601), and in response to this, The first reserved memory for the first special symbol is digested, and the reserved image 1521 (display color “blue”) displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and the first special symbol in FIG. 180B is displayed. 15223 (display color “rainbow”), which was displayed as the second reserved memory for the image, becomes the new first reserved memory in FIG. 180C, and the reserved image 1521 (circular display color “red”). The first hold number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is “1”.

  In this way, in this example, the display color of the reserved image in the target storage stored in the above example is changed to “rainbow” by the player's operation to the upper plate effect button 257 during the hold change effect. The final display color of the hold image in the hold storage that is the target is determined in advance when it is determined to perform the hold change effect.

  The effect developed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is closely related to the reach variation state and the big hit notification state of the lottery symbols displayed on the display panel, and the player's interest and attention The degree is very high.

  Therefore, even after the hold change effect is over, in other words, even after the effective period of the upper plate effect button 257 has ended, 1 is stored in the first hold number display area 1510 as the hold memory is consumed. The display color of the hold image (the hold image in which the display color is changed) that is the target of sequentially moving the display position toward the th hold storage is maintained as it is without being changed. For this reason, when a player progresses a game, consideration is given so that the entertainment information provided from the display panel does not have an adverse effect and does not lower the interest of the game.

  In the specific example shown in the figure, when the hold image in the hold storage that is the target is displayed as the first hold storage in the hold number display area 1510, the display color is changed to the predetermined final display color “red”. As a result, the reserved image stored in the reserved storage is displayed. For this reason, the player who has changed the color of the reserved image by operating it will be given a surprise and surprise such as “That…? Why has it changed to red?”. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player's game.

  FIG. 181 is a time schematically representing the hold change effect of this example, the change in the display color of the target hold image, and the display color of the hold image whose display position is to be changed as the hold memory is digested. It is a chart.

  As shown in FIG. 181, the variation time of the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display by the main control MPU and the variation time of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are approximately one. I'm doing it. In addition, during the change of the first special symbol, the value of the first special holding number counter of the main control MPU is updated to “4” due to the winning of the game ball at the first start port 2002, and the main control The first hold number designation command “4” is output from the board.

  Whether or not the peripheral control MPU performs the hold change effect on condition that the command analysis process (step S601) has analyzed that the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board has been received. As a result of the lottery of the hold change effect, it is decided to perform the hold change effect in the lottery of the hold change effect. In this example, the fourth hold memory is set as the hold target of the effect, An operation (referred to as button operation) to the dish effect button 257 is validated. In addition, as the fourth reserved memory determined as the advance notice object, a normal display color reserved image 1524 (circle-shaped display color “blue”), which is described as “blue 4” in the figure, is displayed. Yes.

  Further, in the hold change effect of this example, the display color of the hold image to be finally displayed (referred to as the final display color) is determined based on the start winning timing. Assume that the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “red”.

  In FIG. 181, the display of the hold image 1524 as the fourth hold memory determined as the production target described as “green 4” as a result of the first button operation performed by the player during the symbol change. The color has changed to “green”. Thereafter, as a result of the second button operation by the player, the display color of the reserved image 1524 as the fourth reserved memory that is described as “Yellow 4”, which is described as “Yellow 4”, is changed to “Yellow”. It has changed. Thereafter, as a result of the third button operation by the player, the display color of the reserved image 1524 as the fourth reserved memory, which is described as “Rainbow 4”, which is determined as the production target, is “Rainbow”. Has changed.

  Thereafter, a stop display command is output from the main control board based on the fact that the variation of the first special symbol has stopped. The peripheral control MPU stops the variation of the decorative symbols on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in response to the stop display command being specified in the command analysis processing in step S601. At the same time, it is shown that the button operation is no longer valid (the validity period during which the operation to the upper plate effect button 257 is valid has ended).

  After that, the main control MPU displays the variation of the decorative symbol as the number of the first special symbol held is exhausted. In FIG. 181, each variation of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol of the first special symbol indicator is displayed. The display is performed three times. The first hold number designation command 3 (hereinafter, simply referred to as the hold number designation command 3) is output as the first hold memory is consumed, and the display position of the hold image is displayed in the hold number display area 1510 accordingly. And the reserved image 1524 as the fourth reserved memory determined as the production target is shifted to the reserved image as the third reserved memory described as “Rainbow 3” without changing the display color. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, the first hold number designation command 2 (hereinafter simply referred to as the hold number designation command 2) is output with the digestion of the second hold memory, and the hold image is displayed in the hold number display area 1510 accordingly. The display image is shifted and the hold image 1524 as the third hold memory determined as the production target is the hold image as the second hold memory described as “rainbow 2” without changing the display color. It is shifted and displayed.

  Further, as the third hold memory is consumed, the first hold number designation command 1 (hereinafter simply referred to as the hold number designation command 1) is output, and in response to this, the hold number display area 1510 displays the hold image. The display position is shifted and the hold image 1524 as the third hold memory determined as the production target is changed as the first hold memory described as “red 1” by changing the determined final display color. Is displayed shifted to the hold image.

[Processes related to pending storage notice by peripheral control MPU]
FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing each process executed by the peripheral control MPU in connection with the hold storage as each process of the effect control process of step S602 of FIG. 168. In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU sequentially executes the hold number designation command process (step A100), the hold change effect determination process (step A200), the hold change effect process (step A300), and the hold image shift process (step A400). To do. The substantial execution conditions in each process are as described below.

  When it is determined that the command analyzed in the command analysis in step S601 in the 16 ms steady process shown in FIG. 168 is the first pending number designation command (hereinafter simply referred to as the pending number designation command) In the production control process of S602, the hold number designation command process of step A100 is executed.

  In the hold number designation command process in step A100, when it is determined that the number of hold memories has reached a predetermined number (in this example, “4”, for example) as the execution condition of the hold change effect for changing the hold image In step A200, the pending change effect determination process is substantially executed.

  When the hold change effect determination process of step A200 is substantially executed and it is determined to perform the hold change effect, the hold change effect process of step A300 is substantially executed. In step A100, when it is determined that the number of holds has decreased by one, and it is determined that the display position of the hold image needs to be shifted, the hold image shift process is substantially executed.

[Hold count specification command processing]
The hold number designation command process is executed when it is determined that the command analyzed in the command analysis in step S601 is a hold number designation command. It is transmitted from the main control board. The hold number designation command is a control command that is output when the hold number (memory number) managed in the main control board changes, and is a command that designates the hold number.
Hold number designation command “0” for designating the hold number “0 (none)”,
Hold number designation command “1” for designating the hold number “1”,
Hold number designation command “2” for designating the hold number “2”,
Hold number designation command “3” for designating the hold number “3”,
Hold number designation command “4” for designating the hold number “4” (upper limit number),
There are five types.

  FIG. 183 to FIG. 184 are flowcharts showing a subroutine of the pending number designation command processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the pending number designation command processing, first, the pending number designated by the pending number designation command analyzed by the command analysis in step S601 is “0” (hereinafter simply referred to as the designated pending number). ) Is determined (step A110).

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step A110 that the designated hold number is “0”, the peripheral control MPU sets a value 0 to the first hold number counter for storing the hold number (step A111). ), The first to fourth reserved image storage areas set in the built-in RAM (not shown) are cleared (step A112), the subroutine for the number-of-holds designation command process is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

  FIG. 188 is a diagram showing tables, storage areas, and processing operations necessary for the peripheral control MPU to perform each process related to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 188 (D), the built-in RAM is provided with the first reserved image storage area to the fourth reserved image storage area corresponding to the values 1 to 4 respectively in the first reserved number counter. .

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU determines in step A110 that the designated hold number is not “0”, the peripheral control MPU proceeds to step A113 and determines whether or not the designated hold number is “4” ( It is determined whether or not a predetermined number has been reached (step A113). In this example, it is determined to perform a hold change effect by a hold image on the condition that the value of the hold number has reached a predetermined number. The predetermined number is described as “4” in this example, but is not limited thereto. The predetermined number may be a smaller number, for example, “3” or “2”.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step A113 that the designated hold number is “4”, the peripheral control MPU sets a value 4 to the first hold number counter for storing the hold number (step A114). ), The reserved image (circular shape) is set to the fourth in the reserved image storage area (step A115), the display color of the reserved image is set to normal (“blue” in this example) (step A116), The execution flag for the changed effect determination process is set (step A117), the process exits the suspension number designation command process subroutine, and returns to the effect control process routine.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU determines in step A113 that the designated number of holds is not “4”, the peripheral control MPU proceeds to step A113. In this case, the designated number of holds is any one of “1”, “2”, and “3”. In step A114, the peripheral control MPU compares the designated hold number with the value of the first hold number counter (step A120).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the comparison result is an increase of “+1” (step A121). When it is determined that the comparison result is an increase of “+1”, for example, when the designated number of holds is “3” and the value of the first hold number counter is 2, for storing the number of holds The value is incremented by 1 in the first hold number counter (step A122), and the hold image (circular shape) is set in the hold image storage area (see FIG. 188 (D)) corresponding to the value of the first hold number counter (step A123). ), The display color of the hold image is set to normal (“blue” in this example) (step A124), the subroutine for the hold number designation command process is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A121 that the result of the comparison is not an increase of “+1”, for example, if the designated hold number is “3” and the value of the first hold number counter is 4, or For example, when the designated hold number is “2” and the value of the first hold number counter is 3, the comparison result is “−1”.

  The peripheral control MPU determines that step A121 is NO, decrements the value of the first hold number counter for storing the hold number (step A126), and sets the shift flag for executing the hold image shift process described later. 1 (execution) is set (step A127), the suspension number designation command process subroutine is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

[Hold change effect decision processing]
FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of hold change effect determination processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the hold change effect determination process, it first determines whether or not the execution flag is set (step A130). The execution flag is set in step A117 of the pending number designation command processing described above.

  In step A130, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, if step A130 determines NO, the peripheral control MPU executes the hold change effect determination processing subroutine without performing substantial processing. Return to the effect control process routine.

  In step A130, when it is determined that the execution flag is set, that is, when step A130 is determined to be YES, the peripheral control MPU acquires a random number (eg, 0 to 99) for holding change effect (step 0130). A131), with reference to the acquired random number for hold change effect and hold change effect determination table (step A132), it is determined whether or not the hold change effect is performed (step A133).

  FIG. 188 (A) is a diagram illustrating an example of a distribution rate of a hold change effect determination table stored in a ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 188 (A), in this example, it is determined that the hold change effect is performed at a rate of 70%. A separate effect (an effect that is not a hold change effect) is performed for the remaining distribution ratio of 30%.

  In step A133, if the peripheral control MPU determines not to perform the hold change effect, that is, if step A133 is determined to be NO, the process proceeds to step A140 to clear the execution flag of the hold change effect determination process (step A140), the suspension change effect determination process subroutine is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, the substantial hold change effect process described later is not executed.

  In step A133, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the hold change effect is to be performed, that is, if step A133 is determined to be YES, the process proceeds to step A134 and sets the execution flag of the hold change effect process (step A134). . Thereby, execution of the hold change effect process is determined.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU acquires a final display color random number (for example, 0 to 6) (step A135), refers to the acquired final display color determination random value and the final display color determination table, and determines the final display color. Is determined (step A136), and the reserved image having the determined final display color is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step A137).

  FIG. 188B is a diagram illustrating an example of a final display color determination table stored in a ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 188 (B), if the obtained final display color determination random number is “0”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “blue”, and if it is “1”, the reserved image is determined. The final display color is determined to be “yellow”. If it is “2”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “green”. If it is “3”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “orange”. If it is “4”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “purple”, if it is “5”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “red”, and if it is “6”, it is determined to be the reserved image Is determined to be “rainbow”.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU sets “1 (with memory)” to the storage flag indicating that the final display color has been stored (step A138), and indicates what number of the hold image is the target of the hold change effect. The number representing the display location, which is “4” in this example, is set to the value of the display location counter (step A139), the process proceeds to step A140, the execution flag of the hold change effect determining process is cleared (step A140), and the hold change effect is set. Exit the decision processing subroutine and return to the effect control processing routine. In this case, the hold change effect process is executed.

[Hold change effect processing]
FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of hold change effect processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the hold change effect process, it first determines whether or not the execution flag is set (step A150). The execution flag is set in step A134 of the hold change effect determination process described above.

  In step A150, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, if step A150 is determined to be NO, the peripheral control MPU exits the hold change effect processing subroutine without performing substantial processing. To return to the effect control processing routine. In this case, the hold change effect is not substantially performed.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step A150 that the execution flag is set, that is, if step A150 is determined to be YES, whether or not there is a button operation (whether the upper plate effect button 257 has been pressed) or not. Is determined (step A151). That is, the state in which the execution flag is set is a state in which an operation to the upper plate effect button 257 by the player is validated.

  In Step A151, when it is determined that there is a button operation, that is, when Step A151 is determined to be YES, the peripheral control MPU acquires an operation random number (for example, 0 to 6) (Step A152). Referring to the operation random number value and the operation display color selection table (step A153), the display color is determined (step A154), and the reserved image of the determined display color is the fourth hold shown in FIG. 188 (D). Store in the image storage area (step A155) and proceed to step A156.

  FIG. 188 (C) is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation display color selection table stored in a ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 188 (C), if the acquired random number for operation is “0”, the display color of the reserved image is determined as “rainbow”, and if it is “1”, the display color of the reserved image is “Yellow” is determined. If “2”, the display color of the reserved image is determined as “green”. If “3”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined as “orange”. If so, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “purple”. If it is “5”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “green”. "Rainbow" is decided.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A151 that there is no button operation, that is, if step A151 is determined to be NO, the peripheral control MPU directly performs step A156 without performing steps A152 to A155. move on.

  In step A156, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a stop display command has been received (step A156). That is, the peripheral control MPU determines that a stop display command has been received when it is specified that the command analyzed in the command analysis in step S601 is a stop display command.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step A156 that a stop display command has been received, that is, if step A156 is determined to be YES, the execution flag of the hold change effect process is cleared (step A157), The subroutine of the hold change effect process is exited and the process returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, the subsequent hold change effect is not performed. Moreover, in this example, the state which validates operation to the top plate production | presentation button 257 by a player is complete | finished.

  In step A156, if the peripheral control MPU determines that no stop display command has been received, that is, if step A156 is determined to be NO, the process of step A157 is not performed, and the suspension change effect processing subroutine is performed. The process returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, since the execution flag is set, the suspension change effect processing subroutine is subsequently executed. For this reason, every time there is a button operation, step A152 to step A155 are executed. For this reason, the display color of the reserved image changes.

  In this way, the hold change effect is performed on the condition that the number of holds indicated by the control command (first hold number designation command “4”) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4). It has become. For this reason, the player is widely given an opportunity to perform the hold change effect. In addition, whenever the operation input device (top plate effect button 257) is operated during the execution of the hold change effect, the display color of the hold image 1524 to be displayed in the hold number display area 1510 is displayed. Change. Therefore, during the hold change effect, an opportunity for the player to operate the operation input device is given not only once but multiple times. Moreover, every time the operation input device is operated, the display color of the reserved image to be produced changes each time. Therefore, since the opportunity to participate in the participatory effect by the hold change effect has been expanded, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest.

[Hold image shift processing]
FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing a subroutine for the hold image shift process executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the hold image shift process, it first determines whether or not the shift flag is set (step A160). The shift flag is set in step A127 of the hold number designation command process described above.

  In step A160, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the shift flag is not set, that is, if it determines NO in step A160, the peripheral control MPU exits the suspended image shift processing subroutine without performing substantial processing. To return to the effect control processing routine. In this case, the hold image display position is not substantially shifted (moved one place to the left).

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step A160 that the shift flag is set, that is, if step A160 is determined to be YES, the second to fourth reserved image storage areas in FIG. 188 (D) are stored. The reserved images are respectively copied to the copy areas 1 to 3 (not shown) (step A161), the first to fourth reserved image storage areas are cleared (step A162), and the copy areas 1 to 3 (not shown). Are stored in the first to third reserved image storage areas (step A163). See FIG. 188 (E).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the storage flag is set (step A164). The storage flag is set in step A138 of the hold change effect determination process described above.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step A164 that the storage flag is not set, that is, if step A164 is determined to be NO, the hold image shift process is performed without performing the processes in steps A165 to A169. Return to the effect control process routine. In this case, only the display position of the hold image is substantially shifted (moved one place to the left).

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU determines in step A164 that the storage flag is set, that is, if step A164 is determined to be YES, this indicates that the hold change effect has been performed. The peripheral control MPU decrements the value of the display location counter by 1 (step A165), and proceeds to step A166 to determine whether or not the value of the display location counter is “1 (position for displaying the hold image in the final display color)”. Determination is made (step A166). By the process of step A165, the display position of the reserved image that is the production target is updated.

  In step A166, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the value of the display location counter is not “1”, that is, if step A166 is determined to be NO, each processing of step A167 to step A169 is performed. Instead, the process exits the hold image shift process subroutine and returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, substantially only the shift of the display position of the hold image (moving to the left by one) is performed.

  On the other hand, in Step A166, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the value of the display location counter is “1”, that is, when Step A166 is determined to be YES, each processing of Step A167 to Step A169 is performed. Do. That is, the final display color hold image determined and stored in advance is stored in the first hold image storage area (step A167), the storage flag is cleared (step A168), and the display location counter is set to “0”. Set (step A169), the process exits the suspended image shift process subroutine and returns to the effect control process routine.

  Note that the hold image is displayed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 by outputting image data in the information output process in step S605 of FIG. 168.

  As is clear from the above description, even if the player has never performed a button operation, the hold image [normal display color “blue”] that is the target of the production is the first. When the display position is reached, the reserved image is displayed in the final display color determined and stored previously, and the display color changes.

  Therefore, even after the hold change effect is over, in other words, even after the effective period of the upper plate effect button 257 has ended, 1 is stored in the first hold number display area 1510 as the hold memory is consumed. The display color of the hold image (the hold image in which the display color is changed) as an effect target for sequentially moving the display position toward the th hold memory is maintained without change. For this reason, when a player progresses a game, consideration is given so that the entertainment information provided from the display panel does not have an adverse effect and does not lower the interest of the game.

  In the specific example shown in the figure, when the hold image to be produced is displayed as the first hold memory in the hold number display area 1510, it is changed to a predetermined final display color, for example, “red”. The reserved image that is the target of the production is displayed. For this reason, the player who has changed the color of the reserved image by operating it will be given a surprise and surprise such as “That…? Why has it changed to red?”. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player's game.

  As described above, the embodiment related to the hold change effect has been described. However, the hold image may change to a display color different from a normal display color, for example, “blue”, and the hold image may be displayed in the final display color at the final display position. The player's imagination is all about how it is received by the player.

  In the present embodiment, the condition for changing the display color of the reserved image is that the reserved number has reached a predetermined number. Therefore, it is not limited by whether or not the reserved storage that won the start opening is a big hit or whether or not reach occurs.

  In the above-described embodiment, the stop display command is received as the end of the valid period of the button operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot start command, the determination result notification command, the first hold number designation command Or any of them. For example, when a jackpot start command is received as the end of the button operation valid period, the button operation becomes effective over a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays until the jackpot game is started. The display color will change.

  For this reason, during the hold change effect, the opportunity for the player to operate the operation input device is given not only for the variable display by one decoration pattern but also for the variable display by a plurality of decoration patterns. . Moreover, every time the operation input device is operated, the display color of the reserved image to be produced changes each time. Therefore, since the opportunity to participate in the participatory effect by the hold change effect has been expanded, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest.

[Example of hold notice effect using upper plate effect button and hold image]
In the embodiment related to the hold effect described so far, even if the peripheral control MPU that controls the effect control has the first hold number of the lottery result for the first special symbol as a predetermined number (for example, “4” which is the upper limit). Although it has been described that the determination whether or not to perform the hold effect is made on the condition that the number reaches a smaller number (for example, “3” or “2”), the present embodiment The holding effect is determined by whether or not the peripheral control MPU performs the holding effect when the launched game ball has won the start, and the lottery result that has been held in advance is reserved This is a hold notice effect that changes the display color of the hold image a predetermined number of times after determining and determining the display color (referred to as the final display color) of the hold image that is finally displayed in the hold image determined in advance.

  In the hold notice effect of this example, the time point when the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 becomes invalid is appropriately set in advance, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500, various speakers, and the like are set while the operation is valid. Is used to notify the player that the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is effective by performing an effect (operation request effect) for requesting the player to operate the upper plate effect button 257. Then, when the player presses the upper plate effect button 257 according to the operation request effect, a hold notice effect is performed in which the display color of the hold image is changed according to the degree of expectation for the big hit.

  Below, the example regarding the reservation notice effect of this example is demonstrated. In addition, the reserved image for which it is determined that the reserved notice effect will be performed is hereinafter referred to as “notice reserved image”. Also, in the hold notice effect of this example, the display color of the hold image to be finally displayed (referred to as the final display color) is determined based on the timing of the start winning prize. It is assumed that the final display color is determined to be “red”, which has a high expectation for the jackpot.

Further, in this embodiment, the player is expected to expect the big hit by the display color of the hold display that is changed by pressing the upper plate effect button 257.
The display color of the notice hold image in this embodiment is “blue”, “yellow”, “green”, “orange”, “red”, and [blue, which is a normal display color] is expected to be the biggest hit Low color, [Final display color “Red”] is set as the color with the highest expectation for jackpot, “Blue” <“Yellow” <“Green” <“Orange” <“Red” It has a high expectation in order.
As the order of change in the display color of the hold image, the player presses the upper plate effect button 257 in response to the operation request effect while [normal display color “blue”] is displayed. The display color changes to any one of “yellow”, “green”, and “orange”, and then the hold display indicating that the hold notice effect is executed for a specific trigger, for example, is the display position of the first hold image If it is shifted to, the final display color changes to “red”.
Hereinafter, the flow of the hold notice effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 189 shows an example of a flow in the hold notice effect, and (A) shows a state in which the hold notice effect is performed in the third hold image, and (B). Shows a state where the third hold image is shifted to the second hold position, (C) shows a state after the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed, and (D) shows It shows a state in which the hold image shifted to the second hold position is further shifted to the first hold position.

  As shown in (A), when it is determined by the peripheral control MPU that the hold notice effect is to be performed for the hold image displayed at the third hold position, until the current symbol variation is completed. In addition to displaying a message image “Look for the third hold!” On the central liquid crystal display device 1500, an arrow and “College” are displayed in the vicinity of the hold image (preliminary hold image) displayed at the third hold position. "!" Is displayed, and the player is notified and recognized that the hold notice effect will be performed.

  Next, as shown in (B), the change of the hold image displayed at the first hold position in (A) is started, and the notice hold image is shifted to the second hold position as a trigger. An image prompting an operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1500 ("Pressing the button changes the color of the hold ?!") (operation request effect). As a result, the player recognizes that the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is effective, and further, when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, the player feels that something will happen. It has a configuration that can.

  Then, in response to the operation request effect, by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, as shown in (C-1), the display color of the notice pending image changes from “blue” to “green”. Thereby, the player can be reminded that the display color of the notice pending image is changed by his / her own operation and the expectation degree for the jackpot is increased, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. Note that it is determined by the peripheral control MPU what color the reserved image changes from the “blue” reserved image after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed.

  In (B), the change mode of the notice hold image when the player does not operate the upper plate effect button 257 is more than the case where the operation is detected, as shown in (C-2). The display color changes to “yellow”, which has a low expectation for jackpot. As a result, the display color is changed to a display color with a higher expectation level than “blue”, which is the normal display color, although it is displayed with a lower expected level of jackpot than when the upper plate effect button 257 is operated. Therefore, you can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot. In addition, the player who notices that the display color that is expected to have a higher degree of expectation for jackpot changes when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed has a merit for operating the upper plate effect button 257. In order to feel, it is possible to actively participate in the production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, as shown in (D), when the notice hold image is displayed as the first hold memory, it is displayed after being changed to the final display color determined in advance, in this example, “red”. . The player who operates the upper plate effect button 257 changes the display color of the notice hold image to “green”, which has a higher expectation level than “blue”, and also holds “red”, which has the highest expectation level. When the display color is changed and displayed on the image, a further expectation can be felt and the interest in the game can be enhanced. Further, even when the upper plate effect button 257 is operated and staggered, the display color of “yellow” having a low expectation level for the jackpot is changed to the “red” reserved image having the highest expectation level. Because there is a follow that the display color changes, it can be wiped out even if the sense of expectation drops because the display color is low and the expectation level is low, suppressing the decline in the interest in games can do.

  In the explanation of the hold notice effect, the operation request effect is performed when the notice hold image is shifted from the third hold position to the second hold position, and the display color of the notice hold image is changed only once. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an operation request effect may be performed every time the hold position of the notice hold image shifts, and the display color of the notice hold image may be changed. For example, when the reserved image at the fourth holding position is used as the notice holding image, the operation request effect is performed in response to the shift to the third holding position, and the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed to notify the user. The display color of the hold image changes from “blue” to “yellow”. Next, when the notice hold image is shifted to the second hold position, an operation request effect is performed, and when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, the display color of the notice hold image is changed from “yellow” to “green”. Change. When the notice hold image is shifted to the first hold position, the final display color changes to “red”.

  According to the above example, the hold notice effect is performed every time the display position of the designated notice hold image is shifted, so the display color of the hold image is changed multiple times for one notice hold image. It is possible to make it. In addition, every time the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed by the player's operation, the display color of the notice hold image becomes a display with high expectation for the jackpot, so by participating in the hold notice effect, it gets closer to the jackpot. Therefore, the player actively participates in the hold notice effect, and can hope to improve the interest in the game.

[Second Example in Hold Notice Effect Using Upper Plate Effect Button and Hold Image]
In addition, the trigger for the hold notice effect is not the case where the display position of the notice hold image is shifted, but the change time set corresponding to the change pattern output from the main control board to the peripheral control board, It may be determined whether or not to perform the hold notice effect on the notice hold image.

  For example, when the hold before the notice hold image becomes the change, and the change notice time is short (for example, less than 10 seconds), the hold notice effect is performed. Even if an attempt is made to press the upper plate effect button 257, the change display of the change will end immediately, so that the player cannot miss the upper plate effect button 257 within the time and thinks that the player missed the opportunity, There is a risk that the interest in the will decline. In addition, since the user wants to press the upper plate effect button 257 within the time, there is a possibility that only the hold notice effect is distracted and the change display of the change cannot be fully enjoyed. The hold notice effect is performed when the change time of hold when the display position of the hold image is shifted is longer than a predetermined change time (10 seconds or more in this example).

  After the operation request effect is performed by performing the hold notice effect when the fluctuation time related to the hold before the notice hold image is 10 seconds or more as in the above configuration, the player presses the upper plate effect button 257. A sufficient amount of time for pressing can be secured, so that the possibility of failing to press the upper plate effect button 257 in a short time can be suppressed as much as possible. You can prevent the situation that you can not enjoy.

[Third embodiment of hold notice effect using upper plate effect button and hold image]
Further, it may be determined whether or not to perform the hold notice effect on the notice hold image based on the variation pattern output from the main control board to the peripheral control board.

In this embodiment, when the change mode of the hold that is changed when the display position of the notice hold image is shifted is a change with reach, the hold notice effect is performed.
If the fluctuation is a fluctuation display with reach, the player recalls the idea that the jackpot may come, and the expectation for the jackpot related to the fluctuation increases. In this state, by performing the hold notice effect on the notice hold image, it is possible to add a sense of expectation for the jackpot and to enhance the interest in the game. In addition, even if the result of the change is out of date, the notice pending image is maintained, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the final display color of the notice pending image is determined to be “red”, which has high expectation for jackpot, but is not limited to this, and “yellow”, “ A color that changes when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, such as “green” or “orange”, may be the final color.

  Furthermore, when performing a hold notice effect multiple times for one notice hold image, for example, when the display color of “green” is currently displayed as the notice hold image, the display color changes from “green” to “yellow”. It is supposed not to. Since the display color does not change to a display color with a lower expectation level than the currently displayed display color, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game related to the display color change.

  In addition, a display color having a higher expectation level than the final display color of the notice hold image is not displayed as a display color caused by pressing the upper plate effect button 257. For example, when the final display color of the notice hold image is set to “green”, “orange” or “red” having higher expectations than “green” when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed in the hold notice effect. The display color of is not displayed. As a result, when the notice pending image becomes the final display color, the display color that is expected to be higher than the currently displayed notice pending image is displayed as the final display color, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game. .

  Further, the determination of the display color of the advance notice image related to the advance notice effect is determined by the peripheral control MPU. The display color of the standard display color “blue” changes to what color, and finally the display color is displayed as a scenario. This is determined by the peripheral control MPU as one scenario pattern.

FIG. 190 (a) is a scenario pattern table showing a pattern in which the display color of the notice hold image changes.
The scenario determining random number in this example is set so as to determine which of the on-hold notice effects is to be executed. In this example, the scenario patterns 1 to 4 are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a scenario pattern may be prepared and provided as appropriate.

  When pattern 1 is selected by the peripheral control MPU, a hold notice effect is performed when the display position of the notice hold image is shifted. The number of holding notice effects due to pressing the upper plate effect button 257 is one, and when the player presses the upper plate effect button 257, the display color changes to “green” and is not pressed. If it appears, the display color changes to “yellow”. When the notice hold image is shifted to the first hold position, the final display color changes to “red”.

  When pattern 2 is selected by the peripheral control MPU, a hold notice effect is performed when the display position of the notice hold image is shifted. The number of the hold notice effect due to the pressing of the upper plate effect button 257 is two, and the display color is “green” when the player presses the upper plate effect button 257 in the first hold notice effect. When the button is not pressed, the display color changes to “yellow”. Next, in the second hold notice effect, the display color changes to “orange” when the player presses the upper plate effect button 257, and the display color changes to “green” if the player does not press the upper plate effect button 257. When the notice hold image is shifted to the first hold position, the final display color changes to “red”.

  When the pattern 3 is selected by the peripheral control MPU, the hold notice effect is performed when the display position of the notice hold image is shifted. When the number of the reserved notice effects caused by pressing the upper plate effect button 257 is two, and the player presses the upper plate effect button 257 in the first hold notice effect, the display color is “yellow”. If the button is not pressed, the display color does not change and is displayed as “blue”. Next, if the player presses the upper plate effect button 257 in the second holding notice effect, the display color changes to “green”, otherwise the display color does not change and remains “blue”. Is displayed. When the notice hold image is shifted to the first hold position, the final display color changes to “orange”.

  When the pattern 4 is selected by the peripheral control MPU, the hold notice effect is performed when the change mode of the hold that is changed when the display position of the notice hold image is shifted is a change with reach. The number of holding notice effects due to pressing the upper plate effect button 257 is one, and when the player presses the upper plate effect button 257, the display color changes to “green” and is not pressed. If it appears, the display color changes to “yellow”. When the notice hold image is shifted to the first hold position, the final display color changes to “red”.

  The example of the scenario pattern selected by the peripheral control MPU has been described above. The peripheral control board is provided with a scenario pattern determination random number and a scenario pattern table in advance as means for determining a scenario pattern in the notification hold image in the hold notification effect. Based on the scenario pattern table, any scenario related to the hold notice effect is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 190 (b), for example, 100 types of variable random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 99) indicating that any one of the scenario patterns is executed. , Is set as a determination value indicating that the hold notice effect of pattern 1 is executed (0 to 24), and 20 kinds of variable random numbers are set as determination values indicating that pattern 2 is executed (25 to 44). 40 types of variable random numbers are set as determination values indicating that pattern 3 is executed (45 to 89). Ten types of variable random numbers are set as determination values indicating that pattern 4 is executed (90 to 99).

According to the configuration of the present embodiment described above, the change mode related to the display color of the notice hold image differs depending on the scenario pattern related to the notice notice of hold determined by the peripheral control MPU, and even if the scenario pattern is the same Since the change mode related to the display color of the notice hold image varies depending on whether or not to operate the upper plate effect button 257, various kinds of hold notice effects can be provided to the player. The change mode relating to the display color of the notice hold image makes it possible to make the player feel excited and to improve the interest in the game.
In addition, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the change pattern related to the display color of the notice hold image is made different depending on the scenario pattern related to the hold notice effect determined by the peripheral control MPU. It is possible to provide a variety of on-hold notice effects, and it is possible to make the player feel excited with the change of the display color of the on-hold notice image.

  In the above-described hold notice effect, the display color of the notice hold image changes depending on whether or not the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed. When the held image to be displayed is variably displayed, if the variation mode is a variation mode with reach, the display color of the notice pending image is changed without triggering an operation on the upper plate effect button 257 by the player. Or, there may be a configuration in which the reserved color of the notice hold image is changed without any advance notice without any notice to the player.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment described above, the change mode related to the display color of the notice hold image differs depending on the scenario pattern related to the notice notice of hold determined by the peripheral control MPU, and even if the scenario pattern is the same Since the change mode related to the display color of the notice hold image varies depending on whether or not to operate the upper plate effect button 257, various kinds of hold notice effects can be provided to the player. The change mode relating to the display color of the notice hold image makes it possible to make the player feel excited and to improve the interest in the game.

[Change timing of the notice hold image in the hold notice effect]
Further, in this embodiment, in the hold notice effect, a plurality of change timings related to the hold color of the notice hold image that changes after the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed.

  A timing pattern (hereinafter referred to as a change timing pattern) in which the display color of the notice hold image in the hold notice effect changes includes an immediate change pattern, a change pattern after 1 second, and a change pattern after 2 seconds, which will be described later. FIG. 200 is a time chart when an immediate change pattern is selected from among change timing patterns of a notice hold image in a hold notice effect, and FIG. 200 illustrates a later-described one second of change timing patterns of a notice hold image in a hold notice effect. FIG. 201 is a time chart when a post-change pattern is selected, and FIG. 201 is a time chart when a 2-second post-change pattern is selected from among the change timing patterns of the notice hold image in the hold notice effect. FIG. 202 is a change timing table showing a change timing pattern of the notice hold image.

  In the time chart of FIG. 199, timings of (A) operation effective period, (B) operation request effect, (C) upper plate effect button operation detection, and (D) immediate change pattern are shown. In the time chart of FIG. 201, (A) the operation valid period, (B) the operation request effect, (C) the upper plate effect button operation detection, and (E) the change pattern after 1 second are shown. In the time chart, (A) the operation effective period, (B) the operation request effect, (C) the upper plate effect button operation detection, and (F) the change pattern after 2 seconds are shown.

  When the hold notice effect is performed, as shown in (A), the time point at which the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 becomes invalid is set appropriately in advance, and during that time, as shown in (B). In addition, using the notification means such as the central liquid crystal display device 1500 and various speakers, the player performs an effect (operation request effect) for requesting the player to operate the upper plate effect button 257, so that the upper plate effect button 257 is displayed. It is set as the structure which alert | reports that the operation with respect to is effective. Then, in response to the operation request effect, as shown in (C), when the player presses the upper plate effect button 257, the display color of the notice hold image changes. After the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are ended, and the display color of the notice pending image changes. An immediate change pattern in which the display color of the notice hold image immediately changes when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed as shown in (D), and 1 when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed as shown in (E). Change pattern after 1 second in which the display color of the notice hold image changes after 2 seconds, and change after 2 seconds when the display color of the notice hold image changes 2 seconds after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed as shown in FIG. There are patterns.

  When the immediate change pattern is selected, as shown in FIG. 199, when the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, the player provides an upper plate effect button 257. When the pressing operation is performed, the operation valid period and the operation request effect are turned off when the operation is detected, and then the display color of the notice pending image changes.

  When the change pattern after 1 second is selected, as shown in FIG. 200, when the operation effective period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, the player When the effect button 257 is pressed, the operation valid period and the operation request effect are turned off when the operation is detected, and a notice-pending image is displayed one second after the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 is detected. The color changes.

When the change pattern after 2 seconds is selected, as shown in FIG. 201, when the operation effective period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, the player When the effect button 257 is pressed down, the operation valid period and the operation request effect are turned off when the operation is detected, and a notice-pending image is displayed 2 seconds after the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 is detected. The color changes.
As a result, the timing at which the display color of the notice hold image changes after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed differs depending on which change pattern is selected. The throbbing feeling obtained by not knowing what to do increases, making it possible to entertain various variations in the on-hold announcement effect.

  In addition, in the hold notice effect, the operation request period until the player is requested to operate the upper plate effect button 257 but the operable period for accepting the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257 ends. If the immediate change pattern is selected, the display color of the notice hold image changes immediately after the operation valid period ends, and if the change pattern is selected after 1 second, The display color of the notice hold image changes 1 second after the operation valid period ends, and if the change pattern is selected after 2 seconds, the display color of the notice hold image changes 2 seconds after the operation valid period ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display color of the notice pending image may change at an appropriate timing after the operable period ends. As a result, for example, the operation request effect is missed and the display color of the notice hold image changes even when the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 cannot be performed, so the display color of the notice hold image is low in expectation. It is possible to prevent the display color from being displayed and to bring back the feeling that the player has lost the game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, the peripheral control board includes a change timing determination random number for determining a timing at which the display color of the notice hold image changes as a means for determining a timing at which the display color of the notice hold image changes in the hold notice effect. The change timing table is prepared in advance, and the change timing pattern of the display color of the notice pending image is determined based on the change timing determination random number and the change timing table. Then, the hold notice effect determined by the peripheral control MPU in response to the game ball entering the start opening changes the display color of the notice hold image by an operation on the upper plate effect button 257 by the player's operation. In this case, after the effect is determined, the change timing of the notice pending image is determined from the change timing determination random number extracted by the change timing determination random number extraction means and the change timing table. .

  Next, change timing determination random numbers will be described with reference to FIG. The random number for determining the change timing in this example is set so as to determine which notice color change timing pattern of the notice pending image is to be executed. For example, 100 types of variable random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 99) indicating that any one of the change timing patterns of the notice pending image is to be executed, and 50 types of variable random numbers are used as the upper plate effect. After a pressing operation on the button 257, it is set as a determination value indicating that an immediate change pattern in which the display color of the notice hold image changes at an immediate timing (0 to 49). 257 is set as a determination value indicating that a change pattern after 1 second in which the display color of the notice hold image changes at a timing after 1 second (50 to 79), and 20 types of variable random numbers are Judgment indicating execution of a change pattern after 2 seconds in which the display color of the notice hold image changes at the timing after 2 seconds after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257 It is set as (80-99).

  Further, as a trigger for determining the timing at which the display color of the notice hold image changes after the pressing operation is performed on the upper plate effect button 257 in the hold notice effect, the display position of the notice hold image is, for example, the fourth hold. When shifting from the position to the third hold position, the change timing determination random number extraction means may extract the change timing determination random number to determine the timing at which the display color of the notice hold image changes, When the change mode of the hold that is changed when the display position of the notice hold image is shifted is a change accompanied by reach, the change timing determination random number extracting means triggers that the change accompanied by reach is performed. A random number for determining the change timing may be extracted to determine the timing at which the display color of the notice hold image changes. It can be selected.

  In addition, the change timing pattern of the display color of the notice hold image in the hold notice effect last performed during the game is an immediate change pattern, and the change timing pattern of the notice hold image selected next is also the immediate change pattern. In such a case, the player cannot notice that there are a plurality of types of change timing patterns of the notice hold image, and the change pattern of the notice hold image after pressing the upper plate effect button 257 changes immediately. In this example, the timing pattern that is different from the last change timing pattern of the notice-pending hold image is selected, because it may be thought that it is only the pattern, and the interest in the game may be reduced. It has become.

  Further, for example, when an immediate change pattern is selected as the change timing pattern of the last notice pending image, the change timing pattern to be selected next is either a change pattern after 1 second or a change pattern after 2 seconds. When the change pattern after 1 second is selected, either the immediate change pattern or the change pattern after 2 seconds is selected as the next change timing pattern. When the change pattern after 2 seconds is selected, the immediate change pattern or the change pattern after 1 second is selected as the next change timing pattern to be selected. As a result, since a change timing pattern different from the last selected change timing pattern is selected, it is possible to prevent the same change timing pattern from being selected continuously, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Next, the flow of the hold notice effect in this example will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 203 shows an example of the flow in the hold notice effect, and in this example, a series of hold notice effects comparing the case where the change effect after one second is selected and the case where the immediate change effect is selected. It is a figure which shows the flow of. (A) has shown the state which has alert | reported that the pending | holding advance notice effect is performed in the 3rd hold image, (B) displays the notice hold image by operation with respect to the 3rd top plate effect button 257. It suggests that the color changes and represents the state where the operation request effect is performed. (C-1) shows that the operation for the upper plate effect button 257 is performed when the immediate change pattern is selected. (C-2) shows a state immediately after an operation for the upper plate effect button 257 is performed when a change pattern is selected after 1 second, and (D) is In (C-2), a state after one second has elapsed since the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed is shown.

  As shown in (A), when it is determined by the peripheral control MPU that the hold notice effect is to be performed for the hold image displayed at the third hold position, the “third hold” is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In addition to displaying the message image “Attention to!”, An arrow and an image written as “Kore!” Are displayed in the vicinity of the reserved image (preliminary reserved image) displayed at the third reserved position. The player is notified and recognized that the hold notice effect will be performed.

  Next, as shown in (B), the central LCD display 1500 displays an image “When the button is pressed, the color of the hold changes?” And an image simulating the upper plate effect button 257 are displayed. An image prompting an operation on 257 is displayed (operation request effect). Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is effective, and further, when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, the display color of the notice hold image changes, and something can be obtained. It can remind you that you might get up.

  For example, when the immediate change pattern is selected by the peripheral control MPU, as shown in (C-1), immediately after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed in response to the operation request effect, a notice is given. In this example, the display color of the hold image is changed to “green” and displayed. When the display pattern after 1 second is selected by the peripheral control MPU, as shown in (C-2), even if the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed in response to the operation request effect, the notice hold image The display color of is displayed as “blue” without being changed.

  Next to (C-2), when one second has elapsed since the upper plate effect button 257 was pressed, the display is changed to “green” as shown in (D).

As described above, when the immediate change pattern is selected, the notice pending image changes immediately after the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed, and when the change pattern after 1 second is selected, the upper plate effect button 257 is selected. Immediately after the operation is performed, the display color of the notice hold image remains “blue” and does not change, and the notice hold image changes after one second has elapsed. Is selected, the result of the change in the notice hold image can be known immediately after pressing the upper plate effect button 257, and the change pattern after 1 second or the change pattern after 2 seconds is selected. If it is, the display color of the reservation hold image will change at a time lag, although the display color of the reservation hold image will never change. Can be pounding excitement to the announcement attraction, it becomes possible to increase the interest in the game.
Note that it is determined by the peripheral control MPU which color is changed from the “blue” reserved image after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed.

[Variation 1 of hold notice effect]
The hold notice effect in the present embodiment is configured to change the lottery ratio of the change timing pattern of the notice hold image according to the number of rounds when the advantageous game state (for example, big hit) is drawn by the main control board. This will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 204 is a change timing table showing a change timing pattern of the notice hold image for each number of rounds when the jackpot is lottery. (A) is a change timing table that is selected when a 15-round jackpot is drawn, (b) is a change timing table that is selected when a 8-round jackpot is drawn, and (c) is 2 It is a change timing table selected when a round big hit is drawn.

  When a 15-round jackpot is drawn by the main control board, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), 80 types of variable random numbers among the random numbers are suspended immediately after pressing the upper plate effect button 257. It is set as a determination value indicating that an immediate change pattern in which the display color of the image is changed is executed (0 to 79), and ten kinds of variable random numbers are timings one second after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257 Is set as a determination value indicating that a change pattern is to be executed after 1 second when the display color change of the notice hold image is performed (80 to 89), and after 10 kinds of variable random numbers are pressed on the upper plate effect button 257, It is set as a determination value indicating that the change pattern after 2 seconds in which the display color change of the notice hold image is performed at the timing after 2 seconds (90 to 99).

  When the main control board wins 8 rounds of big hit, as shown in FIG. 204 (b), ten kinds of variable random numbers will be suspended immediately after pressing the upper plate effect button 257. It is set as a determination value indicating that an immediate change pattern in which the display color of the image is changed is executed (0 to 9), and 80 kinds of variable random numbers are timings after one second after pressing the upper plate effect button 257. Is set as a determination value indicating that a change pattern is to be executed after 1 second when the display color change of the notice hold image is performed (10 to 89), and after 10 kinds of variable random numbers are pressed on the upper plate effect button 257, It is set as a determination value indicating that the change pattern after 2 seconds in which the display color change of the notice hold image is performed at the timing after 2 seconds (90 to 99).

  When the main control board draws two rounds of big hits, as shown in FIG. 204 (c), ten types of variable random numbers will be suspended immediately after pressing the upper plate effect button 257. It is set as a determination value indicating that an immediate change pattern in which the display color of the image is changed is executed (0 to 9), and ten kinds of variable random numbers are timings one second after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257 Is set as a determination value indicating that a change pattern is to be executed after 1 second when the display color change of the notice hold image is performed (10 to 19), and after 80 kinds of variable random numbers are pressed on the upper plate effect button 257, It is set as a determination value indicating that the change pattern after 2 seconds in which the display color change of the notice hold image is performed at the timing after 2 seconds (20 to 99).

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment described above, the number of rounds related to the jackpot can be predicted to some extent by the notice pending image change timing pattern after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed. For example, if the display color of the notice-holding image changes immediately after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, the player recalls that 15 rounds of big hit will come with a high probability, and has pressed the upper plate effect button 257 If the display color of the notice-pending image changes after 2 seconds, the player recalls that a two-round jackpot has a high probability. Thereby, the player can be relieved by the change timing pattern of the notice suspension image, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Other variations of the notice effect]
The notice effect described above changes the display color of the notice hold image when triggered by the operation on the upper plate effect button 257, and further prepares a plurality of timings at which the display color of the notice hold image changes, and various variations. However, the notice effect in this example does not use a hold image, and in a state where there are a plurality of holds, for example, a change currently being performed (hereinafter referred to as the change). ), An effect game for performing an operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed, and when an operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed by the player, a change (notice target change) of digestion after the change is performed. A notice variation effect that can change the effect mode is performed. Hereinafter, a series of effects will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 205 shows a series of flows in the notice variation effect in this example. (A) shows a state in which a variation effect of a change digested before the subject change is shown, (B) shows a state in which an operation request effect is being performed, and (C-1) Shows a state after the operation for the upper plate effect button 257 is not performed when the operation request effect is performed in (B), and (C-2) is when the operation request effect is performed in (B). The state after operating the upper plate effect button 257 is shown, (D-1) shows the state after the change of the change after (C-1), and (D-2 ) Shows the state after the change of the change after (C-2), (E-1) shows the effect mode of the notice change effect performed after (D-1), (E-2) shows a state in which the notice variation effect is started after (D-2), and (F) shows the state of (E-2). It shows the representation embodiment of the announcement variation effect that takes place.

For example, if the change held at the first holding position is a change subject to notice, as shown in (A), when the change before notice is being made, as shown in (B), By performing an effect requesting an operation to the upper plate effect button 257 (operation request effect), it is notified that the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is effective. If the player does not press the upper plate effect button 257 according to the operation request effect at that time, the process branches to (C-1). As shown in (C-1), since the player has not pressed the upper plate effect button 257 in (B), the process shifts to (D-1) without performing any effects other than the change display of symbols. . Next, as shown in (D-1), the fluctuation ends. As shown in (E-1) after that, the effect mode of the notice change effect is the same effect mode as the change effect mode performed before.
On the other hand, when the player performs a pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257 in (B), an image imitating a ladybird appears on the central liquid crystal display device as shown in (C-2). An effect that flies indefinitely is performed and the process proceeds to (D-2). Next, as shown in (D-2), the fluctuation ends. After that, as shown in (E-2), an image imitating a ladybird is displayed again based on the start of the change in the advance notice subject change, and then, as shown in (F), the advance change effect mode. However, unlike the variation effect mode performed before, the display mode of the variation symbol is changed and displayed. Accordingly, when the player presses the upper plate effect button 257, it is possible to evoke the idea that something good may happen, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, the effect mode that is different from the change effect mode performed before the notice target change displayed in (F) is whether or not the lottery result of the notice target change is in the specific game state by the main control MPU. It is assumed that the aspect of the variation symbol is changed after the determination in advance.

  For example, after the player performs an operation on the upper plate effect button 257 at the time of (B) and an effect using an image imitating a ladybird is performed at the next point (C-2), (D-2) If the lottery result of the variation is out of the range, the player is discouraged and has an expectation for the subject variation subject to the next variation. Then, in (E-2), an effect using an image simulating a ladybird is performed again, and in (F), the mode of the notice variation effect is different from the previous one (in this example, the appearance of the variation symbol is different). Therefore, the player has a high expectation with respect to the change subject to the notice because the result of the lottery of the change made previously may have been out of order. At this time, if the lottery result of the change subject to advance notice is, for example, out of place, the player will be further discouraged, and the interest in the game will be greatly reduced as much as expected. If the lottery result of the performance is a big hit, it will be disappointing at the time of (D-2) by changing the mode of the notice variation effect, but it will be discouraged when the result of the subject change is witnessed. As a result, the joy of winning the jackpot has increased, and the interest in games can be greatly improved.

  As described above, according to this example, when an effect game for performing an operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed in an effect in the change, and when an operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed by the player, an object to be notified Since the effect mode changes when the change becomes the change, it is possible to entertain various variations of the notice change effect, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

  In addition, in the operation request effect displayed in FIG. 205B, when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed down, even if the result of the change is out of the display, the out symbol display is displayed. Since the change mode of the notice change effect changes at the stage (D) based on the fact, it is possible to have a new hope for the jackpot, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, by displaying the image imitating the ladybird displayed in (C-2) again in (E-2), by operating the upper plate effect button 257 in the stage (F), It is possible to make the player aware that the display mode of the notice variation effect has changed by the operation, and it is possible to recall that the operation with high reliability for the jackpot has been assigned by the player's own operation on the upper plate effect button 257. The interest for is improved.

Further, in this example, it is described that the presentation mode of the notice variation effect in the notice subject change is changed without using the hold image. However, the display color of the hold image of the notice subject change performed after the change is changed. It is good also as a structure.
As a result, even if the result of the change is out of date, if there is a change with a high degree of expectation above a certain level, if the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed at the stage (B), the change The display color of the hold image with a high expectation change is changed in accordance with the stop of the design change. Thereby, although it is discouraged once with respect to the result of the change, it is possible to give a new expectation to the notice target change, and therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.
If the upper plate effect button 257 is not pressed at the stage (B), the display color of the hold image of the change subject to notice is not changed. Even if there is, there is no change in the hold color, so the player does not notice that a change with high expectation is held.

In addition, when the result of the change is a big hit, if the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed at the stage (B), the expectation is high in accordance with the stop of the change in the design of the change. Change the display color of the fluctuating reserved image. As a result, in addition to the joy that the change has been a big hit, it is also possible to expect expectations for the change subject to notice, so it is possible to hope for further enhancement of interest in the game.
If the upper plate effect button 257 is not pressed at the stage (B), the display color of the hold image of the change subject to notice is not changed. Even if there is, there is no change in the hold color, so the player does not notice that a change with high expectation is held.

  Thereby, the player can feel an increase in the expectation level for the jackpot game by performing the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257, and can also know the expectation level in the reserved memory of the variation. In particular, if the lottery result of the change is disappointing, if there is a hold with high expectation within the hold, even if the lottery result of the change is lost and discouraged, there may be expectations for further fluctuation. Since it can, it can suppress the decline of the game entertainment.

  Further, in the notice variation effect in this example, it has been described as changing the display form of the change symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the background image of the notice variation effect is changed, the contents of the effect game It is possible to select various production modes, for example, by changing or changing to a so-called prefetch zone.

  In addition, in this example, the previous change of the target change is described as the change before the change. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the change two or three times before the target change is notified. It may be a pre-variation and can be appropriately selected.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested by the acceptance of the game balls. When a game ball is accepted at the second start opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In the function display unit 1400, a special lottery result is suggested under direct control by the main control board. The suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display) is to turn on / off the LED for a predetermined time, and then turn on A special lottery result is suggested by the combination of LEDs.

  On the other hand, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board based on a control signal from the main control board and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol row in a state where three symbol rows composed of a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. The symbol strings are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the symbol strings are stopped and displayed so that the decorative symbols of the three symbol strings to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three symbol rows are stopped and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, a final image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the lottery An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result is generated.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 (the symbol string fluctuates to confirm the image) The time until the function display unit 1400 is set to be shorter.

  Further, in the peripheral control board, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the upper movable effect unit 2560 and the lower movable effect according to the lottery special lottery result. Unit 2570, back upper movable effect unit 3100, back lower front movable effect unit 3200, back right movable effect unit 3300, back left movable effect unit 3400, back lower rear movable effect unit 3500, back four corner movable effect unit 3600, etc. The movable effect is appropriately used, and the player can be entertained also by the movable effect, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back right rotating decoration body 3310 of the back right movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 is rotated when the game ball can be received with respect to the upper prize opening 2006. When the third decoration surface 3310c is directed forward (front), the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guide passage 2553 through which the game balls received in the upper prize winning port 2006 circulate coincide with the back right ball inlet 3320. (See FIG. 175). In this state, when a game ball is received at the upper prize winning opening 2006, the ball guide member that enters the back right ball entrance 3320 from the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guide path 2553 and is arranged in the back right effect space 3321. By 3322, it flows down while rotating a plurality of times (here, 8 times) around the axis extending vertically in the back right effect space 3321 (see FIG. 175 (a)).

  As a result, the game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 can be spiraled down in the back right effect space 3321, so that the player can surely see the game ball accepted in the upper prize winning opening 2006. It is possible to increase the expectation for paying out the game ball by accepting the game ball at the upper prize opening 2006, and to entertain the player with the game ball flowing down in a spiral shape. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the ball guiding member 3322 is disposed adjacent to the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the game ball flows down the ball guiding member 3322 to a player who is paying attention to the effect image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. Can be easily recognized. In this example, the ball guiding member 3322 is arranged so as to be adjacent to the central liquid crystal display device 1500. However, a part or all of the ball guiding member 3322 is arranged so as to overlap with the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The guiding member 3322 may be easily recognized that a game ball is flowing down. In this case, the ball guiding member 3322 is formed of a transparent member whose back can be visually recognized, so that it is possible to prevent the visual effect displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 from being obstructed.

  When the upper prize winning opening 2006 is in the open state, when the back right rotation decorative body 3310 is facing the front except for the third decorative surface 3310c, the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guiding path 2553 is the first decorative surface 3310a. And the second decorative surface 3310b is closed by the outer peripheral surface, so that the game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 enters the escape passage 2555 branched near the rear end of the rear guide passage 2553 and escapes. It is discharged downward through the passage 2555. Thus, when the upper prize winning opening 2006 becomes acceptable, an effect using the back right effect space 3321 of the back right movable effect unit 3300 is performed, or an effect not using the back right effect space 3321 is performed. It can be enjoyed by presenting various variations to the player. In addition, even if the back right rotating decorative body 3310 cannot turn the third decorative surface 3310c forward due to some reason, the game ball received in the upper prize winning hole 2006 is stagnated in the rear guiding path 2553. And the game can be continued without any problems.

[10. Fast digestion of jackpot games]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined number of rounds of the big hit game can be digested in a shorter time than a conventional game machine in which a big winning opening is arranged near the lower end of the game area 5a. Details will be described below.

  As described above, when the ball launcher 680 is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a with a driving strength that is equal to or greater than a predetermined driving strength, the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 is The game ball that has entered the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface comes into contact with the stopper 1006 and is weakened, and then enters the upper game space 2541 from the upper right entrance.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 176, the upper right entrance extends vertically with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball abutted against the stopper 1006 and weakened its momentum is rolled by the upper right entrance. The direction of movement is limited and it will fall down.

  In the state where the upper prize winning opening 2006 is opened, the upper end of the upper prize winning opening door member 2550 is made higher than the lower end, so that the game ball abutting on the upper prize winning opening door member 2550 can be raised with a very high probability. In addition to receiving the winning prize opening 2006, the upper winning prize opening door member 2550 is rotated so that the upper end of the upper winning prize opening door member 2550 is located to the right of the front view from the upper right entrance.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, no obstacle nail is planted in the upper game space 2541, so that the game ball falling from the upper right entrance comes into contact with the upper prize winning opening door member 2550 with a very high probability. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 and has fallen from the upper right entrance with the upper university winning opening 2006 opened is extremely A high probability of being accepted into the top prize opening 2006.

  In this way, since the top prize winning opening 2006 is arranged near the upper right end of the gaming area 5a, it is driven into the gaming area 5a rather than the conventional gaming machine in which the big winning opening is arranged near the lower end of the gaming area 5a. The moving distance until the game ball is received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 is shortened, and the game ball that has entered the right side of the outermost surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 is extremely Since the ball winning device 2006 is received with a high probability, the period from when the ball launching device 680 hits the game ball into the game area 5a until the game ball is received in the game winning port 2006 can be shortened. As a result, a predetermined number of rounds of the big hit game can be digested in a shorter time than the conventional gaming machine in which the big winning opening is arranged near the lower end of the gaming area 5a.

  Further, a game ball that is placed with a driving strength higher than a predetermined driving strength by the ball launching device 680 by placing the upper university winning opening 2006 in the vicinity of the upper right end of the gaming area 5a is placed in the hitting portion 1006. Since it is configured to roll along the inner side of the outer rail 1001 without being in contact with obstacles such as obstacle nails until it comes into contact, it is possible to enter the upper big prize opening 2006. The ball rolls at a certain speed or more, and at least the period from when the ball launching device 680 hits the game ball into the game area 5a until the game ball comes into contact with the stop portion 1006 can be shortened. That is, the ball launching device 680 has a game area compared to a case where a game ball is driven with a driving strength less than a predetermined driving strength so as to be able to enter the upper prize opening 2006. It is possible to shorten the period from when the game ball is hit into 5a until the game ball is received at the upper prize winning opening 2006.

  In other words, when the upper prize winning opening 2006 is arranged near the upper left end of the game area 5a and the game ball is driven by the ball launcher 680 with a driving strength less than the predetermined driving strength, Compared to the case where it is possible to enter the upper university winning opening 2006, the upper university winning opening 2006 is arranged near the upper right end of the game area 5a and the ball launcher 680 has a predetermined driving strength or more. Since the game ball is configured to be able to enter the upper prize winning opening 2006 when the game ball is driven with the driving strength of the ball, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased. Can shorten the period from when a game ball is hit into the game area 5a until the game ball is received at the upper prize winning opening 2006, and a predetermined number of rounds of the big hit game can be digested in a short time. .

  In addition, since the ball launcher 680 is designed to strike one game ball about every 0.6 seconds, for example, the time required to strike 10 game balls is 6 seconds. In addition, as described above, the game ball that has been driven by the ball launching device 680 with a driving strength that is equal to or greater than the predetermined driving strength is in contact with an obstacle such as an obstacle nail until it comes into contact with the stop portion 1006. Since the ball rolls along the inner side of the outer rail 1001, the ball launcher 680 hits the game ball with a driving strength greater than or equal to a predetermined driving strength and enters the game area 5a. The period until it is received in the mouth 2006 is extremely short (about 1 second).

  That is, the period from when the top prize winning opening door member 2550 is opened in one round in the big hit game until the ten game balls are received at the top prize winning opening 2006 is about half that of the conventional gaming machine. The period is about 7 to 8 seconds, and the interval period between the rounds (the period from closing the top prize winning opening 2006 to opening again) is shorter than the conventional gaming machine (about 2.0 seconds). Since it is about 0.6 seconds, if it is a 15-round jackpot game, it will be finished in about 113.4 seconds to 128.4 seconds.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example can shorten the time required for the big hit game as compared with the conventional gaming machine, so it is executed per unit time by the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display. The number of executions (variable display times) of the variable display of the possible symbols (the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display) It can be increased more than gaming machines, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed by increasing the chances of generating big hits. In addition, since the execution period of the jackpot game executed on the conventional gaming machine can be shortened to about half, the jackpot game itself can be interested, and the decrease in the game entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 enters the back right sphere entrance 3320 from the back discharge port 2554 of the back guide path 2553, and the back right effect space. The ball guide member 3322 arranged at 3321 flows down while rotating around the axis extending vertically in the back right effect space 3321 a plurality of times (here, 8 times) (see FIG. 175 (a)). ). As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the game ball flowing down the ball guiding member 3322 can be visually recognized in a fragmentary manner by the player. It takes about 2 seconds until the game ball flowing down the ball guiding member 3322 is discharged from the discharge port 3303a of the lower right base 3303 and is difficult for the player to see. As described above, the period from when the game ball is driven by the ball launching device 680 with a driving strength greater than or equal to the predetermined driving strength and entering the game area 5a to being accepted into the top prize winning opening 2006 is 1 Since it is about seconds, the period from when the game ball is struck by the ball launcher 680 to when it is received at the upper prize winning opening 2006 after the game ball is received at the upper prize winning opening 2006 is the lower right base 3303. This is shorter than the period until the player becomes difficult to see from the outlet 3303a.

  As described above, not only the rolling of the game ball in the game area 5a that the player pays attention to, but also the game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 that is not normally noticed is complicatedly rolled and discharged. By extending the period until the game ends, the player can be noticed, and the game ball that has become a so-called dead ball by being accepted into the upper prize winning hole 2006 is effectively used to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. be able to. In addition, since the period from when a game ball is struck by the ball launcher 680 to when it is received at the upper prize winning hole 2006 is short, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game sphere that has been struck, and the game ball is smoothly struck. You may feel uneasy about what is going on, but game balls are steadily driven by increasing the period until the game balls received at the upper prize opening 2006 are rolled in a complex manner and discharged. It is possible to reassure the player that he / she is confused. Also, the period from when a game ball is struck by the ball launcher 680 to when it is received at the upper prize winning opening 2006, after the game ball is received at the upper prize winning opening 2006, the outlet 3303a of the back lower right base 3303 is displayed. It is possible to direct the player's attention to the game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 by making it shorter than the period until it is difficult to see from the player.

[11. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is shot into the game area 5a to change the game state, the back drive motor of the back movable effect unit 3100 according to the changed game state. 3103 rotates. When the back drive motor 3103 rotates, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 attached to the unit base 3101 rotate together with the back drive motor 3103. When the first transmission member 3107 rotates and enters the first specific rotation range from one end of the first specific rotation range, the rotation of the first transmission member 3107 is transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117. Thus, the first transmitted member 3117 rotates. When the first transmitted member 3117 rotates, the first movable base 3116 extends from the base end which is one of both ends of the first movable range extending in a direction parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100 to the distal end side opposite to the base end. That is, it slides from the retracted position at the upper end toward the first appearance position below. Since the back upper decorative body 3152 is attached to the first movable base 3116 via the second movable base 3119, the back upper decorative body 3152 moves downward as the first movable base 3116 slides. It becomes. Thereafter, the first transmission member 3107 rotates to reach the range end on the opposite side of the first specific rotation range, and at the same time, the first movable base 3116 reaches the tip on the opposite side of the first movable range, that is, the descending end. In addition, when the first transmission member 3107 moves away from the first specific rotation range, the first movable base 3116 stops moving at the lower end. The second transmission member 3108 is rotating even while the first transmission member 3107 is rotating. However, since the second transmission member 3108 is not within the second specific rotation range, the second transmission member 3108 is rotating. Thus, the second movable base 3119 is not slid relative to the first movable base 3116.

  A second movable base drive member 3124 to which rotation from the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116. Since the second movable base drive member 3124 is slidably attached to the rotation link member 3123 in the direction in which the second transmission guide portion 3123d extends (second direction), when the first movable base 3116 slides, The rotary link member 3123 and the second movable base drive member 3124 rotate so that the second direction is parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, and the second movable base drive member 3124 becomes the rotary link member 3123. It slides relative to the second direction. At this time, when the second movable base drive member 3124 rotates, the second movable base 3119 slides relative to the first movable base 3116 by the amount that the second movable base drive member 3124 rotates, and the back decoration 3152 The second movable base 3119 moves slightly in the moving direction. However, when the second direction becomes parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, the rotation of the second movable base drive member 3124 stops, and the first The movement of the backside decorative body 3152 with respect to the movable base 3116 is also stopped. Since the moving direction of the second movable base 3119 is the same as the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, even if the second movable base 3119 slides slightly due to the rotation of the second movable base drive member 3124, The player is not noticed and the back decorative body 3152 can be moved without a sense of incongruity. In the initial state, when the second direction is parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, the rotary link member 3123 and the second movable base drive member 3124 do not rotate, and the second movable base. 3119 does not slide relatively.

  Subsequently, the first transmission member 3107 is separated from the first specific rotation range by the rotation of the back drive motor 3103, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are further rotated, and the second transmission member 3108 is rotated. When entering the second specific rotation range from one end of the second specific rotation range, the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted to the second transmitted member 3122 and the second transmitted member 3122 starts rotating. To do. When the second transmitted member 3122 rotates, the rotary link member 3123 is slidably attached in the extending direction (first direction) of the first transmission guide portion 3122e to the second transmitted member 3122. Will revolve around. When the rotary link member 3123 revolves, the extending direction in the second direction tends to rotate. Then, when the orientation in the second direction (rotating link member 3123) tries to rotate, the rotating link is such that the reaction force from the part where the second movable base drive member 3124 is slidably attached in the second direction is reduced. The second movable base drive member 3124 is rotated while the member 3123 slides along the first direction and the second direction, respectively. The rotation from the second transmission member 3108 is rotated by the second transmitted member 3122 and the rotation link. It can be transmitted to the second movable base drive member 3124 via the member 3123.

By transmitting the rotation to the second movable base drive member 3124, the second movable base 3119 is moved from the base end (upper end) which is one of both ends of the second movable range with respect to the first movable base 3116. The first movable base 3116 slides in the same downward direction as the moving direction of the first movable base 3116 toward the opposite tip (lower end) side. Accordingly, the back decorative body 3152 attached to the second movable base 3119 also moves downward together with the second movable base 3119.
Thereafter, the second transmission member 3108 rotates to reach the range end on the opposite side of the second specific rotation range, and at the same time, the second movable base 3119 reaches the tip (second appearance position) on the opposite side of the second movable range. When the second transmission member 3108 rotates and moves away from the second specific rotation range, the second movable base 3119 enters a state where the movement is stopped at the tip of the second movable range.

  When the second movable base 3119 slides with respect to the first movable base 3116, the decorative body rotating gear 3120 that is rotatably attached to the second movable base 3119 is attached to the rack that is attached to the first movable base 3116. The member 3115 moves while rotating along the rack gear 3115a. Since the back upper decorative body 3152 is attached to the decorative body rotating gear 3120, when the second movable base 3119 is slid, the back upper decorative body 3152 rotates and moves downward together with the second movable base 3119. It becomes.

  In this state, by reversely rotating the backside drive motor 3103, the second movable base 3119 and the first movable base 3116, that is, the backside decorative body 3152 are moved in the initial state by performing the reverse movement to the above. Can be returned to.

  Thus, according to this embodiment, since the 1st movable base 3116 and the 2nd movable base 3119 can be moved separately, the movement which moves to a back decoration body 3152 in two steps is provided. The back upper decorative body 3152 can be complicatedly moved. In addition, as a movable effect of the backside decorative body 3152, by moving only the first movable base 3116 or by moving the second movable base 3119 after the first movable base 3116 is moved, there are various patterns of movable effects. Therefore, it is possible to make the moving effect of the backside decorative body 3152 hard to get tired of, and to make the player entertained and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the second movable base 3119 is slid, the back upper decorative body 3152 is rotated downward together with the second movable base 3119 while rotating, so that more various movements are given to the back upper decorative body 3152. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 are slid in the same vertical direction, and the back upper decorative body 3152 can be moved a longer distance in the same direction. The impact of the movable performance by 3152 can be increased, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the rotation from the first transmission member 3107 is once transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117, the first movable base 3116 is moved by the first transmitted member 3117. The circumference of the first specific rotation range in the member 3107 can be amplified by the first transmitted member 3117, and the first movable range from the retracted position of the first movable base 3116 to the first appearance position is made larger. The back decorative body 3152 that moves greatly can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the back upper decoration body 3152 can be complicatedly moved only by one back drive motor 3103, for example, the first movable base 3116 is provided with another drive motor that moves the second movable base 3119. Since the number of drive motors can be reduced as compared with the case where the first movable base 3116 is not provided with a drive motor, the number of drive motors can be reduced. A load (weight) acting on one movable base 3116 can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the first movable base 3116 with a drive motor for the second movable base 3119, the back decorative body 3152 can be made larger (heavy) by the weight of the drive motor. The impact on the player can be increased by the complicated movement of the back upper decorative body 3152, and something can be done to the player by the complicated movement of the large back upper decorative body 3152 in two stages. It can be thought that there is a good thing, it can raise the expectation for a game and can suppress the fall of interest.

[Movement timing of movable accessory]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, various decorative bodies (hereinafter, referred to as movable accessories) whose movement is controlled by the peripheral control MPU can be performed in accordance with the operation of the upper plate effect button 257. It is like that. Hereinafter, it demonstrates in detail using FIGS.

  When the player operates the handle unit 500, the game ball is driven into the game area 5a, and when the game ball flowing down the game area 5a enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the main ball described above. Special lottery results for generating advantageous game states (for example, “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability fluctuation”, “per time reduction”, etc.) advantageous to the player on the control board A lottery or determination of a time (fluctuation time (for example, 5 to 360 seconds)) for suggesting a lottery result to a player is performed, and peripheral control is performed using these results as a determination result notification command and a fluctuation pattern command. The peripheral control MPU is output to the substrate, and based on these commands, the peripheral control MPU performs a variation effect using the central liquid crystal display device 1500 or a movable accessory.

  The variation effect of this example is based on an operation request effect in which the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, and then the player presses the upper plate effect button 257 in response to the operation request effect. As a result, the player can feel as if the player is participating in the game by moving the movable object in various manners, thereby enhancing the interest in the game (hereinafter referred to as a participation-type movable object effect).

  In this example, the participation type movable effect production will be described by taking the back movable production unit 3100 as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The front movable production unit 2560, the front movable production unit 2570, the back A participatory movable accessory effect is suitably used by using the lower front movable effect unit 3200, the rear right movable effect unit 3300, the rear left movable effect unit 3400, the rear lower rear movable effect unit 3500, the back four corner movable effect unit 3600, etc. Anyway.

Next, participatory movable accessory effects will be described with reference to FIGS.
The movable pattern of the backside movable production unit 3100 in the participation-type movable combination effect includes an immediate movement pattern, a movement pattern after one second, and a movement pattern after two seconds, which will be described later. FIG. FIG. 192 is a time chart when the immediate movable pattern is selected from among the movable patterns of the backside movable effect unit 3100. FIG. 192 shows the movable pattern of the backside movable effect unit 3100 in the participation-type movable character effect. FIG. 193 is a time chart when a movable pattern after 1 second, which will be described later, is selected. FIG. 193 shows that the movable pattern after 2 seconds is selected from the movable patterns of the back movable movable unit 3100 in the participation-type movable accessory effect. It is a time chart in the case. FIG. 194 is a movable timing table showing a timing pattern in which the back movable production unit 3100 is movable.
In the time chart of FIG. 191, timings of (A) operation effective period, (B) operation request effect, (C) upper plate effect button operation detection, and (D) immediate movable pattern are shown. In the time chart of (A), the timing of each of (A) operation effective period, (B) operation request effect, (C) upper plate effect button operation detection, (E) 1 second later movable pattern is shown, FIG. In the time chart, (A) operation effective period, (B) operation request effect, (C) upper plate effect button operation detection, and (F) 2 seconds later, the timing of the movable pattern is shown.

  In the case of a participatory movable accessory effect, a fluctuating effect is started, and as shown in (A), a time point at which the operation for the upper plate effect button 257 is disabled is set in advance as appropriate. As shown in (B), using the notification means such as the central liquid crystal display device 1500 and various speakers, an effect (operation request effect) for requesting the player to operate the upper plate effect button 257 is performed. Thus, it is configured to notify that the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is effective. Then, in response to the operation request effect, as shown in (C), when the player presses the upper plate effect button 257, the back movable effect unit 3100 is controlled to move. After pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are finished, and the back movable effect unit 3100 is movable. (D) as shown in (D), the immediate movable pattern in which the movable control of the backside movable production unit 3100 is performed by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, and (7) as shown in (E). After 1 second, the movement control of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is performed. A movable pattern after 1 second, as shown in FIG. There are a movable pattern and the like after 2 seconds when the movable control is performed.

When the immediate movable pattern is selected, as shown in FIG. 191, when the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, an upper plate effect button 257 is displayed by the player. When the pressing operation is performed, the operation valid period and the operation request effect are turned off when the operation is detected, and thereafter, the back movable effect unit 3100 is controlled to be movable.
If the movable pattern is selected after one second, as shown in FIG. 192, when the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, the player When the effect button 257 is pressed, the operation valid period and the operation request effect are turned off when the operation is detected, and the back movable movable effect unit 1 second after the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 is detected. 3100 is controlled to move.
When the movable pattern is selected after 2 seconds, as shown in FIG. 193, when the operation effective period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, the player When the effect button 257 is pressed, the operation valid period and the operation request effect are turned off when the operation is detected, and the back movable effect unit 2 seconds after the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 is detected. 3100 is controlled to move.
As a result, the timing at which the back upper movable effect unit 3100 moves after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed differs depending on which movable pattern is selected. The throbbing feeling obtained by not knowing whether it is controlled increases, and it becomes possible to strengthen the impact in the participation type movable accessory production.

  In addition, in the participation-type movable accessory effect, the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed even though the operation request effect that requires the player to operate the upper plate effect button 257 is executed in the operation request effect. If the immediate movable pattern is selected when it is not pressed during the operable period for accepting the image, the back movable movable effect unit 3100 is controlled to move immediately after the operation valid period ends, and the movable pattern after 1 second. Is selected 1 second after the operation valid period ends, and if the movable pattern is selected after 2 seconds, 2 seconds after the operation valid period ends. The back movable production unit 3100 is controlled to move. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the operable period is over, the back movable production unit 3100 is operated at an appropriate timing. The Tsu door 3100 may be allowed to move. Alternatively, the back movable production unit 3100 may not be moved.

  Further, the peripheral control board is for determining timing for determining the timing at which the back movable movable effect unit 3100 moves as means for determining the timing at which the back movable movable effect unit 3100 moves in the participation-type movable accessory effect. A random number and a movable timing table are prepared in advance, and the production mode of the participation-type movable accessory effect is determined based on the random number for timing determination and the movable timing table. Then, according to the special lottery result drawn by the main control board, the back movable movable effect unit 3100 is movably controlled by the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 by the player's operation according to the effect pattern determined by the peripheral control MPU. In the case of an effect, after the effect is determined, the movable timing of the back movable effect unit 3100 is determined from the timing determination random number extracted by the timing determination random number extraction means and the movable timing table. It is.

  Next, timing determination random numbers will be described with reference to FIG. The random number for timing determination in this example is set so as to determine which participatory movable accessory effect is executed. For example, 100 types of variable random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 99) indicating that any one of the participation-type movable accessory effects is executed, and 60 types of variable random numbers are included in the upper plate effect button 257. Is set as a determination value indicating that an immediate movable pattern in which the movable control of the back movable effect unit 3100 is controlled at an immediate timing after the pressing operation is performed (0 to 59). After the pressing operation on the button 257, it is set as a determination value indicating that the movable pattern after 1 second in which the movable control of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is performed at the timing after 1 second (60 to 84), and 15 types The variable random number is movable after 2 seconds when the movable control of the back movable effect unit 3100 is performed at a timing 2 seconds after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257. It is set as a determination value indicating performing a turn (85 to 99).

  In addition, as the timing for determining the movable timing of the back movable effect unit 3100 after the pressing operation is performed on the upper plate effect button 257 in the participation-type movable accessory effect, after the effect is determined by the peripheral control MPU. For example, according to the special lottery result drawn by the main control board, the effect pattern determined by the peripheral control MPU is changed to the back movable effect unit 3100 by the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 by the player's operation. In response to an operation request effect instructing the player to press the upper plate effect button 257 on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 or the like. When the user presses the upper plate effect button 257, the timing determination random number extraction means extracts the timing determination random number. , It may be determined movable timing of the back on a movable direction unit 3100.

  Also, in the change timing pattern of the notice pending image, in this example, the probability that an immediate change pattern is selected is 50%, the probability that a change pattern after 1 second is selected is 30%, and the probability that a change pattern after 2 seconds is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that each movable pattern is selected may be changed as appropriate.

[Variations of participatory movable accessory production]
Further, as a variation of the participation-type movable accessory production, the timing at which the back movable production unit 3100 is movably controlled after the upper plate production button 257 is pressed until the actual movement control is seen. The player is unknown, and the display of variation in the lottery result when the participation-type movable accessory effect is selected is started. When the upper plate effect button is pressed during the operation valid period, the player can move upside down. After suggesting that the effect unit 3100 does not move, the back movable effect unit 3100 may be controlled to move with a time difference. Hereinafter, this will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 195 shows the flow of an effect in which a movable pattern advance notice is performed when a movable character effect is selected after one second in the participation-type movable character effect. (A) is a participation-type movable character effect. The state where the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is shown, (B) shows the state where the participatory movable accessory effect is performed, and (C) shows the operation request effect. (D) shows a state of less than 1 second after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, and (E) shows 1 after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed. This shows a state in which the second has passed and the back movable effect unit 3100 is exposed in front of the central liquid crystal display device 1500.

For example, when the movable pattern is selected after 1 second, the special lottery result in which the participation-type movable accessory effect is selected is the indication of the special lottery result until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The start is put on hold, and the hold display is performed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. Here, the normal hold display is H1, and the hold display of the participation-type movable accessory effect is H2.
The suggestion of the result of the special lottery of H2 is started, an image imitating the upper plate effect button 257 is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and an image “PUSH !!” is displayed below the operation request for pressing the pressing operation. Production is performed. When an operation is performed on the upper plate effect button 257 in response to the operation request effect, a message image “Sorry!” Is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. By seeing this, the player loses the desire to move the back movable production unit 3100 and is disappointed at one time, but the back movable production effect is one second after the operation on the upper plate production button 257 is performed. The unit 3100 rotates and is exposed so as to cover the central liquid crystal display device 1500.

  As described above, after pressing the upper plate effect button 257, after suggesting to the player that the back upper movable effect unit 3100 does not move, the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is controlled to move with a time difference. Therefore, although it is discouraged once, the interest can be improved again, the game can be excited, and the interest for the game can be improved.

  In addition, during the game, the movable pattern of the backside movable production unit 3100 in the last participation type movable effect production performed in the game is an immediate movable pattern, and then the backside movable of the participation type movable role production selected by lottery. If the movable pattern of the effect unit 3100 is also an immediate movable pattern, the player cannot recognize that there are a plurality of types of movable patterns of the backside movable effect unit 3100, and presses the upper plate effect button 257. In this example, since the movable pattern after pressing seems to be one pattern, there is a possibility that the impact of the movement of the backside movable production unit 3100 will not be felt and the interest in the game may be reduced. A movable pattern different from the movable pattern in the participation-type movable combination effect performed in the above is selected.

  In addition, for example, when the immediate movable pattern is selected as the movable pattern in the last participation type movable character effect, the movable pattern to be selected next is either the movable pattern after 1 second or the movable pattern after 2 seconds. When the movable pattern after 1 second is selected, either the immediate movable pattern or the movable pattern after 2 seconds is selected as the next movable pattern to be selected. When the movable pattern after 2 seconds is selected, the immediate movable pattern or the movable pattern after 1 second is selected as the movable pattern to be selected next. Thereby, since a movable pattern different from the previously selected movable pattern is selected, it is possible to prevent the same movable pattern from being viewed continuously, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. it can.

  In addition, the back-side movable effect unit 3100 may be controlled to move after the gas effect is performed. For example, when the movable pattern is selected after 2 seconds, the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is temporarily vibrated immediately after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed according to the operation request effect. The player sees the backside movable production unit 3100 that is not exposed in front of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and makes an illusion that the backside movable production unit 3100 is considered to be movable, that is, a so-called Gase production. Although disappointed, since the back movable production unit 3100 moves 2 seconds after the upper plate production button 257 is pressed, the interest can be improved again, and the excitement of the game can be enhanced.

  For example, when a movable pattern after 2 seconds is selected as one pattern of the above-mentioned effect, the back movable effect unit 3100 is temporarily vibrated immediately after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed according to the operation request effect. After that, the door lower right effect unit 270 may be controlled to be movable. By temporarily vibrating the back movable effect unit 3100, the player thinks that the back movable effect unit 3100 is movable, but two seconds after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, the lower right door effect unit. 270 is controlled to move. Thereby, since a movable accessory different from the player's expectation is controlled, the player can be surprised and it is possible to enhance the interest in the participation-type movable accessory production.

  In the above description of this example, in the participatory movable accessory effect, if the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed during the operation valid period, the back movable effect unit 3100 is movable according to the selected movable pattern. Although it was controlled, it is not necessarily controlled to move. For example, if a production game executed as a participatory movable accessory production is successful, the back movable production unit 3100 is controlled to move, and conversely fails. In other words, the back movable movable unit 3100 may not be movable. Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 196 is a diagram showing a time chart when the effect game is successful, and FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a time chart when the effect game fails.

For example, as a participatory movable accessory effect, when a successful effect game is executed by the peripheral control board when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), as shown in FIG. When the operation effective period of A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, as shown in (C), when an operation on the upper plate effect button 257 by the player is detected ten times, the effect game As a result, the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are finished, and the back movable effect unit 3100 moves as shown in (D).
Further, as shown in FIG. 197, when the operation effective period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, when the operation to the upper plate effect button 257 is less than 10 times, The back movable production unit 3100 is not movable.

  In addition, in the participation type movable character effect, in this example, the probability that an immediate movable pattern is selected is 60%, the probability that a movable pattern is selected after 1 second is 25%, and the probability that a movable pattern is selected after 2 seconds is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that each movable pattern is selected may be changed as appropriate.

  Further, in this example, as an effect that the player can participate in, the movable accessory (here, the upper movable effect unit 3100 here) is movable after the operation means (here, the upper plate effect button 257) is operated by the player. By preparing multiple types of timing to be controlled, the timing at which the movable accessory related to the pressing of the operating means is controlled is not constant, and the feeling of throb that can be obtained by not knowing at which timing it is controlled is increased However, although the description of the participation-type movable actor production that can strengthen the impact in the production has been described, the production mode is not only the production using the movable actor, but after the player has operated the operation means As long as there are a plurality of types of timings for switching, in addition to the player-participation-type effects using the central liquid crystal display device 1500, Central may be a director of player participation type carried out in only the liquid crystal display device 1500.

  In this example, an example in which an operation means that can be pressed, such as the upper plate effect button 257, is used for the participation-type movable accessory effect, but the operation means is limited to the upper plate effect button 257. Instead, a touch panel 246 capable of a contact operation, a stick-type operation means that allows a player to perform a tilting operation, an operation means such as a rotary selector that allows a player to perform a rotation operation, and the like are used as appropriate. You may do it.

[Second embodiment of the movable timing of the movable accessory]
In the present embodiment, the participation-type movable accessory effect is a configuration in which the lottery ratio of the movable pattern in the back movable effect unit 3100 is changed according to the number of rounds when the advantageous game state (for example, big hit) is drawn by the main control board. It is said. This will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 198 is a movable timing table showing a timing pattern in which the back movable production unit 3100 is movable for each number of rounds when a big hit is drawn. (A) is a movable timing table that is selected when a 15-round jackpot is drawn, (b) is a movable timing table that is selected when a 8-round jackpot is drawn, and (c) is 2 It is a movable timing table selected when a round big hit is drawn.

  When a 15-round jackpot is drawn by the main control board, as shown in FIG. 198 (a), 80 types of variable random numbers are displayed immediately after pressing the upper plate effect button 257. It is set as a determination value indicating that an immediate movable pattern in which the movable control of the movable effect unit 3100 is controlled is executed (0 to 79), and after 10 seconds, 10 types of variable random numbers are pressed against the upper plate effect button 257. Is set as a determination value indicating that the movable pattern is to be executed after 1 second when the movable control of the back movable effect unit 3100 is performed (80 to 89), and ten kinds of variable random numbers are applied to the upper plate effect button 257. Indicates that a movable pattern after 2 seconds in which the movable control of the back movable movable effect unit 3100 is performed at a timing after 2 seconds after the pressing operation is performed. It is set as the value (90 to 99).

  When the main control board wins a round of 8 rounds, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), 10 types of variable random numbers are displayed immediately after pressing the upper plate effect button 257. It is set as a determination value indicating that an immediate movable pattern in which the movable control of the movable effect unit 3100 is controlled is executed (0 to 9), and after one second after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed, 80 types of variable random numbers Is set as a determination value indicating that the movable pattern is to be executed after 1 second when the movable control of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is performed (10 to 89), and 10 kinds of variable random numbers are applied to the upper plate effect button 257. Judgment indicating execution of a movable pattern after 2 seconds in which the movable control of the back movable movable effect unit 3100 is performed at a timing after 2 seconds after the pressing operation. Is set as (90 to 99).

  When the 2nd round big hit is drawn by the main control board, as shown in FIG. 198 (c), 10 kinds of variable random numbers are displayed on the back immediately after pressing the upper plate effect button 257. It is set as a determination value indicating that an immediate movable pattern in which the movable control of the movable effect unit 3100 is controlled is performed (0 to 9), and after 10 seconds, ten kinds of variable random numbers are pressed on the upper plate effect button 257. Is set as a determination value indicating that a movable pattern is to be executed one second after the movable control of the back movable effect unit 3100 is performed (10 to 19), and 80 types of variable random numbers are applied to the upper plate effect button 257. Judgment indicating execution of a movable pattern after 2 seconds in which the movable control of the back movable movable effect unit 3100 is performed at a timing after 2 seconds after the pressing operation. It is set as (20-99).

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment described above, the number of rounds related to the jackpot can be predicted to some extent by the movable pattern of the back movable effect unit 3100 after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed. For example, when the back movable effect unit 3100 is moved immediately after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, the player recalls that the 15 round round big hit has a high probability and presses the upper plate effect button 257. If the back movable effect unit 3100 moves immediately after 2 seconds, the player recalls that a two-round jackpot has a high probability. Thereby, the player can be relieved by the movable pattern of the back movable production unit 3100, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 257 Upper plate production | presentation button 341 Upper surface part shaft gear 342 Rear part gear 343 Drive motor 344 Rotating shaft 348 Receiving part 349 Receiving part 351 Upper overhanging panel 351a Upper overhanging Upper surface portion 352 Upper display device 353 Upper decoration member 354 Upper first speaker 355 Upper second speaker 356 Upper third speaker 358 Upper overhanging lid portion 359 Upper second display device 361 Hinge 362 Hinge shaft 363 Sector gear 364 Motor gear 371 Upper right gear Box 372 Upper left gear box 373 Cam member 374 Upper front gear 375 Upper rear gear 376 Upper drive motor 377 Slide concave portion 378 Slide convex portion 379 Side concave portion 382 Upper gear box 383 Front gear 384 Rear gear 385 Drive motor 398 Left rotation Shaft 399 Right rotation shaft 390 Left movable seat 391 Right movable seat 392 Rotation mechanism 393 Upper gear 394 Middle gear 395 Lower gear 396 Cover member 397 Seat stopper piece 472 Gear box 473 Gear box base 474 First gear 475 Second gear 476 Second gear 476 3-gear 477 Motor 478 Rotating shaft 479 Rotating base 481 Reverse movement mechanism 482 Left pinion 483 Right pinion 484 Drive gear 485 Left rack gear 486 Right rack gear 487 Pinion shaft 488 Pinion shaft 489 Drive shaft 490 Left overhang panel 490a Left outer window 490b Left Inner side window 491 Right extension panel 491a Right outer window 491b Right inner window 495 Left extension display 496 Right extension display 501 Right extension mechanism 503 Belt type movable part 510 Belt mechanism 511 Frame member 511a Left wall 511b Right wall 511c Rear wall 512 Toothed belt 513 Upper belt gear 514 Lower belt gear 515 Connecting bracket 516 Belt drive motor 517 Screw 518 Slide recess 519 Slide recess 1
257 Upper plate effect button 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1500 Central liquid crystal display device 2002 First start port 2004 Second start port 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3010a Opening 3100 Back movable movable unit 3101 Unit base 3103 Back top drive motor (Drive motor)
3104 Drive gear 3105 1st driven gear 3106 2nd driven gear 3107 1st transmission member 3107a 1st transmission gear 3107b 1st transmission pin 3107c 1st lock protrusion 3107d 2nd transmission part 3108a 2nd transmission member 3108a 2nd transmission gear 3108b Second transmission pin 3108c Second lock projection 3108d Second notch 3115 Rack member 3115a Rack gear (decorative rack gear)
3116 1st movable base 3117 1st to-be-transmitted member 3117a 1st board | substrate part 3117b 1st action | operation pin 3117c 1st to-be-transmitted main-body part 3117d 1st transmission slit 3117e 1st lock | rock recessed part 3119 2nd movable base 3120 Decorative body rotation gear 3122 1st Second transmitted member 3122a Second substrate portion 3122b Second transmitted body portion 3122c Second transmitted slit 3122d Second lock recess 3122e First transmission guide portion 3123 Rotating link member 3123a Link body portion 3123b First transmitted guide portion 3123d Second Transmission guide portion 3124 Second movable base drive member 3124a Second action pin 3124b Drive main body portion 3124c Second transmitted guide portion 3125 Shaft member 3150 Back decorative unit (decorative body)
3151 Decorative body base 3152 Decorative body on the back (decorative body)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising an outer frame and a body frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, wherein a game is played using a game ball,
The outer frame is
A lower member including a curtain plate, which is provided at a lower portion and on which the main body frame is placed in a state where the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame;
A hinge member that is provided on the left side of the outer frame and supports the main body frame so that it can be opened and closed;
Having at least
A game ball discharge area for discharging the game ball to the rear side of the curtain plate, formed at a position retracted rearward on the side where the hinge member is provided,
A standing wall portion that is formed in a horizontally long shape including the rear of the game ball discharge area;
With
The game ball discharge area is formed at least on the right side of the rotation shaft when the main body frame opens and closes, but is not formed in a portion in contact with the standing wall portion directly behind the rotation shaft,
The upper end of the upright wall portion at a position retracted rearward on the side where the hinge member is provided is a portion of the portion of the curtain plate where the main body frame is placed where the upright wall portion does not exist at the position retracted rearward To be higher than the top of
Provide a return portion extending forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion,
A gaming machine characterized in that all of the game ball discharge area is not blocked by the lower surface of the main frame when the main frame is closed .